Installation &
Maintenance
Manual
I&M
?

Introduction
?
I&M

?
I&M

Introduction
1
1
Introduction to Perfect Guest Messaging
You should read this document before installing, reinstalling or making changes to the system. You should
become familiar with the Perfect Guest Messaging features, the system set up and configuration.
Overview
Perfect Guest Messaging is a full-featured voice and call processing software product designed to meet
corporate needs with seamless telephone integration and LAN connectivity.
Every business, regardless of size, needs to communicate information quickly and efficiently to compete in
today's business environment. With Perfect Guest Messaging, an organization can truly streamline its inter-
office communication by providing superior applications that give the flexibility to excel in today's
competitive climate.
The Perfect Guest Messaging system uses software, a personal computer and speech processing boards to
automatically process telephone calls. Perfect Guest Messaging answers telephone calls, manages spoken
messages, notifies Users of messages, transfers calls, and makes calls to deliver or retrieve information.
The automated attendant feature in Perfect Guest Messaging may also provide access to company directories,
automatic transfer of callers using rotary phones to a receptionist, after-hours answering and holiday
greetings. The attendant can screen callers for the User, provide music or product messages while a caller is
on hold in queue, and redirect a call either before it is transferred to an extension or if the extension is busy or
not answered.
Perfect Guest Messaging can eliminate telephone tag, inaccurate messages, and lost messages. Voice
messaging allows a mailbox owner to receive, send, delete, skip, redirect, review, and update messages. Users
may pause, fast-forward, and rewind messages during playback; send copies of messages to other Users; and
?
confirm message reception.
Perfect Guest Messaging is a menu-driven system with voice prompts. Through the use of voice prompts,
Perfect Guest Messaging conveys available options. Users may interrupt the prompts by pressing the
telephone keypad button for an option before the voice prompt is finished.
The Perfect Guest Messaging's sophisticated multilingual feature makes it the perfect product for today's
global economy. Business has no borders or official language. Perfect Guest Messaging may be set up to
communicate in up to nine simultaneous languages, providing companies the corporate services traditionally
found in only large corporations.
Voice Messaging
I&M
Users may leave, retrieve, save, delete, and forward messages, change personal greetings, and record new
greetings from any touch tone telephone 24 hours a day. Perfect Guest Messaging provides added security
with complete password protection to access an individual's mailbox.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

2
Introduction
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant increases call processing capabilities within a company. Perfect Guest Messaging
answers incoming calls and transfers them to the appropriate extensions. It performs promptly, courteously,
and professionally 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Valuable customers won't have to spend time waiting to
be transferred but a live operator is always available for those who may need special assistance. For sales,
order desk, accounts payable, shipping, and many other departments, the Automated Attendant significantly
accelerates caller connection. It can be used full time or only as required, such as during peak calling periods,
overflow situations, after hours, lunch breaks, holidays, etc. Callers who don't know their party's extension
number may access directory assistance. The attendant can screen callers for the user, provide music or
product messages while the caller is on hold, and redirect a call either before it is transferred to an extension
or if the extension is busy or not answered. Perfect Guest Messaging can connect callers to users who are
offsite by giving callers direct access to the user's cellular, home telephone, or branch office. It gives callers
single digit access to departments or individuals and direct access into a full-featured audiotext menu. It can
answer in multiple languages, and continue in the caller's language if the call is transferred to a mailbox.
The Automated Attendant maximizes telephone line efficiency and is far more economical than direct-
inward-dialing services. It improves customer service and employee satisfaction by enabling callers to get
directly to the person with whom they wish to speak.
Voice Menus
Perfect Guest Messaging voice menus are used to design full-featured custom designed call routing
applications. Global PIN numbers may be used to identify particular callers throughout the system for routing
purposes. Through the use of voice menu audiotext "trees", messages can be pre-recorded to provide
important information. Callers may then leave responses using the Perfect Guest Messaging IVR functions.
Voice menus ensure that callers get the information they need, at anytime, without any assistance. The
information is available to them 24 hours a day 7 days a week.
Voice menus may be used to create industry-specific solutions such as banking applications, education,
?
insurance, and hospitality.
Fax Services
The Fax Services module of Perfect Guest Messaging includes Fax On Demand and Fax Mail. Fax On
Demand enables Perfect Guest Messaging to fax information to callers at their request. Fax files are set up in
Perfect Guest Messaging one time for information that may be delivered many times. Callers may request a
fax by pressing the appropriate digit(s) on a touch tone telephone. It is not necessary to store Fax On Demand
documents on the Perfect Guest Messaging Voice Messaging Server they may be stored on any PC
connected to the network. Up to 10,000 documents may be used for Fax On Demand.
Fax Mail allows users to handle fax messages just like voice messages. Customers, suppliers, and contacts
I&M
can send private and confidential faxes directly to the user's mailbox rather than a generic fax machine.
Users can access these fax messages via the telephone interface, desktop interface, or unified messaging e-
mail mailbox. Fax messages may be printed, saved, deleted, or directed to a specified fax machine.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Introduction
3
Perfect Guest Messaging Gives You the Power To:
Depending on how Perfect Guest Messaging and users are configured, below are some of the powerful
features of the system.
System Administrators
3 Perform administrative functions utilizing the user-friendly Windows interface or the telephone keypad
3 Set up multi-tenanting for multiple company, or department applications. This includes independent
greetings, holidays, languages, business hours, operators, etc.
3 Assign single digit caller options and day / night operators.
3 Custom-program call routing applications with full-featured audiotext.
3 Create global schedules that may be applied to voice menus, e-mail, call routing tables, or PIN routing
tables.
3 Customize mailbox templates for users
3 Assign a personalized operator for each mailbox.
3 Create customized Classes of Service for mailboxes
3 Get online help, administration, diagnostics, and reporting.
Users
3 Record up to 99 personalized greetings to answer incoming calls.
3 Record personal greetings in more than one language.
3 Record telephone conversations.
3 Create up to 99 individual distribution lists per user.
3 Control message play back with pause, rewind, fast forward, & skip messages functions.
3 Mark messages as urgent or certified for return receipt verification.
3 Block calls to user's extension.
3 Screen calls to user's extension.
3 Announce calls to user's extension before the caller is transferred.
3 Login or out of the system. "Logged in" status allows transfers. Logged out status does not ring the
extension and plays the "Gone Home" greeting.
?
3 Turn time and date stamp of messages on or off.
3 Have flexible internal or external message notification.
3 Have Unified Messaging via E-Mail.
3 Send text messages to other network users.
Callers
3 Use directory assistance to search by user's name
3 Review and/or re-record messages before sending.
3 L.A.P. (Local Area Paging) page a user.
3 Mark messages as urgent before sending.
3 Page a user through the telephone system intercom
3 Send a fax to a user.
I&M
3 Announce calls through the telephone system intercom.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

4
Introduction
. . . . . This page intentionally left blank . . . . .
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
?
I&M

?
I&M

CONTENTS
1 - INSTALLATION CHECKLIST ................................................................................................... 1
2 - BEFORE YOU BEGIN.............................................................................................................. 3
Manage the Customer's Expectations..................................................................................................... 3
Use All Available Expertise .................................................................................................................... 3
Get All the Parties Involved .................................................................................................................... 3
Verify the Capabilities of the Customer's Telephone System .................................................................. 3
Installer Requirements............................................................................................................................ 4
Required Equipment............................................................................................................................... 4
Equipment For Remote Access .............................................................................................................. 4
3 - GETTING STARTED................................................................................................................. 5
Step 1: Complete the Pre-Installation Worksheets.................................................................................. 5
Transfer Parameters Worksheet ........................................................................................................................5
Message Light Parameters Worksheet...............................................................................................................6
Auto Attendant Parameters Worksheet ..............................................................................................................6
Voice Mail Parameters Worksheet ....................................................................................................................6
Inband Parameters Worksheet...........................................................................................................................7
User Directory Worksheet.................................................................................................................................8
Business Hours Worksheet ................................................................................................................................9
Company Greetings Script ................................................................................................................................9
Mailbox Class of Service Worksheet ...............................................................................................................10
Step 2: Unpack and Inspect the System ............................................................................................... 11
Step 3: Placement of Perfect Guest Messaging.................................................................................... 11
4 - ASSEMBLING THE SYSTEM ................................................................................................. 12
Step 1: Test the AC Outlet.................................................................................................................... 12
Step 2: Install the Un-interruptable Power Supply ................................................................................. 13
?
Step 3: Install the Sentinel Key............................................................................................................. 13
Step 4: Connect Telephone Lines......................................................................................................... 14
Rhetorex Board Connections...........................................................................................................................14
5 - ENTER DEALER AND SITE INFORMATION.......................................................................... 15
Enter the Dealer Information ................................................................................................................ 16
Enter the Site Information..................................................................................................................... 17
6 - SETTING UP THE NETWORK................................................................................................ 18
What is a Network? .............................................................................................................................. 18
Guidelines ............................................................................................................................................ 19
Step 1: Determine the network type...................................................................................................... 19
Step 2: Set up the Protocols for Your Particular Network ...................................................................... 19
Configuring TCP/IP Under Windows 95/98.....................................................................................................19
I&M
Considerations for Windows 95/98..................................................................................................................22
Step 3: Install the Transport Management Utility................................................................................... 23
Using SessionQ...............................................................................................................................................23
Session Q Central ...........................................................................................................................................24
Connections Info.............................................................................................................................................24
Sessions Info ...................................................................................................................................................25
Filters .............................................................................................................................................................25
Options ...........................................................................................................................................................26
Step 4: Common Tasks for all Network Types and Environments ......................................................... 28
Step 5: Verify the Network Connection ................................................................................................. 28
7 - LOGGING ON/OFF THE SYSTEM.......................................................................................... 29
Logging on to Perfect Guest Messaging: .............................................................................................. 29

Logging off of Perfect Guest Messaging ............................................................................................... 30
8 - CHANGING SYSTEM PASSWORDS ......................................................................................31
To change the passwords: .................................................................................................................... 31
9 - VERIFY SYSTEM PARAMETERS ...........................................................................................32
What is Integration? ............................................................................................................................. 32
In Band Signaling (IBS) ........................................................................................................................ 32
"Simple" IBS......................................................................................................................................... 33
Out-of-Band Signaling (OBS) ............................................................................................................... 33
SMDI Integration .................................................................................................................................. 33
Verify the System Parameters .............................................................................................................. 34
Verify Auto Attendant Parameters - (144 to 158) .................................................................................. 35
Verify Voice Mail Parameters - (159 to 161) ......................................................................................... 36
Fax Parameters - (300 to 317).............................................................................................................. 37
Fax Parameters - (300 to 317) continued.............................................................................................. 38
Verify Transfer Parameters (162-169) .................................................................................................. 39
Verify Transfer Parameters (162-169) continued .................................................................................. 40
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Disconnect Parameters - (174 to 181) ........................................................ 41
Verify Inband Parameters - (182 to 197) ............................................................................................... 42
Verify Inband Parameters - (182 to 197) continued............................................................................... 43
Verify Notification Parameters (170 to 173) .......................................................................................... 44
Verify Message Light Parameters - (350 to 360) ................................................................................... 45
Verify Message Light Parameters - (350 to 360) ................................................................................... 46
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Global Parameters - (001 to 023) ............................................................... 47
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Global Parameters - (001 to 023) Continued .............................................. 48
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Internal Parameters - (24 to 62) ................................................... 49
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Internal Parameters Continued..................................................... 50
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Internal Parameters - (24 to 62) Continued................................... 51
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel External Parameters (64-102) ...................................................... 52
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel External Parameters (64-102) Continued ..................................... 53
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel External Parameters (64-102) Continued ..................................... 54
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Busy Only Parameters (104-142) ................................................. 55
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Busy Only Parameters Continued ................................................ 56
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Busy Only Parameters (104-142) Continued ................................ 57
?
10 - CONFIGURE THE SYSTEM FOR PERFECT STAY..............................................................58
1. Confirm that the correct mailboxes are entered on the Perfect Guest Messaging System................ 58
2. Verify the Network Connection ........................................................................................................ 58
3. Enable Perfect Guest Messaging for Perfect Stay using the System Configuration Utility ................ 58
4. Verify that the PMS.DAT file is being transferred correctly................................................................ 59
5. Test the System .............................................................................................................................. 59
11 - PROGRAM THE TELEPHONE SYSTEM ..............................................................................60
Hardware Requirements ....................................................................................................................... 60
Software/Programming Requirements .................................................................................................. 60
Automated Attendant Extensions.......................................................................................................... 60
Outdial Notification Extension............................................................................................................... 61I&M
Integration Parameters ......................................................................................................................... 61
Bypass Mode........................................................................................................................................ 61
Other Modifications .............................................................................................................................. 61
12 - INSTALL THE DESKTOP INTERFACE.................................................................................62
Install the Desktop Software ................................................................................................................. 62
Install the Player for Unified Messaging via E-Mail Integration.............................................................. 67
13 - TESTING PERFECT GUEST MESSAGING..........................................................................68
14 - TRAINING ..............................................................................................................................69
System Administrator Training.............................................................................................................. 69
User Training........................................................................................................................................ 69
Console Operator Training ................................................................................................................... 69

15 - FINAL CUTOVER.................................................................................................................. 70
16 - ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................... 71
Startup Options .................................................................................................................................... 71
Dialstring Codes ................................................................................................................................... 72
Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse............................................................................................. 73
17 - TELECO TECHNICAL SUPPORT ........................................................................................ 74
Before Calling Technical Support ......................................................................................................... 74
?
I&M

?
I&M

Installation
1
1
Installation Checklist
q Complete the Pre-Installation Worksheets
See Installation Section 3: " Getting Started", pages 5-10
q Unpack and Inspect the System
See Installation Section 3: "Getting Started", page 11
q Placement of the System
See Installation Section 3: "Getting Started", page 11
q Assemble the System
1. Test the AC Outlet
2. Install UPS
3. Install Sentinel Key
4. Connect Telephone Lines
?
See Installation Section 4: "Assembling the System", pages 12-14
q Enter Dealer and Site Information
See Installation Section 5: "Enter Dealer and Site Information", page 15-17
q Setting up the Network
· Determine Network Type
·
I&M
Set up Protocols
· Install the Transport Management Utility
· Perform Common Tasks for all Network Types and Environments
· Verify the Network Connection
See Installation Sections 6: "Setting Up the Network", pages 18-28
q Log on to the System/Change Passwords
See Installation Sections 7-8, pages 29-31
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

2
Installation
q Verify System Parameters
See Installation Section 9: "Verify System Parameters", pages 32-57
q Configure the Database
At a minimum, the following must be completed. For more detailed information and setting up
specific features, refer to the Database Configuration section.
· Company Configuration
· Set up Class of Service(s)
· Create User Mailboxes
See Database Configuration
q Configure the Database
See Installation -- Section 10: "Configure the system for Perfect Stay", pages 58-59
q Program the Telephone System
See Installation Section 11: "Program the Telephone System", pages 60-61
q
?
Install Desktop Interface
See Installation Section 12: "Install the Desktop Interface", pages 62-67
q Test the System
See Installation Section 13: "Testing Perfect Guest Messaging", page 68
q Perform Training
·
I&M
System Administrator
· End User
· Console Operator
See Installation Section 14: "Training", page 69
q Perform Final Cutover
See Installation Section 15: "Final Cutover", page 70
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
3

2
Before You Begin
Manage the Customer's Expectations
The management of the customer's expectations begins with the salesperson's first contact with the customer and
continues through the entire installation and acceptance process. The best tools for managing the customers'
expectations are product knowledge and communication with the customer. A pre-installation meeting with the
customer that includes a detailed discussion of how the system will be configured should be held to help effect a
smooth transition.
Although the customer may be intimately familiar with the communications problems at his site, he may not know
much about how Perfect Guest Messaging can solve those problems. Armed with a thorough understanding of
Perfect Guest Messaging's capabilities and the customer's problems, the installer is the one in a position to
engineer the best possible telecommunications solution. If the installer allows the customer to engineer the
solution, it may result in a partial solution and possibly a solution that cannot be supported.
Use All Available Expertise
If a customer brings up issues that are beyond the scope of your immediate expertise, confirm your speculations
about a solution before making a commitment. Refer to other expertise within your company, your Regional Sales
Manager or Teleco Technical Support for answers to any questions you may have about the product.
If you are not directly responsible for the telephone system to which the Perfect Guest Messaging will be
interfacing, try to coordinate directly with the interconnect in charge. The installation of Perfect Guest Messaging
requires a great deal of coordination between the programming of the telephone system and the configuration of
Perfect Guest Messaging. The interconnect in charge should have access to the telephone system manufacturer's
technical support resources. No matter who is responsible for the telephone system programming, make certain
the customer's telephone system can be configured properly to match the features desired by the customer on the
Perfect Guest Messaging. Even the most basic features of any voice processing system depend on the ability of
?
the telephone system to be configured appropriately.
Get All the Parties Involved
Although the person who makes the decision to implement Perfect Guest Messaging into his operation may take it
seriously, the individual responsible for actually implementing the solution may not. This individual may work as
an employee or may work as a contractor. It is important for everyone to recognize the significance of the changes
to their organization as a result of the efforts of all parties.
For many sites, especially those sites that have never had voice processing before, Perfect Guest Messaging will
change the way their business works, often in more ways than expected. A similar situation is evident when a
business purchases a computer system to do their accounting, replacing adding machines and hand-written ledgers
with spreadsheet software. Although many of the old problems will, by definition, disappear, new problems may
I&M
arise, especially if the technology is not handled properly or taken seriously.
Much of the success of any installation rests on the training and understanding of the key people in the
organization.
Verify the Capabilities of the Customer's Telephone System
Even though the Perfect Guest Messaging system has been shipped configured for the telephone system identified
on the sales order, the telephone system must be configured for proper interfacing with the Perfect Guest
Messaging. For example, if the telephone system is to be programmed to forward busy calls, some features of
Perfect Guest Messaging cannot be used such as Call Screening. Make sure your customer's telephone system can
be configured properly to match the features desired by the customer.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

4
Installation
Installer Requirements
The installer plays a key role in the successful installation of the voice processing hardware and software. In
addition to performing the actual work of installing the product, the installer acts as a liaison between the
customer, telecommunications companies, and Teleco Technical Support. An installer is required to have skills
and experience in at least the basics of telephony and computer technology, including the following:
· Perfect Guest Messaging Technical training certification.
· Training and experience in at least the general concepts of telecommunications.
· Expertise on the customer's telephone system or ready access to such expertise, including telephone
system documentation.
· The ability to properly use analog telephone line monitoring equipment (see required equipment below)
and generate test calls to the system.
· The ability to properly configure, install and remove circuit boards in a personal computer.
· The ability to identify the basic components of a personal computer system, including the motherboard,
audioboard, video controller, etc.
· A basic understanding of how to identify or specify a file in a Windows file system, specifically an
understanding of the meaning of a drive, directory, filename and extension.
Required Equipment
The installer must be equipped with the following tools to competently install Perfect Guest Messaging:
· Analog telephone line monitoring device (butt set with digit grabber is preferred)
· Analog telephone line splitter
· Industry standard single line 2500 set (or butt set)
· Basic tools (screwdriver, pliers, cutters, etc.)
· Spare cables (modem, AC power, line cords, etc.)
· Punch-down tool
· Cable toner and amplifier
?
· Formatted floppy disks
Equipment For Remote Access
Much of the ongoing maintenance and changes to the system can be performed remotely. Using industry-standard
remote communications software, a technician may make changes to the system without being on site. To perform
these tasks remotely, the installer needs the following equipment:
· A personal computer with a minimum of Windows 3.X and PC Anywhere 2.X and supporting a serial
port or internal modem. NOTE: Windows 95 and PC Anywhere 32 are strongly recommended.
· A modem capable of communicating at a speed of at least 14400 baud. The remote communications
software supplied with the Perfect Guest Messaging supports modems capable of transmission rates
between 14400 and 33600 baud.
I&M
A modem is provided with all systems and sites without modem access are subject to denial of support services
from Teleco Technical Support.

Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
5

3

Getting Started
Before you assemble the Perfect Guest Messaging system, you should fill out the pre-installation worksheets
below, verify that you received the necessary materials, and prepare the site.
Step 1: Complete the Pre-Installation Worksheets
Before beginning the installation of Perfect Guest Messaging, insure that the pre-installation worksheets
provided are completed. These worksheets help to verify telephone system parameters, prepare the User
Directory, identify company business hours, write scripts for the company greetings, and specify the features
for most Users.
Transfer Parameters Worksheet
Default
Enter
Parameter
Description
Value
Value
162-Default Rings
3
Number of rings before system returns a no answer.
163-Blind Transfer
&,
Sequence to place caller on Hold and perform a blind transfer - This
Protocol
parameter instructs Perfect Guest Messaging on the sequence it should
follow to place a caller on hold before attempting a transfer to the
operator.
The following Special Characters may be used (& - Flash Hook and, -
Pause).
164-Supervised
&,
Sequence to place caller on Hold and perform a supervised transfer -
Transfer Protocol
This parameter instructs Perfect Guest Messaging on the sequence it
should follow to place a caller on hold before attempting a transfer.
?
The following Special Characters may be used (& - Flash Hook and , -
Pause)
165-No Answer
&,
Sequence to return to caller in the event of a no answer.
Release
166-Busy Release
&,
Sequence to get caller back in the event of a busy - This parameter
instructs Perfect Guest Messaging on the sequence it should follow to
get a caller back when it encounters a no-answer condition.
The following Special Characters may be used (& - Flash Hook and , -
Pause).
167-Transfer
<blank>
Sequence to connect a call If your telephone system requires a
Connect Protocol
connect code (a code that must be dialed when connecting a transferred
call), here is where you would define it.
I&M
The following Special Characters may be used (& - Flash Hook and , -
Pause).
168-Handsfree
<blank>
Sequence to connect a call - If your telephone system requires a connect
Announce Protocol
code (a code that must be dialed when connecting a transferred call),
here is where you would define it.
The following Special Characters may be used (& - Flash Hook and , -
Pause).
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

6
Installation
Message Light Parameters Worksheet
Default
Enter
Parameter
Description
Value
Value
350-Message Light
Toshiba
This is the dialing string to activate the message-waiting lamp. Place
ON Code
#63E
an E where the Extension number would be in the string.
350-Message Light
Toshiba
This is the dialing string to deactivate the message lamp. Place an E
OFF Code
#64E
where the Extension number would be in the string.
Auto Attendant Parameters Worksheet
Default
Enter
Parameter
Description
Value
Value
146-Administrator
12345
This is the password to access the system administrator level.
Password
147-Installer
9999
This is the password to access the Installer level. It allows access to
Password
the System Parameters screens.
156-Paging Access
This is the sequence to place a caller on hold, and access the intercom
Code
paging system, if applicable.
157-Paging Release
This is the sequence to get the caller back after performing intercom
Code
paging, if applicable.
158-Paging Delay
This is the time the system waits after paging before the call is
transferred.
?
Voice Mail Parameters Worksheet
Default
Enter
Parameter
Description
Value
Value
4
Identifies the minimum message length for messages, in seconds.
160-Minimum
Message Length
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
7
Inband Parameters Worksheet
Default
Enter
Parameter
Description
Value
Value
182-Inband
0
Tells Perfect Guest Messaging that the system being integrated uses
Signaling
inband signaling. 1=Yes, 0 = No.
183-Inband Delay
1
The time that Perfect Guest Messaging waits to hear incoming inband
signals. If no signals are heard in this time, Perfect Guest Messaging
forwards to the Main Greeting. Value is specified in seconds
184-Inband Login
0
When the user accesses their mailbox, a password is required to access
Password
messages and features. This parameter activates the password
protection.
0 = Ask for Password, 1 = Don't Ask.
NOTE: This parameter is also used for SMDI.
185-Inband Login
0
The code sent by the telephone system to automatically Login to a
Code
mailbox to access messages and features. This is also known as "Auto
Station Login.
186-Inband Internal
The inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a no-
No Answer
answer condition on an internal call. This code tells Perfect Guest
Messaging to send the caller to the Mailbox Greeting.
187-Inband
The inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a no-
External No Answer
answer condition on an external call. This code tells Perfect Guest
Messaging to send the caller to the Mailbox Greeting.
188-Inband Internal
The inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a busy
Busy
condition on an internal call. This code tells Perfect Guest Messaging
to send the caller to the Mailbox Greeting.
189-Inband
The inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a busy
External Busy
condition on an external call. This code tells Perfect Guest Messaging
to send the caller to the Mailbox Greeting.
?
190-Inband Outside
Identifies What C.O. line that an inbound call has come in on. This
C.O. Call
code is only used for telephone systems that have C.O. line
identification.
191-Inband Invalid
The code that forces Perfect Guest Messaging to go on hook. If your
Code 1
telephone system sends `garbage' codes to Perfect Guest Messaging to
check line status, you may enter these codes here to indicate a hang-up
condition.
192-Inband Invalid
The code that forces Perfect Guest Messaging to go on hook. If your
Code 2
telephone system sends `garbage' codes to Perfect Guest Messaging
to check line status, you may enter these codes here to indicate a
hang-up condition.
I&M
195-Inband
10
Identifies the maximum number of digits that the telephone system
Maximum Digits
sends.
196-Number of
2
The number of digits sent to identify the incoming C.O. line.
Digits in C.O. String
197-Caller ID
10
The number of digits sent in Caller ID for inband calling.
Length
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

8
Installation
User Directory Worksheet
Mailbox
Class of
Ext.
Last Name
First Name
Department
Number
Service
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
9
Business Hours Worksheet
Company Greetings Script
Description
Prompt #
Written script (Be sure to get all scripts approved before recording)
Morning Greeting
(Plays from midnight
to noon)
Afternoon Greeting
(Plays from noon to
six (6) PM)
?
Evening Greeting
(Plays from six (6)
PM to midnight)
Closed Greeting
I&M
(Plays whenever the
Business hours
indicate that the
business is closed)
NOTE: If the company is only open until 5:00 PM, the Closed Greeting begins to play at 5:00 PM. The
Evening Greeting is never played.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

10
Installation
Mailbox Class of Service Worksheet
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
11
Step 2: Unpack and Inspect the System
Before unpacking, make certain that none of the shipping containers were damaged during shipment. Do not
open any damaged shipping containers. Contact your shipping agent for appropriate claims. With Perfect
Guest Messaging, you should receive the following.
Materials Checklist:
q Main system unit (PC) with Perfect Guest Messaging software already installed
q Perfect Guest Messaging CD (pre-loaded)
q Rhetorex audioboard(s) installed in the main system (quantity based on order)
q Installation and Maintenance manual
q Quick Reference Cards
q User Guides
q Hardware key (required for operation of system)
q Windows 95 CD (pre-loaded) and manual
q AC power cable for main system unit

Step 3: Placement of Perfect Guest Messaging
The Perfect Guest Messaging system requires a stable horizontal surface, like any other computer system. A
?
sturdy table is ideal. Do not "temporarily" place the system somewhere it should not be. For example, Perfect
Guest Messaging should never be placed on top of an air conditioning unit, filing cabinet, or cardboard box.
As with any electronic equipment, the system's environment should be near room temperature, with no strong
fluctuations in temperature or humidity and well ventilated. Dust can also be a problem, especially on sites where
there is construction activity in the same area. If this is the case, remove Perfect Guest Messaging and clean the
area before reinstalling.
Radio frequency interference (RFI) is rarely a problem, but has been known to damage electronic equipment. Be
sure the system is not placed near any strong sources of RFI, especially power transformers or radio transmitting
equipment.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

12
Installation

4

Assembling the System
1. Test the AC Outlet.
2. Install the Uninterruptable Power Supply.
3. Install the Sentinel Key.
4. Connect the Telephone Lines.
Step 1: Test the AC Outlet
NOTE: Before installing and powering telecom equipment, make certain that the
outlet being used for installation is wired correctly and provides acceptable voltage
and resistance readings. Failure to complete this step can cause system damage,
poor protection or degraded system performance. Tests should only be performed
by a qualified technician using a digital multimeter.
The Outlet Configuration
There are three slots in a standard 120VAC outlet:
Hot: The hot conductor delivers energy to the load (telephone system) through the smaller vertical slot (See
below). It connects to a fuse or breaker at the service panel.
?
Neutral: The neutral conductor is grounded and completes the circuit from the load (telecom system) to the
service panel. It is typically referred to as the system ground and is the longer vertical slot.
Ground: The ground conductor is the hole below the two vertical slots (hot and neutral) and provides a path
for fault current between the load (telecom system) and earth. It is also known as the equipment ground.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
13
Is the Outlet Acceptable?
The following steps aid the technician in determining the AC outlet's acceptability. This test does not
determine the quality or condition of the power at the outlet relative to transient noise, sags, surges, etc.
WARNING: Do not take these readings during lightning or thunderstorm activity.
1. Measure the AC voltage between the Hot and Neutral using the AC voltage scale. This reading should
be approximately 115VAC + 10VAC.
2. Measure the AC voltage between the Hot and the Ground using the AC voltage scale. This reading
should be approximately 115VAC + 10VAC. The readings in step 1 and step 2 should be very close to
the same.
3. Measure the AC voltage between the Neutral and the Ground using the AC voltage scale. This reading
should be less than 2VAC.
4. Measure the resistance between the Neutral and the Ground using the resistance scale. A reading of 0.5
OHM or less is recommended.
NOTE: If the readings are acceptable as outlined in steps 1-4 above, the telecom system and the Total
Protection can be installed. If these readings are not acceptable, a qualified electrician should be contacted to
correct the condition. Again, failure to follow these steps may result in system damage, poor protection or
degraded system performance.

Step 2: Install the Un-interruptable Power Supply
The use of an un-interruptable power source (UPS) is strongly recommended. It significantly increases the life
?
expectancy of electronic equipment. The UPS should be supplied by a properly grounded, isolated circuit.
Be sure that no other equipment is using the same circuit, especially vending machines, microwave ovens,
laser printers, fax machines, copiers, or other devices that can cause or generate excessive current. This
applies even if an UPS will be used. An exception applies to the telephone system. If possible, make sure the
telephone system uses the same properly grounded, isolated power circuit.
NOTE: Refer to your UPS manual for more information on UPS use and setup.
Step 3: Install the Sentinel Key
The sentinel serves as a copy-protection device. This sentinel key MUST be connected to the LPT1 parallel
port on your PC at all times to avoid software failure. Be sure the parallel port is properly installed and I&M
configured as LPT1. If you require another parallel device such as a printer, you may connect it to the
sentinel.
IMPORTANT: Make sure all connections are secured before you turn on the power.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

14
Installation
Step 4: Connect Telephone Lines
The voice board has two RJ-14 jacks. Each carries two telephone lines. The left-most connector on the
first board (Address 300H) is for channels 1 and 2; the connector on the right is for channels 3 and 4.
Channels 1 and 3 are the inside pair of wires and channels 2 and 4 are the outside pair.

Labels on the CPU identify the following connections:

Device
Connection Point(s)
3-conductor AC power cable
corresponding connection on the back of the system
at the power supply

surge-protected AC power source (UPS
recommended)
male 15-pin male display monitor
female 15-pin video controller card
cable
(card may also have female 25-pin connector)
3-conductor display monitor power
surge-protected AC power source or directly off
cable
back of system power supply
Keyboard cable
round connector at the back of the system off the
(if applicable)
motherboard

Rhetorex Board Connections

Complete telephone system connections by plugging the
line cords into their corresponding RJ-14 jacks on the
Rhetorex board. The jacks are arranged in sequence with
Line 1
lowest port (channel) number starting at the top. Note
?
that you must supply your own 4-conductor RJ-14 line
Line 2
cords.

Line 3
Line 4

I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
15
5
Enter Dealer and Site Information
You should enter the dealer and site information using the System Configuration Utility.
To access the System Configuration Utility:
· Select Start, Programs, Perfect Guest Messaging, then PVO Configuration Wizard.
· Click Run Configuration.
· This screen appears. You may modify sections individually by highlighting the section on the left side of
the screen and clicking Modify, or click the Wizard button to edit every section.
To edit an individual
option, select it on
the left side of the
screen.
The current settings
appear on the right
side of the screen. To
edit, click the
Modify button.

?

I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

16
Installation
Enter the Dealer Information
The Dealer Information screen displays the current Dealer Information, including Dealer Name, Contact
Name, and the Dealer's Telephone Number. To edit this information, click Modify, enter the desired values,
then click OK.
· Dealer Name: Enter the name of the dealer that installed the Voice Mail System.
· Contact Name: Enter the specific person at the Dealer that end users should call for support.
?
· Phone: Enter the telephone number that end users should call when they have questions.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
17
Enter the Site Information
The Site Information screen displays the current Site Information, including modem number, fax number,
and e-mail address. To edit this information, click Modify, enter the desired values, then click OK.
· Name: Enter the Company Name where the Voice Mail system is being installed.
· Remote Maintenance Number: Enter the telephone number of the modem that is installed in the PC.
This can be a direct line or an extension.
· Fax Number: Enter the Fax Number of the site.
?
· E-Mail: Enter the e-mail address of the site.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

18
Installation
6
Setting up the Network
To properly set up the network for Perfect Guest Messaging, you need
the assistance of the site's Network Administrator. Ensure that the
Network Administrator or IS Consultant is available BEFORE setting
up the network and before calling Technical Support.
If you are unfamiliar with networks or network terminology, review "What is a Network" below before
proceeding. "Acronyms and Definitions" of network terms are located at the end of this section. If you are
familiar with networks, skip to the next page.
What is a Network?
A network is an interconnection of computers and other devices for the purpose of sharing files, data,
programs, and other resources (such as printers). There are many variations of networks. The two main
types are peer-to-peer and client/server. These are described below:
Peer-to-Peer
A peer to peer network is a group of workstations that share data and resources, and have a common purpose.
?
Client/Server
A client/server set up involves one computer (the server) containing the resources, and one or more
workstations (also referred to as clients) accessing the server (sending requests) to receive data. The Perfect
Guest Messaging system and the Desktop Interface is a client/server relationship, where the Voice Mail is the
server and the Desktop Interface is the client. Perfect Guest Messaging and the Desktop Interface may also I&M
operate as peer-to-peer network.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation 19
Guidelines
You may refer to the following guidelines when setting up the network environment.
Step 1: Determine the network type.
Step 2: Set up the TCP/IP protocol for your particular network.
Step 3: Install the transport management utility.
Step 4: Perform common tasks for all network types.
Step 5: Test the network connection.
Step 1: Determine the network type
Determine the type of network that Perfect Guest Messaging will be running on.
Step 2: Set up the Protocols for Your Particular Network
After determining the type of network environment, you should set up the TCP/IP for your particular network.
The following pages describe how to configure the PCs that run Perfect Guest Messaging and the Desktop
Interface.
Configuring TCP/IP Under Windows 95/98
The TCP/IP network protocol is an integral part of Perfect Guest Messaging. All Perfect Guest Messaging
systems are shipped with TCP/IP installed, and use it to communicate with Desktop user workstations. Every
time a new message is received, a mailbox opened, a message played, etc., etc., a packet of information is sent
?
via TCP/IP between the Perfect Guest Messaging system and the User's workstation. If TCP/IP is not
correctly configured at the system or workstation, Caller ID and message notification screen pops will not
function. Improper configuration can also result in faulty system operation during the nightly maintenance
cycle.
Configuring TCP/IP for Perfect Guest Messaging is a straightforward process. Follow the steps below to
ensure a successful installation.
For Networks That Already Use TCP/IP...
If the workstations on the network already have TCP/IP loaded, it is only necessary to configure the Perfect
I&M
Guest Messaging system to match the rest of the workstations. The best way to proceed is to check with the
network administrator to determine the following:
· If Static IP Addresses Are Used:
Ask the network administrator for an IP address for the Perfect Guest Messaging system. The address
includes both the IP address and a subnet mask used by all workstations on the network.
· If Addresses Are Assigned Automatically By DHCP:
Networks running TCP/IP may assign IP addresses automatically by using a DHCP server. The DHCP
server assigns from a range of valid addresses that it is configured to use. Ask the network
administrator for a static IP address for the Perfect Guest Messaging system. The administrator then
sets a reservation for that address in the DHCP server so that it is not assigned to any other workstation.
Perfect Guest Messaging Release 3.01

20
Installation
NOTE: Shut down Perfect Guest Messaging before proceeding.
Configuring TCP/IP Under Windows 95/98 when TCP/IP is already installed
1. Right-click the Network Neighborhood Icon and select Properties.
2. On the Configuration tab, select the TCP/IP Protocol and
select Properties.
3. On the IP Address tab, select Specify an IP
Address.
?
4. Enter the IP address and submask provided by the
network administrator. Ensure that it matches the
subnet mask assigned to all the other PCs in the
workgroup.
5. Click OK.
6. Windows asks if you wish to reboot the system.
Click OK to reboot. Be sure that the Perfect Guest
Messaging application has been shutdown before
I&M
rebooting. If Perfect Guest Messaging is still
running, you must shut it down first and then
reboot.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
21
When TCP/IP Is Not Installed on The Network...
1. Right-click the Network Neighborhood Icon and select Properties.
2. On the Configuration page, click the Add button. You see the dialog box shown below.
3. Select Protocol and click Add.
4. Scroll through the list of vendors and
select Microsoft. Then select TCP/IP
in the listing on the right side.
5. Click OK to complete the selection.
6. Click OK again to close the Network
Properties dialog box.
7. Windows 95 prompts you for the CD-
?
ROM if it is needed. After it installs
the required files, Windows asks
whether you want to restart the
system. Click OK to complete the
installation process.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

22
Installation
Considerations for Windows 95/98
Selecting An IP Address
Once it is installed, configuring TCP/IP support is easy. Just select the TCP/IP entry in the Network
Properties box and click the Properties button. You'll see a dialog box similar to the one shown below. The
pages in this dialog box allow you to set the addresses and other TCP/IP properties for your machine
IP addresses are actually composed of four numbers separated by periods. Each number must be in a valid
range from 0 to 255. You can use up to the first three numbers to represent your organization, and the
remaining number represents your computer. To simplify things, you can use 100.100.100.1 for the first
computer, 100.100.100.2 for the second, and so on. The subnet mask numbers define the meaning of the IP
addresses on your network, and allow only two numerical values. A value of 255 indicates an organization
entry; a value of 0 denotes a workstation. All workstations on the network must have the same subnet and
organization numbers before they can communicate. The only number unique to each workstation is the
?
portion of the IP address reserved for the workstation by the subnet mask.
The first 3 numbers
Unique number (0-255) for
identify the
each workstation.
organization.
I&M
Last number of subnet
The first 3 numbers
indicates position of unique
are 255, reserving
workstation number in IP
the first 3 numbers
address.
of the IP address for
the organization.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
23
Step 3: Install the Transport Management Utility
The Session Q program is located in the Startup Group on the Perfect Guest Messaging system. This
program handles communication between the Perfect Guest Messaging server and desktops. Session Q is the
transport management utility that makes better use of the ninety-seven (97) TCP connections limitation of
Windows 95 by using connections only as needed, so that, in total, more that 97 connections are possible.
Session Q manages sessions and closes user connections periodically as they become idle, in order to make
room for incoming and outgoing initiated connections. Either Session Q or the User can initiate a connection
when some information is available for sending. The information should be queued as the connection is
established and service, account, session identification and connect-back information are exchanged.
Multiple users (with the same or different account) on a single host can connect to a service through Session
Q. As well, multiple users from different hosts may use the same account.
NOTE: SessionQ is required if the Desktop Interface is to be used.
IMPORTANT: The SessionQ program must run at all times. It needs to remain
in the system startup group.
Using SessionQ
To access SessionQ, select Start -- Programs -- Perfect Guest Messaging -- SessionQ from the main Windows
screen.
When Session Q is running, an icon similar to this appears in the
bottom right-hand corner beside the clock.
?
To edit SessionQ settings, right-click the SessionQ icon. The following menu is available.
I&M
You may access Connections Info, Session Info, Options, About, or Exit from this menu. The same options
are also available when you select SessionQ Central.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

24
Installation
Session Q Central
Session Q Central is the Control Panel for the Session Q utility. When you select Session Q Central, the
following screen appears.
Connections Info
When you select Connections Info, the following screen appears.
`Takes Picture' of
Clears Trace
the current screen
screen and
and opens second
restarts it
window with data
?
Allows you to set
filter condition
Opens second
for Trace
duplicate window
List of active
sessions
Details of session
based on
Trace screen;
selection from the
shows session
Trace screen
activity
I&M
Activates /
deactivates
scrolling on
Trace screen
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
25
Sessions Info
When you select Sessions Info, the following screen appears.
`Takes Picture' of
Clears Trace
the current screen
screen and
and opens second
restarts it
window with data
Allows you to set
filter condition
for Trace
Opens second
duplicate window
List of active
sessions
Details of session
based on
Trace screen;
selection from the
shows session
Trace screen
activity
Activates /
deactivates
scrolling on
Trace screen
?
Filters
The Filter Config screen is displayed when you click the Filter
Trace... button on the Connections Info or Sessions Info
screen. The Filter Config screen allows you to specify a range
of mailboxes to limit the Trace Data to. Choose the field to
search, the condition to search by (>, <, >=, not =, etc.), and
the criteria to search by. Select No Filter to clear the filter.
Filters is useful when you are troubleshooting. It allows you to
limit the display to a particular user or group of users in order
to determine what is happening at their particular
I&M
workstation(s) at any given time.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

26
Installation
Options
When you select Options, a configuration menu is displayed. A description of the fields follows.
Startup Tab
On the Start Up tab, you specify the screens you want to
be opened when the system starts up. Check the
appropriate box(es).
Connections Tab
The Connections tab shows the settings that are
adjustable for the connections.
· Maximum Connections: This specifies the
maximum number of connections that may be
opened at any time. (Range is 3-90)
· Connections Keep Available: This field specifies
the maximum number of connections to keep
?
available at any one time. The purpose is to leave
sessions open for new users.
· Reconnect Queue Check Interval: This field
specifies the length of time (in milliseconds) to wait
before attempting to connect to client.
· Reconnect Retries: This field specifies the number
of times to retry to connect back to each client if
client is busy before terminating the client's position
in queue.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
27
VM Service Tab
The VM Service tab controls settings on services
performed by the Voice Mail.
· Share Name: This field indicates share name of
voice mail directory (default = blank). To provide
additional network security, you should enter VM$
in this field and in the actual Windows share screen
(see "Common Tasks for All Network Types and
Environments"). If you specify the share name here,
it is not necessary to enter it in the desktop
configuration. If you need to change the share name
later, you only have to change it on the Perfect Guest
Messaging server; not the desktops.
· New Call Active Duration (secs): This field
specifies the length of time (in seconds) to retry
screen notification of a new call on busy network.
Trace Tab
The Trace tab controls Trace screen settings that can be
?
adjusted.
· Auto Save Trace Log: This field indicates whether
or not to automatically write the Trace activity to a
log file. The file created is SQDDMMHH.TRC,
where DDMMHH represents Day Month, Hour.
· Maximum Trace Items in Memory: this field
specifies the maximum number of lines to display in
the Connections Info or Sessions Info screens.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

28
Installation
Step 4: Common Tasks for all Network Types and Environments
1. On Perfect Guest Messaging Server: Set the drive where Perfect Guest Messaging is installed (C:
drive is the default) on the computer to a full access Share Level.
· Right click on Network Neighborhood.
· Select Properties.
· Select the Access Control tab.
· Specify Share-level Access Control and click OK.
2. Verify the share name for the installation of the Desktop interface. The default share name is VM.*
· Go to Windows Explorer.
· Right-click on Drive C (C:)
· Select Sharing...
· Select the Sharing tab.
· Select Shared As: and verify that the
Share Name is VM
*Adding $ to VM ($VM) hides shared directories
from users on the network. Refer to "VM Service
Tab" in the Session Q section.
?
Step 5: Verify the Network Connection
I&M
After the computers have been configured, it is necessary to verify the network connection:
· Start up the Desktop Interface on the client PC. A red square appears in the top right hand corner of
the Desktop Interface screen. Within a few seconds, that box disappears. If the red box does not
disappear, this is an indication that the network is not configured properly. If this is the case, verify
all of the settings again. Double-check all of the settings (including IP address, if applicable, and the
Perfect Guest Messaging Server Name).
Finding the Computer Name
A common cause of "No answer from partner" errors is the wrong computer name. To find the computer
name, click on the properties of the Network Neighborhood and select the identification tab.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
29
7
Logging On/Off the System
When you first begin the Perfect Guest Messaging system, you will not have access to any of Perfect Guest
Messaging's other screens. To access these other screens, you must log on to the system with either the
System Administrator or Installer password. To make any modifications to the Perfect Guest Messaging
system, you must log on with one of these passwords.
Logging on to Perfect Guest Messaging:
· From the Main Menu, Select "File", select "Log on". (You may also press the F11 key.)
Password Screen
?
· Enter your password.
Below are the default passwords for the System Administrator and Installer level.
Default Password Typically Accessed
Access Examples
By...
9999
System Administrator
· allows routine maintenance
· does not allow access to parameter section
I&M
· hides all passwords in each mailbox
12345
Installer
· allows access to every area of the Perfect
Guest Messaging system for modifications
and testing
The password may be a maximum of 15 digits. For security, as your password is entered, asterisks (*) are
shown in place of each digit entered to prevent others from seeing the password. NOTE: If the passwords do
not work, contact Teleco Technical Support.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

30
Installation
Logging off of Perfect Guest Messaging
When you log off of the Perfect Guest Messaging system, the first level of security is restored. This ensures
that no unauthorized changes can be made to the system.
· From the Main Menu, Select "File", select "Log off" (You may also press the F12 key)
NOTE: Once the Installer has configured the system, the Installer must change the Installer password and
log off the system so that no one can access the Parameters section. If you wish to log on to the system
again, use the System Administrator's password.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
31
8
Changing System Passwords
The Installer may change the System Administrator or Installer password.
To change the passwords:
· From the Main Menu, Select "File", select "Log on" (You may also press the F11 key)
· Enter the Installer's password.
· From the Main Menu, click on the Parameters button.
· Select the "Auto-Attendant" tab.
Change the Administrator
and Installer passwords.
?
I&M
System Parameters Screen
NOTE: Parameter 146 is the System Administrator password and Parameter 147 is the Installer password.
· Choose the appropriate parameter (#146 and/or #147) and enter the desired password.
· NOTE: The password must be numeric characters only. It cannot contain alpha characters.
· Click on "Save", then "Exit".
· Test to see that the new password (s) works. Log off and then log on again with the new password.
NOTE: The Installer and System Administrator passwords must be different. If both levels have the same
password, the Perfect Guest Messaging system defaults to the System Administrator level. This means that
the Installer will not be able to access the system parameters.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

32
Installation
9
Verify System Parameters
NOTE: Perfect Guest Messaging is shipped pre-configured for Teleco/Toshiba telephone systems. If
Perfect Guest Messaging is integrating with a different telephone system, the Telephone Integration
Utility and Accucall call analysis program must be run. Refer to Appendix 4 for more information on
Accucall.
What is Integration?
Integration enhances the level of communication between Perfect Guest Messaging and the telephone system
and results in more efficient use of both systems. Callers and Users of an integrated voice messaging system
find it easier to use and more intuitive than non-integrated systems.
In an integrated configuration, the telephone system is programmed to be "aware" that a voice messaging
system is connected to it. As far as the telephone system is concerned, the Perfect Guest Messaging
extensions are no longer single-line analog stations but voice processing ports. Calls directed to Perfect
Guest Messaging are accompanied by information from the telephone system about the source and status of
the call. For example, this information may tell Perfect Guest Messaging that the call was forwarded from a
ring-no-answer extension as well as from what extension it was forwarded. This allows Perfect Guest
Messaging to place the caller into the appropriate state and the caller immediately hears that person's
personal greeting.
Another advantage of voice messaging integration with some telephone systems is apparent when a User calls
Perfect Guest Messaging from his or her desk. The telephone system provides Perfect Guest Messaging with
information about the calling party's extension number and the fact that it is a direct call. Typically, Perfect
Guest Messaging is programmed to immediately prompt the User for his or her password since the caller
most likely wants to go into User mode.
?
There are a variety of methods for integrating telephone systems with Perfect Guest Messaging. Some
telephone systems offer no integration at all while others offer only minimal information. The two most
common methods of integration include in-band signaling (IBS) and out-of-band signaling (OBS).
In Band Signaling (IBS)
In a telephone system that supports IBS integration, sequences of DTMF digits (integration strings) are sent
to Perfect Guest Messaging by the telephone system. For example, a call may be forwarded from extension
201 to Perfect Guest Messaging if that extension did not answer. Soon after Perfect Guest Messaging
answers, the telephone system provides the DTMF tone sequence, *41*201. Please remember, this is a
hypothetical case. This sequence of "*41*" is referred to as pilot, or steering digits and indicates the call was
forwarded under a ring-no-answer situation. The next three digits indicate the extension number of the calledI&M
party. Perfect Guest Messaging would interpret the digits appropriately and play User 201's personal
greeting.
Most IBS integration digit strings are sent soon after Perfect Guest Messaging answers a call. IBS digits
indicating a hang-up can be sent at any point during the processing of the call. Perfect Guest Messaging
responds to this signal, terminating the call as quickly as possible, thus freeing up the port for other calls.
The telephone system manufacturer and model determine the level of IBS integration that is available. For
example, some telephone systems are able to distinguish whether a forwarded call is a no answer or a busy
situation and then provide this information to Perfect Guest Messaging, while other phone systems do not.
Some phone systems offer information about whether the call originated from outside the telephone system or
from the station side, while other phone systems make no distinction. It is important to understand these
differences and what type of IBS information is available to the Perfect Guest Messaging system.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
33
"Simple" IBS
Simple IBS is similar to more conventional IBS in that the call information comes in the form of sequences of
DTMF digits. However, unlike conventional IBS, simple IBS only offers the extension number of the station
from which the call was forwarded. No steering or trailing digits accompany the User's extension number.
This can make it difficult to distinguish between an extension number entered by a person wanting to be
transferred to that person's extension and one entered by the telephone system as part of a normal integrated
call. However, if properly configured, Perfect Guest Messaging operates correctly.
Out-of-Band Signaling (OBS)
With a configuration using OBS, information about a call is sent as a packet of character data to Perfect
Guest Messaging over a serial link (RS-232). Using this data packet, Perfect Guest Messaging places the call
into the appropriate state. Like IBS, the information contained in the data packet specifies the calling and/or
called party's extension number and the reason for the call. Unlike IBS, this information may be sent just
before or just after Perfect Guest Messaging receives the call.
With OBS, all packets come over the same physical, serial link. The data in the packet also contains
information, which associates it with a particular channel. In addition to answering the call, Perfect Guest
Messaging checks to see if there is an incoming packet associated with that channel. Once the packet is
identified, other information about the call can be obtained. Because OBS is data passed over a serial link, the
format of the information can vary. The most common format of OBS signaling is Simple Message Desk
Interface (SMDI).
SMDI Integration
Most central offices and some larger telephone systems offer serial ports that can provide information in
SMDI format to Perfect Guest Messaging. Although other telephone systems may not offer a direct SMDI
link, the information can be generated by a third party device that performs set emulation or protocol
conversion.
?
Direct Link: A serial link from the telephone system is the most straightforward method of achieving SMDI
integration. For example, the Teleco UST1424DK telephone system has a serial interface that provides SMDI
packet information to Perfect Guest Messaging. All that is needed is the physical cable to connect the two.
Most central offices are also equipped to provide SMDI information through Centrex, or Essex, service.
Since the actual telephone switching equipment is located far from the Perfect Voice system, this link is
accomplished with a dedicated modem link.
Protocol Converter: Sometimes, the telephone system generates information that is not in SMDI format. In
these situations, an external device called a protocol converter may be used to convert the proprietary
information from the telephone system into SMDI format that the Perfect Guest Messaging is able to
interpret.
Set Emulation: Some telephone systems do not provide a serial interface at all. In these situations, the
information needed to construct an SMDI packet may be obtained from a digital set interface. Integrated calls
I&M
are sent directly to a digital set extension. This station is controlled by a device that is capable of reading
information in the display of the digital set and operating the set. Information about the call received is
obtained by reading the display and the call is transferred to a Perfect Guest Messaging extension. An SMDI
packet, whose contents are based on the information read from the display, is generated and sent to Perfect
Guest Messaging over the serial link of the set emulator.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

34
Installation
Verify the System Parameters
From the Main Menu:
· Log in at the Installer level
· Click the Parameters button
· From your pre-installation worksheet and telephone system documentation, verify that the system
parameters are correct.
NOTE: If you make changes to a parameter, you must click the Save button for each tab screen. For
example, if you change the Installer password on the Auto-Attendant tab, you must save that change
before accessing another tab such as Voice Mail.
System Parameters are preset based on the telephone system specified on the Perfect
Guest Messaging order. Verify the parameters marked with an asterisk (*). Many of
the following parameters should NOT be changed. They are included for reference
?
I&M
only.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
35
Verify Auto Attendant Parameters - (144 to 158)
144 - Extension Length
DEFAULT = 3
Extension length, in digits. Valid extensions may be 2 to 8 digits.
145 - Time-Out
DEFAULT = 10
Number of seconds before disconnect upon no response.
*146 Administrator Password
DEFAULT = 9999
This parameter specifies the password to access the system administrator level.
*147 - Installer Password
DEFAULT = 12345
This parameter specifies the password to access the Installer level. It allows access to the
System Parameters screen.
148 Reserved
DEFAULT = 0
Reserved. This must be set to zero
*149 Multiple Messages
DEFAULT = 0
If set to 0, callers are able to try other extensions after leaving a message. If set to 1,
callers hear "Thank you, good-bye" after leaving a message.
*150 Notify User of Transfer

DEFAULT = 1
Controls play of "One Moment, You have a call." prompt upon connecting. 0 = Off, 1 =
On.
151 Alternate Star
DEFAULT = BLANK
Alternative DTMF for *. Used in telephone systems with the asterisk key reserved for
other functions such as speed-dial or re-dial.
152 Alternate Pound
DEFAULT = BLANK
Alternate DTMF for #. Used in telephone systems with the POUND key reserved for
?
other functions such as speed-dial or re-dial.
153 Inter-Digit Delay
DEFAULT = 2
Delay in seconds between entering DTMF.
154 Reorganization Time
DEFAULT = 0300
Hard disk reorganization time, in military time. If set to 0000, Reorganization will be
skipped
*155 Fixed Length
DEFAULT = 1
If set to 1, all mailboxes are same length. If set to 0, then mailboxes can be variable
lengths. Valid Range is 2 to 4 digit Mailbox Numbers.
*156 Paging Access Code
DEFAULT = &, #30 I&M
This parameter specifies the code the system needs to dial to place caller on hold, and
access Intercom paging system.
*157 Paging Release Code
DEFAULT = &,
This parameter specifies the code the system needs to dial to get the caller back after
performing intercom paging.
*158 Paging Delay
This is the time the system waits after paging before transferring the call.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

36
Installation
Verify Voice Mail Parameters - (159 to 161)
?
159 Days to Save Messages
DEFAULT = 14
Default number of days to save old messages.
*160 Minimum Message Length
DEFAULT = 4
This parameter identifies the minimum message length for messages, in seconds.
161 Distribution Access Key
DEFAULT = *
Digit to use to send messages to distribution lists.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
37
Fax Parameters - (300 to 317)
?
300 Fax on Demand
DEFAULT = 0
Set to 1 to activate fax on demand; otherwise, set to 0.
301 Local Area Code 1
Your local area code 1.
302 Local Area Code 2
Your local area code 2.
303 Local Area Code 3
Your local area code 3.
I&M
304 Local and Toll Area Code 1
The area code in your region that is both local and long distance 1. Note that for
parameters 304 and 305, you must create a DOS text file in the WINVM directory that
includes the local exchanges. The filename should be aaa.fax where "aaa" is the local
and toll area code.
305 Local and Toll Area Code 2
The area code in your region that is both local and long distance 2.
306 Code to Access Outside Line
DEFAULT = 9,
This is the code dialed for the Fax on Demand system to access an outside line.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

38
Installation
Fax Parameters - (300 to 317) continued
307 Code to Access a Toll Line
DEFAULT = 9,1
The code dialed for the Fax on Demand system to access a toll line.
308 Number of Digits in Area Code
DEFAULT = 3
The number of digits in the area code.
309 Number of Digits in Telephone Number
DEFAULT = 7
The # of digits in the telephone number in your area.
310 Fax Directory
DEFAULT=\FAXOUT
The directory where the fax documents are stored.
311 Dialing Suffix
This is any numbers that must be dialed after long distance numbers.
312 Reserved
313 Ask for Extension Number
Set to 0 to enable, 1 to disable. If enabled, the system prompts for an extension number
when the caller is requesting a document through Fax on Demand.
314 Fax Pickup Code
This is only valid for certain telephone systems. It specifies the digits the fax card uses
to pick up a parked call.
315 Default Fax Number
This is the default fax number where faxes are printed when another number has not
been specified.
316 Default Fax Mailbox
?
This is the default mailbox for faxes. Faxes that have not been addressed to specific
mailboxes are sent to this mailbox.
317 Fax Park Code
This field is not yet implemented. This is the code to park a fax.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
39
Verify Transfer Parameters (162-169)
?
*162 Default Rings
DEFAULT = 3
This parameter specifies the number of rings before system returns no answer.
*163 Blind Transfer Protocol
DEFAULT = &,
Sequence to place a caller on hold and perform a blind transfer. This parameter
specifies the sequence the system should follow to place a caller on hold before
attempting a transfer to the operator. The following special characters may be used (& -
Flash hook and , -Pause).
*164 Supervised Transfer Protocol
DEFAULT = &,
Sequence to place a caller on hold and perform a supervised transfer. This parameter
specifies the sequence the system should follow to place a caller on hold before
I&M
attempting a transfer. The following special characters may be used & - flash hook, and
, - pause).
*165 No Answer Release
DEFAULT = &,
This parameter specifies the code the system needs to dial to return to caller in the event
of a no answer.
*166 Busy Release
DEFAULT = &,
This parameter specifies the sequence the system should follow to get a caller back
when it encounters a busy condition. The following special characters may be used & -
flash hook, and , - pause).
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

40
Installation
Verify Transfer Parameters (162-169) continued
*167 Transfer Connect Protocol
DEFAULT = BLANK
Digit that must be used to connect a supervised call. If the telephone system requires a
connect code (a code that must be dialed when connecting a transferred call), enter the
code here.
*168 Handsfree Announce Protocol
DEFAULT=E1,
Sequence to dial a caller and announce over a telephone speaker.
169 Call Pickup Protocol
Sequence to dial to pick up a parked call.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
41
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Disconnect Parameters - (174 to 181)
?
174 Silence Detection
DEFAULT = 3
Maximum length of silence considered a disconnect, in seconds.
175 Noise Detection
Maximum length of noise such as dial tone considered a disconnect.
176 High Cadence for Fast-Busy Detect
Fast busy detect high, in 10 msec increments.
177 Low Cadence for Fast-Busy Detect
Fast busy detect low, in 10 msec increments
I&M
178 Grunt Detection
Enable Grunt detect: 1 = On, 0 = Off.
179 Grunt Threshold
Determines noise threshold for Grunt, if on. The default for Rhetorex is 8000 but it can
be set to 6000 if using 6KHz compression. The default for Dialogic is 500.
180 Hang-up String
String which forces hang-up.
181 Hang-up Delay
This is the maximum time allowed between hang-up strings for a valid hang-up.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

42
Installation
Verify Inband Parameters - (182 to 197)
?
182 Inband Signaling
DEFAULT = 1
This specifies whether the telephone system being integrated uses inband
signaling.
0 = No, 1 = Yes
183 Inband Delay
DEFAULT = 1
This parameter specifies the number of seconds that the system will wait for the
first digit of a possible inband (DTMF) integration packet. The Inband Delay
timer begins after the Offhook Delay (Global Parameter #10) has expired. If the
first digit of the inband packet arrives after the Inband Delay timer has expired,
I&M
integration will not function properly.
This timer also acts as the interdigit timer for the inband integration packet. Once
the system has begun to collect the inband signals, this parameter specifies the
maximum pause that is allowed between the inband digits. (The time limit for
acceptance of inband digits is 8 seconds.)
If the telephone system has a configurable inband timer, it should be set as short
as possible to improve inband performance.
184 Inband Login Password
DEFAULT = 0
When the User accesses his/her mailbox internally, a password is required to
access messages and features. If this parameter is set to "Yes" (0), the system
does not prompt for the password. If set to "No" (1), the system prompts for the
password. Ask for password: 0 = Yes, 1 = No.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
43
Verify Inband Parameters - (182 to 197) continued
185 Login Code
E = Recipient's mailbox number
S = Sender's mailbox number
This is the code sent by the telephone system to automatically log in to a mailbox
C = incoming line number
to access messages and features. This is also known as auto station login.
X = Ignore
I = Caller ID
186 Internal No-Answer Code
E = Recipient's mailbox number
S = Sender's mailbox number
This specifies the inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a no-
C = incoming line number
answer condition on an internal call. This code tells Perfect Guest Messaging to
X = Ignore
send the caller to the mailbox greeting.
I = Caller ID
187 External No-Answer Code
E = Recipient's mailbox number
S = Sender's mailbox number
This specifies the inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a no-
C = incoming line number
answer condition on an external call. This code tells Perfect Guest Messaging to
X = Ignore
send the caller to the mailbox greeting.
I = Caller ID
188 Internal Busy Code
E = Recipient's mailbox number
S = Sender's mailbox number
This specifies the inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a busy
C = incoming line number
condition on an internal call. This code tells Perfect Guest Messaging to send
X = Ignore
the caller to the mailbox greeting.
I = Caller ID
189 External Busy Code
E = Recipient's mailbox number
S = Sender's mailbox number
This specifies the inband signal sent by the telephone system to indicate a busy
C = incoming line number
condition on an external call. This code tells Perfect Guest Messaging to send
X = Ignore
the caller to the mailbox greeting.
I = Caller ID
190 - C.O. Call Code
E = Recipient's mailbox number
S = Sender's mailbox number
This parameter identifies what C.O. line an inbound call came in on. This code
?
C = incoming line number
is only used for telephone systems that have C.O. line identification.
X = Ignore
I = Caller ID
191 Invalid Code 1
Certain telephone systems include codes that may interfere with inband signals.
Enter the code in this field.
192 Invalid Code 2
Certain telephone systems include codes that may interfere with inband signals.
Enter the code in this field.
193 Reserved Code 1
I&M
194 Reserved Code 2
195 Max Digits
DEFAULT = 5
Maximum number of digits sent through inband signaling.
196 - CO Digit Length
Number of Digits sent to identify the incoming CO line.
*197 Caller ID Length
DEFAULT=10
Number of Digits sent in Caller ID for Inband Calling
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

44
Installation
Verify Notification Parameters (170 to 173)
?
170 Outside Line Access
DEFAULT = 9,
Dial string for local outside line.
171 Start Port for Notify
DEFAULT = LAST
This specifies the beginning port for notification. You may enter FIRST, LAST,
or a number.
172 End Port for Notify
DEFAULT = LAST
This specifies the ending port for notification. You may enter FIRST, LAST, or a
number.
I&M
173 Outcall Retry Interval
DEFAULT = 15
This field specifies the default number of minutes between retries to attempt to
place the outcall notification. This may be overridden within the mailbox. If the
mailbox value is left blank, the system uses this value as the default.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
45
Verify Message Light Parameters - (350 to 360)
?
*350 Message Light ON Code
Dial string to activate message-waiting light. Place an E to represent the
extension number in the dialing string.
351 Number of ON Retries
Number of times to retry the message waiting light on, after the initial try.
352 ON Retry Interval
Number of minutes between retries for message waiting on.
353 Light ON for All
Light message waiting lights for all messages. If set to 0, only the first message
I&M
triggers lights. If set to 1, message lights light for all messages.
*354 Message Light OFF Code
Dial string to turn off message waiting light. Place an E to represent the
extension number in the dialing string.
355 Number of OFF Retries
Number of times to retry the message waiting light off, after the initial try.
356 OFF Retry Interval
Number of minutes between retries for message waiting off.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

46
Installation
Verify Message Light Parameters - (350 to 360)
357 Light OFF for All
Extinguish message-waiting lights for all messages. If set to 0, lights are
extinguished for the first message. If set to 1, lights extinguish for all messages.
358 Light OFF on Last
If set to 1, the system waits until there are no new messages before turning the
message waiting light off.
359 Wait for Dial Tone
If set to 1, when the system goes off hook, it checks for dialtone first. If no
dialtone is detected, it returns to the company greeting.
360 Lamp Schedule Interval
With SMDI, this value should be
How often the system checks ports set to notify to see if it needs to perform an
2. Without SMDI, this value
outcalling event (in seconds).
should be 8.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
47
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Global Parameters - (001 to 023)
NOTE: If changes are made to global parameters, the system must be restarted.
?
1 Flash Character
DEFAULT = &
Character in a dialing string that causes a flash hook to occur.
2 Flash Duration
DEFAULT = 50
Duration of Flash Hook, in 10 msec increments.
3 Pause Duration
DEFAULT = 100
Duration of pause time to send a pause in a dialing string, in 10 msec increments.
4 Digitization Rate
DEFAULT = 6053
Digitizing rate in Hz.
I&M
5 Scheduler Time
DEFAULT = 20
Scheduler time slice, expressed as the maximum number of timer ticks, expressed
in twentieth (1/20) of a sec, before the driver must return control to the program
50 msec increments.
6 Pulse Break Interval
DEFAULT = 6
Pulse Dialing break interval, in 10 msec increments.
7 Pulse Make Interval
DEFAULT = 4
Pulse Dialing make interval, in 10 msec increments.
8 Pulse Interdigit Delay
DEFAULT =10
Pulse Dialing inter-digit delay, in 10 msec increments.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

48
Installation
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Global Parameters - (001 to 023) Continued
9 Tone Inter-digit Delay
DEFAULT = 5
Tone Dialing inter-digit delay, in 10 msec increments.
10 Offhook Delay
DEFAULT = 50
This is the time (in 10 msec intervals) that the system waits after going off hook
before it "looks for" incoming signals.
11 Ring On
Minimum Ring ON interval to detect an incoming ring, in 100 msec increments.
12 Ring Off
Minimum Ring OFF interval to detect an incoming ring, in 100 msec increments.
13 Ring Delay
DEFAULT = 80
Delay after which ring count is reset, in 100 msec increments.
14 Silence Debounce
DEFAULT = 4
Silence message de-bounce interval in 10 msec increments.
15 Reserved Field
DEFAULT = 0
Reserved, MUST BE SET TO ZERO
16 Tone Duration
DEFAULT = 10
Duration of dialed DTMF tone, in 10 msec intervals.
17 Pulse Max Make
Maximum time for PD make, in 10 msec increments.
18 Pulse Min Make
?
Minimum make interval for valid loop pulse digit, in 10 msec increments.
19 Pulse Min Break
Minimum break interval for valid loop pulse digit, in 10 msec increments.
20 Pulse Min Interdigit
Minimum inter-digit pulse time, in 10 msec increments.
21 Loop Current Time
DEFAULT = 30
Minimum time loop current must be off before loop current CST can be
generated. 10 msec increments.
22 Record Tone Length
Record DTMF filter time, in 10 msec increments.
I&M
23 Record Tone Edge
DEFAULT = 0
Record DTMF event edge selection. 1 = event detection on trailing edge of tone,
2 = event detection on leading edge of tone.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
49
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Internal Parameters - (24 to 62)
?
24 DTMF Detect Filter
DEFAULT = 3 (48 MSEC)
The minimum necessary DTMF tone duration for tone detect during Playback.
25 DTMF Edge
DEFAULT = 2
Detects DTMF on the leading or trailing edge of a DTMF digit.
1 = trailing edge, 2 = leading edge of tone.
26 DTMF Delay
DEFAULT = 2 (32 msec)
The minimum necessary DTMF tone duration for tone detect during functions
other than Play.
I&M
27 Silence Delay
DEFAULT = 0
The maximum allowable silence before silence is discarded during record.
28 Default Number of Rings
DEFAULT = 3
Default Number of rings before no answer is returned.
29 Call Progress Delay
DEFAULT = 25
Delay after dialing, before call analysis begins, in 10 msec increments.
30 Time Out Delay
DEFAULT = 400
Time out delay, when no signal is detected, in 10 msec increments.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

50
Installation
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Internal Parameters Continued
31 Loop Current Dial Delay
DEFAULT = 10
Delay after dialing, before loop signal is recognized as connect, in 10 msec
increments.
32 Loop Current Delay
DEFAULT = 10
Delay after loop signal, before connect is signaled, in 10 msec increments.
33 VOX
DEFAULT = 2
Specified whether the signal is optimized for voice or signals.
1 = Optimize Signal, 2 = Optimize Voice, 3 = Create Tone Table entries on
config file.
34 Noise Delay
DEFAULT = 650
Time out delay, when continuous signal is present, in 10 msec increments.
35 Above 1 Off Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an off period compared to the previous
off period with the current Cycle's off period above the previous cycles off period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
36 Below 1 Off Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an off period compared to the previous
off period with the current cycle's off period below the previous cycles off period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
37 Above 2 Off Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an off period compared to the previous
off period with the current cycle's off period above the previous cycles off period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
?
38 Below 2 Off Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an off period compared to the previous
off period with the current cycle's off period below the previous cycles off period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
39 Above On Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an on period compared to the previous on
period with the current cycle's on period above the previous cycles on period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
40 Below On Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an on period compared to the previous on
period with the current cycle's on period below the previous cycles on period.
I&M
Valid range: 1 to 255.
41 Busy Off Max 1 Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
The Maximum allowable first off period for a double busy cadence, in 10 msec
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
increments.
(Parameter 33)
42 Busy Off Max 2- Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
The Maximum allowable second off period for a double busy cadence, in 10 msec
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
increments.
(Parameter 33)
43 Busy Off Max Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
The Maximum allowable off period for a double busy cadence, in 10 msec
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
increments.
(Parameter 33)
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
51
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Internal Parameters - (24 to 62)
Continued
44 Busy Cycles Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 2
Number of busy cycles before a busy signal is considered valid.
45 Glitch Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 15
The Minimum necessary signal duration to detect a valid call progression tone, in
10 msec increments.
46 Spike Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 19
The Minimum necessary non-signal duration to detect a valid call progression
tone, in 10 msec increments.
47 Ring Off Max 1 Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
The Maximum necessary off period for a double ring cadence, in 10 msec
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
increments.
(Parameter 33)
48 Ring Off Min 2 Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
The Minimum necessary off period for a double ring cadence, in 10 msec
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
increments
(Parameter 33)
49 Voice Analysis Detection
DEFAULT = 4
Enables or disables voice analysis detection. Possible Values: 2=Disable,
4=Enable.
57 Ring on Max Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
Maximum allowable on period for a short ring cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
58 Ring Off Max A Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 700 (7 sec).
Maximum allowable off period for a long ring cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
?
59 Ring Off Max B Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 530
Maximum allowable off period for a short ring cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
60 Ring Start On Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 1
Call Analysis starts ring count
61 Busy On Max Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 78 (780 msec).
Maximum allowable on period for a single busy cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
62 Busy Off Max Internal Ring
DEFAULT = 58 (580 msec).
Maximum allowable off period for a single busy cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

52
Installation
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel External Parameters (64-102)
?
64 DTMF Detect Filter
DEFAULT = 3 (48 MSEC)
The minimum necessary DTMF tone duration for tone detect during Playback.
65 DTMF Edge
DEFAULT = 2
Detects DTMF on the leading or trailing edge of a DTMF digit.
1 = trailing edge, 2 = leading edge of tone.
66 DTMF Delay
DEFAULT = 2 (32 msec)
The minimum necessary DTMF tone duration for tone detect during functions
other than Play.
I&M
67 Silence Delay
DEFAULT = 0
The maximum allowable silence before silence is discarded during record.
68 Default Number of Rings
DEFAULT = 3
Default Number of rings before no answer is valid.
69 Call Progress Delay
DEFAULT = 25
Delay after dialing, before call analysis begins, in 10 msec increments.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
53
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel External Parameters (64-102)
Continued
70 Time Out Delay
DEFAULT = 400
Time out delay, when no signal is detected, in 10 msec increments.
71 Loop Current Dial Delay
DEFAULT = 10
Delay after dialing, before loop signal is recognized as connect, in 10 msec
increments.
72 Loop Current Delay
DEFAULT = 10
Delay after loop signal, before connect is signaled, in 10 msec increments.
73 VOX
DEFAULT = 2
Specified whether the signal should be optimized for voice or signals.
1 = Optimize Signal, 2 = Optimize Voice, 3 = Create Tone Table entries on
config file.
74 Noise Delay
DEFAULT = 650
Time out delay, when continuous signal is present, in 10 msec increments.
75 Above 1 Off External Ring
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an off period compared to the previous
off period with the current cycle's off period above the previous cycles off period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
76 Below 1 Off External Ring
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an off period compared to the previous
off period with the current cycle's off period below the previous cycles off period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
?
77 Above 2 Off External Ring
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an off period compared to the previous
off period with the current cycle's off period above the previous cycles off period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
78 Below 2 Off External Ring
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an off period compared to the previous
off period with the current cycle's off period below the previous cycles off period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
79 Above On External Ring
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an on period compared to the previous on
I&M
period with the current cycle's on period above the previous cycles on period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
80 Below On External Ring
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an on period compared to the previous on
period with the current cycle's on period below the previous cycles on period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
81 Busy Off Max 1 External Ring
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
The Maximum allowable first off period for a double busy cadence, in 10 msec
Only Valid when VOX is set to 3
increments
(Parameter 33)
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

54
Installation
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel External Parameters (64-102)
Continued
82 Busy Off Max 2 External Ring
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
The Maximum allowable second off period for a double busy cadence, in 10 msec
Only Valid when VOX is set to 3
increments.
(Parameter 33)
83 Busy Off Max 1 External Ring
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
The Maximum allowable on period for a double busy cadence, in 10 msec
Only Valid when VOX is set to 3
increments.
(Parameter 33)
84 Busy Cycles External Ring
DEFAULT = 2
Number of busy cycles before a busy signal is valid.
85 Glitch External Ring
DEFAULT = 15
The Minimum necessary signal duration to detect a valid call progression tone,
in 10 msec increments
86 Spike External Ring
DEFAULT = 19
The Minimum necessary non-signal duration to detect a valid call progression
tone, in 10 msec increments.
87 Ring Off Max 1 External Ring
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
The Maximum necessary off period for a double ring cadence, in 10 msec
Only Valid when VOX is set to 3
increments.
(Parameter 33)
88 Ring Off Min 2 External Ring
DEFAULT = 225 (2.25 sec).
The Minimum necessary off period for a double ring cadence, in 10 msec
Only Valid when VOX is set to 3
increments.
(Parameter 33)
89 Voice Analysis Detection
DEFAULT = 4
?
Enables or disables voice analysis detection.
Possible Values: 2 = Disable, 4 = Enable.
97 Ring On Max External Ring
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
Maximum allowable on period for a short ring cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid when VOX is set to 3
98 Ring Off Max A External Ring
DEFAULT = 700 (7 sec).
Maximum allowable off period for a long ring cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid when VOX is set to 3
99 Ring Off Max B External Ring
DEFAULT = 530
Maximum allowable off period for a short ring cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
100 Ring Start On External Ring
DEFAULT = 1
I&M
Call Analysis starts ring count
101 Busy On Max External Ring
DEFAULT = 78 (780 msec).
Maximum allowable on period for a single busy cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
102 Busy Off Max External Ring
DEFAULT = 58 (580 msec).
Maximum allowable off period for a single busy cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
55
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Busy Only Parameters (104-142)
?
104 - DTMF Detect Filter
DEFAULT = 3 (48 MSEC)
The minimum necessary DTMF tone duration to detect the tone during Playback.
105 - DTMF Edge
DEFAULT = 2
Detects DTMF on the leading or trailing edge of a DTMF digit.
1=trailing edge, 2 = leading edge of tone.
106 - DTMF Delay
DEFAULT = 2 (32 msec)
The minimum necessary DTMF tone duration to detect the tone during functions
other than Play.
I&M
107 Silence Delay
DEFAULT = 0
The maximum allowable silence before silence is discarded during record.
108 Default Number of Rings
DEFAULT = 3
Default Number of rings before no answer is returned.
109 Call Progress Delay
DEFAULT = 25
Delay after dialing before call analysis begins, in 10 msec increments.
110 Time Out Delay
DEFAULT = 85
Time out delay, when no signal is detected, in 10 msec increments.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

56
Installation
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Busy Only Parameters Continued
111 Loop Current Dial Delay
DEFAULT = 10
Delay after dialing, before loop signal is recognized as connect, in 10 msec
increments.
112 Loop Current Delay
DEFAULT = 10
Delay after loop signal before connect is signaled, in 10 msec increments.
113 - VOX
DEFAULT = 2
Specified whether the signal should be optimized for voice or signals.
1 = Optimize Signal, 2 = Optimize Voice, 3 = Create Tone Table entries on
config file.
114 Noise Delay
DEFAULT = 85
Time out delay, when continuous signal is present, in 10 msec increments.
115 Above 1 Off Busy Only
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an off period compared to the previous
off period with the current Cycle's off period above the previous cycles off period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
116 Below 1 Off Busy Only
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an off period compared to the previous
off period with the current cycle's off period below the previous cycles off period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
117 Above 2 Off Busy Only
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an off period compared to the previous
off period with the current cycle's off period above the previous cycles off period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
?
118 Below 2 Off Busy Only
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an off period compared to the previous
off period with the current cycle's off period below the previous cycles off period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
119 Above On Busy Only
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an on period compared to the previous on
period with the current cycle's on period above the previous cycles on period.
Valid range: 1 to 255.
120 Below On Busy Only
DEFAULT = 13
The Maximum variance allowed during an on period compared to the previous on
period with the current cycle's on period below the previous cycles on period.
I&M
Valid range: 1 to 255.
121 Busy Off Max 1 Busy Only
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
The Maximum allowable first off period for a double busy cadence, in 10 msec
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
increments.
(Parameter 33)
122 Busy Off Max 2- Busy Only
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
The Maximum allowable second off period for a double busy cadence, in 10 msec
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
increments.
(Parameter 33)
123 Busy Off Max Busy Only
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
The Maximum allowable on period for a double busy cadence, in 10 msec
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
increments.
(Parameter 33)
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
57
FOR REFERENCE ONLY: Channel Busy Only Parameters (104-142)
Continued
124 Busy Cycles Busy Only
DEFAULT = 2
Number of busy cycles before a busy signal is considered valid.
125 Glitch Busy Only
DEFAULT = 15
The Minimum necessary signal duration to detect a valid call progression tone, in
10 msec increments.
126 Spike Busy Only
DEFAULT = 19
The Minimum necessary non-signal duration to detect a valid call progression
tone, in 10 msec increments.
127 Ring Off Max 1 Busy Only
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
The Maximum necessary off period for a double ring cadence, in 10 msec
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
increments.
(Parameter 33)
128 Ring Off Min 2 Busy Only
The Minimum necessary off period for a double ring cadence, in 10 msec
increments
129 Voice Analysis Detection
DEFAULT = 4
Enables or disables voice analysis detection.
Possible Values: 2 = Disable, 4 = Enable.
137 Ring on Max Busy Only
DEFAULT = 90 (900 msec).
Maximum allowable on period for a short ring cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
138 Ring Off Max A Busy Only
DEFAULT = 85 (850 msec).
Maximum allowable off period for a long ring cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
?
139 Ring Off Max B Busy Only
DEFAULT = 85 (850 msec).
Maximum allowable off period for a short ring cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
140 Ring Start On Busy Only
DEFAULT = 1
Call Analysis starts ring count
141 Busy On Max Busy Only
DEFAULT = 78 (780 msec).
Maximum allowable on period for a single busy cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
142 Busy Off Max Busy Only
DEFAULT = 58 (580 msec).
Maximum allowable off period for a single busy cadence, in 10 msec increments.
Only Valid When VOX is set to 3
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

58
Installation
10

Configure the System for Perfect Stay
Perform the following steps to configure Perfect Guest Messaging to operate with the Perfect Stay Property
Management system. (Perfect Stay should be installed and running on the network.)
1. Confirm that the correct mailboxes are entered on the Perfect Guest Messaging system.
2. Verify the network connection.
3. Enable Perfect Guest Messaging for Perfect Stay using the System Configuration Utility.
4. Verify that the PMS.DAT file is being transferred correctly.
5. Test the system.
1. Confirm that the correct mailboxes are entered on the Perfect Guest
Messaging System
Verify that you have added mailboxes on the Perfect Guest Messaging system that match the room numbers
in the Perfect Stay room list. For example, if the Perfect Stay room list includes rooms 100-150, be sure that
the Perfect Guest Messaging system includes mailboxes 100 through 150.
2. Verify the Network Connection
NOTE: Shutdown the Perfect Guest Messaging software before you verify the network connection.
To verify that the network connection is working, first copy a test file from the Perfect Guest Messaging
system to the Perfect Stay Host system. Then, copy a test file from the Perfect Stay system to the Perfect
?
Guest Messaging system. If both files copy without error, the network connection is operating and the
systems are communicating.
3. Enable Perfect Guest Messaging for Perfect Stay using the System
Configuration Utility
To implement Perfect Stay, the PERFECT.INI file must be modified. The System Configuration Utility
modifies the PERFECT.INI file for Perfect Stay.
NOTE: The sentinel key must also be enabled for Perfect Stay.
· From the Desktop of Perfect Guest Messaging, Select Start
· Select Programs -- Perfect Guest Messaging System Configuration Utility
· Highlight Property Management System
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
59
To edit these settings, click the Modify button. A screen similar to this appears. After making the desired
changes, click OK to return to the Main Screen.
· PMS Installed: Indicates whether or not Property
Management System is installed. Choices are Yes
and No. Set to Yes.
· PMS Type: Specifies the serial port protocol.
Set to Teleco.
· Port Settings: Indicates the Com port, baud rate,
parity, databits, and stopbits settings for PMS.
Click Configure to modify the Com port
settings.
· PMS Mode: Indicates the mode to use for PMS.
Choices are File (use shared directory) and Serial
(use Com Settings). Set to File.
· PMS Shared Directory: Works with "File"
mode (is specified in PMS mode above) to
indicate which shared directory to use. Set to
C:\vms.
· PMS Checkout Messages Destination: Upon
checkout, messages that are still present in the mailbox are moved to a phantom mailbox that starts
with the value entered in this field and ends with the mailbox number. For example, enter "7" in
this field. When the guest in room 250 (and mailbox 250) checks out, his or her messages are
moved to phantom mailbox number 7250. The default is "7".
4. Verify that the PMS.DAT file is being transferred correctly
?
The PMS.DAT file is the communication file that the Perfect Stay system sends to the Perfect Guest
Messaging system. It includes various information, including check-in and check-out of a guest. The
PMS.DAT file should be sent to the c:\vms directory on the Perfect Guest Messaging system. Check-in a "test
guest" into a valid room on the Perfect Stay system. Verify that the PMS.DAT file was sent to the C:\VMS
directory on the Perfect Guest Messaging system.
5. Test the System
If you have not already done so, check-in a "Test Guest" on the Perfect Stay system. Verify that the mailbox
on the Perfect Guest Messaging matches the room that "Test Guest" was checked into. Send messages to the
Test Guest. Check out the "Test Guest" from the Perfect Stay system. Verify that the mailbox on Perfect
Guest Messaging that matched the room number is checked out and that the messages are moved to the I&M
appropriate phantom mailbox. (The phantom mailbox number begins with the value you entered in the "PMS
Checkout Messages Destination" field and ends with the mailbox/room number.)
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

60
Installation
11

Program the Telephone System
Perfect Guest Messaging interfaces and integrates with many telephone systems. Although the information in this
section applies to most installations, it should only be used as a general guideline. For specific information on any
telephone system, consult your Regional Sales Manager or Teleco Technical Support.
Telephone system programming should be performed in two stages.
In the first stage, the extensions for the automated attendant are programmed along with any other changes that
have a minimal impact on the operation of your customer's telecommunications (without automated attendant).
The second stage of changes is not performed until Perfect Guest Messaging has been fully configured and all
training is complete. This stage, often referred to as the cutover, is where you actually route and forward calls to
the automated attendant.
This section covers those tasks that should be performed in the first stage of telephone system programming. But
first, a brief list of telephone system requirements is noted.
Hardware Requirements
Following is a list of the hardware capabilities required by a telephone system to work with Perfect Guest
Messaging:
The telephone system must have the capacity of providing an analog port/extension for each port of the Perfect
Guest Messaging system.
The telephone system must have sufficient DTMF receiver channels to handle high traffic simultaneous call
transfers.
RJ-14 telephone jacks must be installed within 2 feet of the Perfect Guest Messaging system. Perfect Guest
Messaging interfaces to the telephone system by plugging a 4-conductor modular line cord into the RJ-14.
?
A dedicated station or trunk port must be available for remote maintenance purposes.
Software/Programming Requirements
Following is a list of the software capabilities required by a telephone system to work with Perfect Guest
Messaging:
· The telephone system must have the capability of programming the analog station ports/extensions for
the Perfect Guest Messaging system into a station hunt group.
· Trunks must be able to be routed directly to the hunt group containing the Perfect Guest Messaging
analog stations, bypassing the console or main answering position.
· Calls must be able to be transferred from an analog station by means of a switch hook and/or DTMF
access code and retrieved in a busy or unanswered state by means of a switch hook and/or DTMF access
code.
I&M
· The telephone system must have the ability to bypass Perfect Guest Messaging during times when the
Perfect Guest Messaging system is brought down for maintenance. Typical bypass capabilities may be a
selectable day/night mode that sends incoming traffic to the Perfect Guest Messaging hunt group during
the night mode. Traffic is sent directly to the console or other in-house answering position when the day
mode is selected.
· Perfect Guest Messaging communicates through tone digits entered from the telephone keypad. It is
necessary that both analog and digital phones, including the console, on the telephone system provide or
have access to station-to-station signaling (DTMF generation).
Automated Attendant Extensions
The automated attendant/voice messaging extensions are usually programmed into a hunt group or UCD group. If
Perfect Guest Messaging is configured as the primary attendant, incoming trunk calls are routed to this hunt
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
61
group. If possible, either include the console station as the last member of the hunt group or program calls to
overflow to the console station. This ensures the proper handling of calls during peak and service periods.
Automated attendant extensions should be programmed not to receive any call-waiting or camp-on tones. Often, a
Data Class of Service (for modems) is suitable for this purpose. Notify extensions also require this if "call at desk"
type of notification is used.
Automated attendant extensions require access to many DTMF receivers. A non-blocking situation is ideal. If
receivers are not already available, Perfect Guest Messaging cannot transfer the call. By default, the system is
programmed to check for dialtone before attempting to perform a call transfer. If no DTMF receivers are
available at that time, Perfect Guest Messaging informs the caller that all circuits are busy and to try their call
again later.
In some configurations, Perfect Guest Messaging may perform supervised transfers. Make sure the transfer recall
time and the hold recall time (also referred to as call forward time, call coverage time, etc.) is programmed to be
greater than that configured for Perfect Guest Messaging to pull the call back.
Outdial Notification Extension
All of the Perfect Guest Messaging extensions are usually responsible for answering calls, transferring calls, and
recording messages. The last channel of the Perfect Guest Messaging ports is also configured to perform
outdialing for new message notification.
Ensure that the Notify extension is configured with the appropriate outdial capabilities. Consider whether or not
notifications will be made via a long distance call. The trunk access codes required by the telephone system for
both local and long distance dialing must be entered in the Outcalling Parameters of the Perfect Guest Messaging.
This port may also perform message lamp Notification and should be considered when configuring the class of
service for this port.
Integration Parameters
If the telephone system supports integration, configure its parameters appropriately. If you aren't familiar with the
telephone system's integration capabilities, consult the manufacturer's documentation. If Perfect Guest
Messaging was ordered with the proper information on the telephone system, it is pre-configured for the
appropriate type of integration.
?
Bypass Mode
Every system should have a reliable method of bypassing the automated attendant. A common method for
bypassing Perfect Guest Messaging is to program (1) a night mode on the telephone system that routes calls to the
Perfect Guest Messaging hunt group, and (2) a day mode which routes calls to the human attendant. This method
provides your customer with a convenient method of bypassing Perfect Guest Messaging during periods of system
maintenance. Night mode is preferred for Perfect Guest Messaging operation, since many telephone systems
automatically come back up in night mode after an extended power outage.
Another method of bypassing Perfect Guest Messaging is to program each Perfect Guest Messaging extension to
forward all calls to the operator console. This may have to be done by plugging in a 2500 set into each extension
and executing the call forwarding code. Since call forwarding may interfere with the function of the hunt group,
this and any other method of bypassing Perfect Guest Messaging should be verified.
I&M
Other Modifications
Some telephone system programming tasks should be delayed until other tasks are completed. Anything
considered as part of the "final cutover" should not be performed until the training of the System Administrator
and the End Users and any necessary modifications to the Perfect Guest Messaging configuration are completed.
This includes at least the following:
· Forwarding stations to Perfect Guest Messaging.
· Routing trunk calls to Perfect Guest Messaging.
· Changing call coverage paths to Perfect Guest Messaging.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

62
Installation
12
Install the Desktop Interface
The Desktop PC interface of Perfect Guest Messaging simplifies the way Users handle messages. From the
desktop PC (which must be connected to the LAN), Users have access to their voice messages as well as
information about each call and contact. Although the Desktop PC interface may be implemented with only a
telephone, to take full advantage of it, the PC should be equipped with a multimedia sound device such as a
sound card, speakers, and a microphone. These devices allow the User to listen and record messages faster
and easier than with only a telephone.
NOTE: The Perfect Guest Messaging server must be installed and connected to the network before installing
the desktop software. Refer to Section 6: "Setting Up the Network" for more information on the network
settings for the desktop client PC. In addition, the User must be enabled as a desktop User. To enable, on the
system, select the appropriate mailbox, select the "Personal Options" tab and select "Desktop User".
Install the Desktop Software
Windows 3.11 Installation:
1. Turn on the computer and start Windows.
2. From the Windows Program Manager, select Run from the File menu. A dialog box appears.
3. In the Command Line field, type X:\install\desktop\setup.exe (where X is the network drive for the Perfect
Guest Messaging server) or type \\pvoffice\vm\install\desktop\setup.exe and press Enter.
4. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to complete the Desktop interface installation. (See
?
following pages.)
Windows 95 Installation:
1. Turn on the computer and start Windows.
2. +Click the Start button and select Run. A dialog box appears.
3. In the Open field, type X:\install\desktop\setup.exe (where X is the network drive for the Perfect Guest
Messaging server) or type \\pvoffice\vm\install\desktop\setup.exe and click OK. The initial install screen
appears.
4. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to complete the Desktop interface installation. (See
following pages.)
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
63
1. Click Next.
?
I&M
2. Select the destination directory. It is recommended that you install to the default directory C:\Program
Files\Pvoffice.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

64
Installation
3. Click Next. The below status screen appears.
?
4. When all files are copied, the message below is displayed.
5. Click OK.
I&M
6. Click OK.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
65
7. Verify the information on the above screen and select the appropriate Protocol and click OK.
?
8. Select the language and click OK.
9. It is recommended that you reindex. Click Yes.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

66
Installation
10. Installation is now complete. Click Finish.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
67
Install the Player for Unified Messaging via E-Mail Integration
Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI) is a standard created by Microsoft that allows MAPI-
compliant applications to communicate with each other. When configured for MAPI, Perfect Guest
Messaging may communicate with any MAPI-compliant messaging system. With MAPI, Users gain unified
messaging capability. Unified messaging integrates voice, fax, and e-mail messages into a single mailbox. If
Perfect Guest Messaging is configured for Unified Messaging via E-Mail Integration, the appropriate E-Mail
player must be installed (either the Generic MAPI Player or the Outlook Player). The player allows Users to
play an attached voice mail message from their e-mail mailbox. Refer to "Unified Messaging Via E-Mail" in
the Optional Applications section for more information.
Windows 3.11 Installation:
1. Turn on the computer and start Windows.
2. From the Windows Program Manager, select Run from the File menu. A dialog box appears.
3. In the Command Line field, type X:\\pvoffice\vm\install\E-mail Players\select directory*\setup.exe
(where X is the network drive for the Perfect Guest Messaging server) and press Enter.
4. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to complete the installation.
Windows 95 Installation:
1. Turn on the computer and start Windows.
2. Click the Start button and select Run. A dialog box appears.
3. In the Open field, type X:\\pvoffice\[share name]\install\ E-mail Players\select directory*\setup.exe
(where X is the network drive for the Perfect Guest Messaging server) and click OK. The initial install
screen appears.
4. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to complete the installation.
?
*Depending on which E-Mail player you need, specify either the "MAPI Player" or "Outlook Player"
directory.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

68
Installation
13
Testing Perfect Guest Messaging
NOTE: You should test all connections and configuration before beginning the
training. If you want to do supervised calls and you encounter problems while testing,
you may need to perform call analysis. Refer to the Appendix for details on
performing call analysis.

Test
Expected Action
Place an Outside Call to:
· No-Answer Station
Hear No-Answer mailbox greeting
· Busy Station
Hear Busy mailbox greeting
· DND Station
Hear Busy mailbox greeting
· Screening Station answered
Hear Screening dialog
· Screening Station busy
Hear Screening dialog
· Screening Station No-Answer
Hear Screening dialog
· Hang-up during Company greeting
Disconnect
· Hang-up during transfer to Operator
Disconnect
· Hang-up during No-Answer Greeting
Disconnect
Place an Inside Call to:
· No-Answer Station
Hear No-Answer mailbox greeting
· Busy Station
Hear Busy mailbox greeting
· DND Station
Hear Busy mailbox greeting
Check Screen Pops for:
·
?
Outside Call
· New Message
Check Message Lamps
· New Message
Lamp on
· No New Messages
Lamp off
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
69
14

Training
System Administrator Training
The System Administrator is the primary on-site contact. It is very important to ensure that this person feels
comfortable with both the administration of the system and its usage. Users will look to the System Administrator
as the person who knows the system's features and capabilities. Lack of a well trained, confident System
Administrator will result in overdependence upon the technical personnel of the installing dealer to perform
system administrative tasks. The best method for training the Administrator is to involve the person during the
configuration of the system. This helps with familiarization of the interface as well as lending assistance in
determining certain system parameters. Every menu and submenu of the Perfect Guest Messaging interface
should be explained and the Administrator should feel comfortable with at least the following tasks:
· Record system prompts and company greetings
· Add a new User to the system
· Record audiotext announcements
· Adding holidays
· Generate reports
User Training
The User is the most important person on every site. An untrained User community results in dissatisfaction and
frustration with the system. This, in turn, can lead to serious problems in getting the system accepted politically.
Since acceptance of the system, especially in the early stages of usage, is critical to its success. Proper training is,
in many ways, just as important as the technical aspects of the installation.
During User training, the system should be fully functional, but not "on line" to outside callers. User training
sessions should be scheduled to include a step by step instruction on the features of the system using the Quick
?
Reference Cards as a guideline. Users should be encouraged to make copies of the card for their home and desk
area and to carry the card with them at all times. Ideally, the Users should be given a day or two after their
training sessions to familiarize themselves with the features before final cut over. This time may be used to send
messages to each other, record personal greetings, etc. Although the tutorial takes most Users through the process
of activating their message box, all Users should be able to perform at least the following tasks in order to benefit
from the system:
· Select a personal greeting
· Record a personal greeting
· Listen to messages
· Delete messages
· Send a message to another User
I&M
· Forward a message to another User
Console Operator Training
The console operator plays a crucial role in many telecommunications environments. The console operator should
be comfortable with at least the following tasks:
· Transfer a caller to Perfect Guest Messaging (main greeting)
· Transfer a caller to a User's mailbox
· Quickly leave a message for a User if a caller does not want to use the system
· Explain the basic operation of the system to a caller (i.e., "....enter the person's extension...")

Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

70
Installation

15
Final Cutover
After Perfect Guest Messaging and the telephone system are configured, any necessary modifications to the
configuration have been completed and the System Administrator and Users have been fully trained, the final
cutover can be performed.
Whether the system will be used as a primary, secondary or overflow attendant, CO lines may now be routed to
Perfect Guest Messaging. Users' extensions may now be forwarded to the Perfect Guest Messaging.
Close contact needs to be kept with the site during this crucial period so that anything that was overlooked during
the installation can be quickly taken care of. The console operator and the System Administrator are especially
good sources of information during this period about how the system is functioning and how well it is being
accepted the Users and the caller community.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
71
16
Additional Information
Startup Options
Following is a list of Perfect Guest Messaging startup options. IMPORTANT: The desired option must be
added to the program line in three places: the Desktop, Startup group, and Program group.
Startup option
- dk
Teleco/Toshiba SMDI supports Caller ID
- smdi
Centrex no Caller ID
- mci
NEC SMDI supports Caller ID
- ns
Northstar with Dialogic supports Caller ID
- sx
Mitel no Caller ID
- s1
Northern Telecom SL1 2116 set emulation no Caller ID
- nonet
Disable networking
- fax
Enable fax-on-demand and fax mail
To add an argument to the program line:
1. Right-click the Perfect Guest Messaging icon on the Desktop, in the Startup group, and the Program
group*
2. Select Properties
3. Select the Shortcut tab
4.
?
At the end of the Target field information, type a space then the option. Below is an example of thefax
argument.
I&M
*To access the Startup group and Programs group, right-click the Start button. Select Open. From the "Start
Menu", double-click Programs. Double-click Startup and right-click the Perfect Guest Messaging icon.
Repeat steps 2-4 above. Double-click Programs and right-click the Perfect Guest Messaging icon. Repeat
steps 2-4.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

72
Installation
Dialstring Codes
The telephone keypad values for the special characters utilized by the telephone system and the Perfect Guest
Messaging system are as follows:
Name Character Telephone Code
Flash Hook
&
*1
Pause
,
*2
Extension
E
*3
Sender's Extension
S
*4
C.O.
C
*5
Mailbox
M
*6
Code for Inband
$
*7
Underscore
_
*8
Blank
-
*9
Pound
#
*0

Star
*
**
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Installation
73
Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse
By using the following "shortcut" keystrokes, you may navigate through the system using the keyboard
instead of the mouse. To select different menu options, press the key sequence in the left column. To directly
activate a function, press the key sequence listed in the right column. For example, to log on to the system,
press Alt + F to pull down the File Menu. You may then either press N and then Enter or you may press
F11.
Key sequence to
Menu option
Key sequence to directly
select Menu Option
activate menu option
MAIN MENU
Alt + F
File Menu
N
Logon
F11
F
Logoff
F12
S
Shutdown
Ctrl + X
Alt + M
Mailbox Menu
M
Menu Schedules
Ctrl + M
Alt + C
Company Menu
A
AMIS
Ctrl + A
Alt + S
System Menu
T
Trace
Ctrl + T
C
Commands
Ctrl + O
S
Status
Ctrl + S
D
Debug
Ctrl + D
?
U
Utilities
R
Reorg
Ctrl + R
Alt + V
View Menu
P
Port Activity
Ctrl + P
MAILBOX MENU
Alt + I
Edit Menu
T
Goto
Ctrl + G
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

74
Installation
17
Teleco Technical Support
Teleco is committed to providing you with the best support in the industry. Every authorized dealer is entitled to
free technical support. For assistance, call between 8:30 A.M. and 8:30 P.M. Eastern Time, Monday through
Friday (Technical Support is unavailable from 12:30-1:30 PM Eastern Time on these days.). Extended pager
service is available for emergencies only from 8:30 A.M. until 8:30 PM Eastern Time on Saturday and Sunday.
In either case, a Technical Support Engineer is available during these time periods to assist with any problems.
The assistance provided by Teleco Technical Support is significantly enhanced when you participate in the
troubleshooting process. In some cases, Teleco Technical Support will not be able to provide any help without on-
site assistance. Unless you are specifically told otherwise, do not expect Teleco Technical Support to take care of
the problem without your participation.
Before Calling Technical Support
Before calling Teleco Technical Support, ensure the following:
· Make sure the problem that is being reported can be reproduced.
· If the problem is intermittent, try to determine if the problem is traffic or port related.
· Make sure all cable connections are secure.
To expedite a solution to the problem, gather the following information about the site:
· Perfect Guest Messaging version number
· The number of ports.
· Telephone system manufacturer, model and software version.
· Original installation date of system.
· Any recent changes to the telephone system or the Perfect Guest Messaging system.
?
· Procedure for accessing the modem (i.e. telephone system extension number, mailbox number, etc.)
· Extension numbers of the Perfect Guest Messaging ports
If you are an authorized dealer, technical support on Perfect Guest Messaging and other voice processing products
may be obtained by calling 1-800-755-1552. As a certified technician, you will have been furnished with a dealer
code and a personal PIN to access the tech support department queue. Support for other Teleco products can be
obtained by calling 864-297-4401 (fax: 864-297-9983). Please note that systems with no modem access are subject
to a denial of support services.
If you are not an authorized dealer, or if you do not meet the minimum requirements for free technical support,
you may purchase a block of support time. Call 864-297-4401, and select extension 280 for pricing and terms.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database
Configuration
?
I&M

?
I&M

CONTENTS
1 - INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION................................................................... 1
What is Perfect Guest Messaging?......................................................................................................... 1
Before You Begin ................................................................................................................................... 1
Basic System Maintenance .................................................................................................................... 1
Questions and Answers .......................................................................................................................... 1
Problem Reporting ................................................................................................................................. 2
2 - STEPS FOR FIRST-TIME SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ........................................................... 3
3 - THE MAIN MENU ..................................................................................................................... 4
Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse............................................................................................... 5
4 - LOGGING ON/OFF AND SHUTTING DOWN THE SYSTEM .................................................... 6
Logging on to Perfect Guest Messaging: ................................................................................................ 6
Logging off of Perfect Guest Messaging ................................................................................................. 6
Shutting Down Perfect Guest Messaging................................................................................................ 6
5 - COMPANY ................................................................................................................................ 7
To Access: ............................................................................................................................................. 7
Company: Holidays ............................................................................................................................... 9
Adding a Holiday .................................................................................................................................... 9
Company: Multi-Lingual....................................................................................................................... 10
Company: Incoming Status Tab............................................................................................................ 12
Company: Business Hours Tab............................................................................................................ 14
Company: Single Digit Options Tab..................................................................................................... 15
Company: Greetings Tab..................................................................................................................... 17
6 - MAILBOX CLASSES OF SERVICE ........................................................................................ 18
To Access: ........................................................................................................................................... 18
Class of Service: Storage Field Descriptions ....................................................................................... 19
Class of Service: Notification Field Descriptions .................................................................................. 20
?
Class of Service: Transfer Supervision Field Descriptions ................................................................... 21
Class of Service: Transfer Options Field Descriptions ......................................................................... 21
Class of Service: Transfer Options Field Descriptions ......................................................................... 22
Class of Service: Mailbox Options Field Descriptions .......................................................................... 23
Class of Service: Mailbox Options Field Descriptions .......................................................................... 24
7 - MAILBOXES ........................................................................................................................... 25
To Access Mailbox features:................................................................................................................. 25
Creating Mailboxes............................................................................................................................... 26
Deleting or Resetting Mailboxes ........................................................................................................... 27
Editing Mailboxes ................................................................................................................................. 28
Mailbox: Personal Options Tab............................................................................................................. 30
Mailbox: Transfer Options Tab ............................................................................................................. 32
Mailbox: Message Forwarding Tab ....................................................................................................... 36
I&M
Mailbox: Alternate Spelling Tab ............................................................................................................ 37
Mailbox: Other Options Tab.................................................................................................................. 38
Mailbox: Other Options Tab (continued) ............................................................................................... 39
Mailbox: LAP Options Tab.................................................................................................................... 40
Mailbox: Notification Set up Outcalling Options For a User............................................................... 41
Mailbox: Distribution Lists.................................................................................................................... 43
Creating a Broadcast Distribution List ................................................................................................... 44
8 - SYSTEM.................................................................................................................................. 45
System: Trace ..................................................................................................................................... 46
System: Commands ............................................................................................................................ 47
System: Status .................................................................................................................................... 49

System: Debug.................................................................................................................................... 49
System: Utilities .................................................................................................................................. 50
9 - VIEW........................................................................................................................................51
View: Port Activity ............................................................................................................................... 51
View: Mailbox Status ........................................................................................................................... 52
View: Fax Status ................................................................................................................................. 52
This screen displays the status of faxes. ..................................................................................................... 52
View: Call Routing Tables.................................................................................................................... 53
10 - VOICE MENUS ......................................................................................................................56
To Access: ........................................................................................................................................... 56
1 - Naming a Voice Menu ..................................................................................................................... 56
2 - Assigning Options on the Voice Menu Entry Form ........................................................................... 57
3 - Building Your Voice Menu ............................................................................................................... 62
4 - Assigning a Schedule to the Voice Menu......................................................................................... 62
5 - Activating Your Voice Menu ............................................................................................................ 62
Mailbox Level ................................................................................................................................................ 62
Company Level............................................................................................................................................... 62
6 - Recording Voice Menu Prompts ...................................................................................................... 63
Voice Menu Worksheets....................................................................................................................... 64
Demonstration Voice Menu .................................................................................................................. 65
Enhancing Direct Department Access ............................................................................................................ 65
11 - CREATING GLOBAL MENU SCHEDULES...........................................................................70
Voice Menu Schedules ......................................................................................................................... 71
E-Mail Schedules ................................................................................................................................. 73
Call Routing Table Schedules............................................................................................................... 74
12 - PERFORMING SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION OVER THE TELEPHONE...............................75
Accessing the System Administrator Menu ........................................................................................... 75
The System Administrator Menu........................................................................................................... 75
Create or Delete Mailboxes .................................................................................................................. 76
Configure Class of Service ................................................................................................................... 77
System Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 78
?
Recording System Prompts and Company Greetings ........................................................................... 79
Change the Holiday Greeting................................................................................................................ 80
I&M

Database Configuration
1
1
Introduction To System Administration
What is Perfect Guest Messaging?
Perfect Guest Messaging is a voice processing system that functions with the telephone system to enhance the
organization's overall telecommunications environment. Perfect Guest Messaging is a unified messaging
solution. With the optional Desktop interface, Perfect Guest Messaging offers call and voice messaging control
from the User's desktop PC. System Administrative functions may also be performed via touchtones on the
telephone keypad or mouse clicks on the Windows interface from the Perfect Guest Messaging server.
Before You Begin
The System Administrator plays a key role in the everyday operation of Perfect Guest Messaging. It is important
that the System Administrator understand at least the basics of how Perfect Guest Messaging operates. The
System Administrator should be familiar with all features available to Users and completely understand the User
Guide before covering the material in this manual.
Basic System Maintenance
As mentioned above, the System Administrator performs a key role in the operation of Perfect Voice. Following
are some examples of the basic duties as a System Administrator.
· Add a new User to the Perfect Guest Messaging system.
· Record an audiotext announcement.
· Generate reports showing basic system information such as call counts, port usage, message counts,
available messaging space, etc.
· Understand how to record the system greetings.
Questions and Answers
?
The System Administrator is responsible for answering questions from Users and having a working knowledge of
how the system operates. The System Administrator also helps new or inexperienced Users become accustomed to
using the system. Answers can be found in a variety of sources, including at least the following:
· Perfect Guest Messaging Installation and Maintenance manual
· The End User Guide
· Contact with the vendor's technical personnel
· Personal experience with the system
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

2
Database Configuration
Problem Reporting
In the event that a User or caller reports a problem with the system, the System Administrator and/or the vendor's
technical personnel work to determine the cause of, and solution to the problem. The cause of a problem may be
one or more of the following:
· User error
· Insufficient training
· Incorrect system configuration
· Faulty hardware
· Faulty software
The System Administrator plays a central role in separating those issues that can be addressed within the
organization (i.e. training, User error, etc.) and those issues that need to be addressed by the vendor's technical
personnel. A complete description of the situation is vital in determining the problem and the solution.
Information should be gathered as to when the situation occurred, who was involved (caller and/or User), what
occurred and how the system was being used at the time.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
3
2
Steps for First-Time System
Configuration
Referring to the worksheets that you completed in the Installation section, follow the steps below to configure the
Perfect Guest Messaging system.
1. Define the Company
1. Define the Company or
Create the Company or Companies and assign the appropriate
Companies.
Operator and Greetings. Set up the Business Hours, Single
Section 5
Digit Options, and Multilingual options, if any.
2. Set up the Classes of
2. Set Up the Classes of Service
Service.
Set up the necessary Classes of Service. Remember to
Section 6
accommodate phantom mailboxes, multilingual users, the
operator, and special departmental considerations.
3. Add the mailboxes.
3. Add the Mailboxes.
Enter the first name and last name for every mailbox.
Section 7
?
4. Create the Voice Menus.
4. Create the Voice Menus.
Based upon requirements, define any Voice Menus, schedules,
Section 10
special greetings, or Call Routing that is required.
5. Record Greetings.
5. Recording
Section 12
Record Company Greetings and get Users to record their own
I&M
mailbox greetings.
6. Verify Call Routing and Test
the system.
6. Verifying and Testing
Verify that calls are being routed to the appropriate locations,
and test that the Voice Mail system performs as required.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

4
Database Configuration
3
The Main Menu
When the Perfect Guest Messaging system starts for the first time, the Main Menu appears. This screen shows
basic system information as well as user-friendly buttons allowing access to mailboxes (Mailbox) , Classes of
Service (Classes), company (Company), audiotext menus (V-Menus), and system parameters (Parameters).
This indicates, in hours and minutes,
how much hard drive space is
available on the system. One hour of
The current time is displayed
voice storage is equal to approximately
beside the top drop-down
ten megabytes of hard drive space.
menu selections.
For example, 1 hour=10 Mb.
?
The system date is displayed. Verify
that this is the correct date. To change
the system date, refer to Commands
option under the System drop-down
menu.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
5
Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse
By using the following "shortcut" keystrokes, you may navigate through the system using the keyboard instead of
the mouse. To select different menu options, press the key sequence in the left column. To directly activate a
function, press the key sequence listed in the right column. For example, to log on to the system, press Alt + F to
pull down the File Menu. You may then either press N and then Enter or you may press F11.
Key sequence to
Menu option
Key sequence to directly
select Menu Option
activate menu option
MAIN MENU
Alt + F
File Menu
N
Logon
F11
F
Logoff
F12
S
Shutdown
Ctrl + X
Alt + M
Mailbox Menu
M
Menu Schedules
Ctrl + M
Alt + C
Company Menu
A
AMIS
Ctrl + A
Alt + S
System Menu
T
Trace
Ctrl + T
C
Commands
Ctrl + O
S
Status
Ctrl + S
D
Debug
Ctrl + D
?
U
Utilities
R
Reorg
Ctrl + R
Alt + V
View Menu
P
Port Activity
Ctrl + P
MAILBOX MENU
Alt + I
Edit Menu
T
Goto
Ctrl + G
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

6
Database Configuration
4
Logging On/Off and Shutting Down the
System
When you first begin the Perfect Guest Messaging system, you will not have access to any of Perfect Guest
Messaging's other screens. To make any modifications to the Perfect Guest Messaging system, you must log on to
the system with the System Administrator's password.
Logging on to Perfect Guest Messaging:
· From the Main Menu, Select "File", select "Log on" (You
may also press the F11 key)
· Enter your password
The default password for the System Administrator is 9999. The
Installer should have changed the password. The System
Administrator level allows routine maintenance to the system. It
does not allow access to the system parameters screen.
Logging off of Perfect Guest Messaging
When you log off of the Perfect Guest Messaging system, the first level of security is restored. This ensures that
?
no unauthorized changes can be made to the system.
· From the Main Menu, Select "File", select "Log off" (You may also press the F12 key)
Shutting Down Perfect Guest Messaging
· From the Main Menu, Select "File", select "Shutdown" or select "System - Commands" and click
"Shutdown". The screen below appears. You may shut down immediately (Exit Now) or wait until no
ports are active (Wait for end of Activity). Choosing to wait makes idle voice mail ports unavailable and
prevents the system from cutting off callers.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
7
5
Company
The Company screen allows single or multiple companies with multiple configurations to be set up on a single
Perfect Guest Messaging system.
NOTE: At least one company must be entered for the Perfect Guest Messaging system to function properly.
To Access:
· From the Main Menu, select the Company button. The Company screen is displayed.
This option allows the
system to answer using
special holiday greetings.
See "Holidays" later in
this section for more
information.
This option allows the
system to answer calls in
up to nine different
?
languages. Refer to
"Multi-Lingual" later in
this section for more
information.
These tabs allow you to
specify how the system
handles incoming calls,
set company business
hours, designate single
digit options, and set up
company greetings I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

8
Database Configuration
Company
For the Perfect Guest Messaging system to function properly, you must enter at least one company. The day
and night operator fields must also be set up to activate the auto attendant.
Name
Enter the company name. This name is used to associate Users to a particular company when there are two or
more companies sharing the same Perfect Guest Messaging system. If Perfect Guest Messaging is configured
for only one company, this field will not affect any function of the system. However, if the system is
configured for more than one company, the company name must be entered in the mailbox screen exactly as it
is entered here. Misspellings result in unreliable operation. The system uses the first 8 characters of this
field.
Phone #
Enter the company telephone number. Hyphens and brackets are acceptable. This field is not used by the
system, so it may be left blank.
Day Operator
Enter the mailbox number of the Day Operator (Secretary). This allows callers to transfer to this extension
when they press zero (0) to speak to an operator. The number that is entered here MUST be a valid mailbox
number. The Perfect Guest Messaging system uses the mailbox number to retrieve the extension number to
dial.
Night Operator
Enter the mailbox number of the Night operator, if there is one. If there is no night operator, enter the
mailbox number of the day operator. This transfers callers to the Day Operator's mailbox when the Day
Operator is Logged Out. The number that is entered here MUST be a valid mailbox number. The Perfect
Guest Messaging system uses the mailbox number to retrieve the extension number to dial.
Number of Languages
This field specifies the number of languages installed on your particular Perfect Guest Messaging system.
?
Perfect Guest Messaging may operate with up to nine (9) different languages. A value must be entered here if
your system has more than one language. If your system has only one language, you must leave this field
blank.
NOTE: Perfect Guest Messaging comes with English as the default language. All other language modules
must be purchased and installed separately. Please contact a Teleco dealer for information about obtaining
additional language modules.
Fax Extension
The company fax machine no longer requires its own dedicated line. Enter the fax machine extension
number to which your fax machine is connected. When an automatic or polling fax call reaches the main
company greeting, the Perfect Guest Messaging system identifies the incoming fax tone and transfers the call
to this fax extension.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
9
Company: Holidays
The Holidays parameter is a flexible feature that allows you to specify holidays so that an appropriate greeting can
be played on that day. You may input as many holiday dates as you require.
· Click on the Holidays button on the Company screen. The below screen appears.
Adding a Holiday
To add a holiday, click on the Add button on the Holiday Greeting screen. The below Calendar screen appears.
?
I&M
Specify the date of the holiday and the greeting number associated with it. Choose the appropriate prompt that
corresponds to the holiday in question.
NOTE: You may record a new prompt for each holiday you add to reflect the appropriate holiday's
greeting or record a generic holiday message that may be used for all holidays. To record these greetings
refer to " Recording System Prompts and Company Greetings".
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

10
Database Configuration
Company: Multi-Lingual
You may have a single Perfect Guest Messaging system operating with up to nine (9) different languages that
callers may choose from. To set up Perfect Guest Messaging for more than one language:
· Enter the number of languages in the "Number of Languages" field on the Company screen.
· Click the Multi-Lingual button on the Company screen. The below screen appears.
· From the drop down list, select the types of languages. There are many language modules to choose from.
Please contact your dealer for more information on the language modules.
?
Language
For each additional language module that your Perfect Guest Messaging uses, select the appropriate language
choice on the multi-lingual screen as shown above. This identifies which languages are available on the
system.
Prompt
The prompt number is a three-digit number between 001 and 999. Please note that these prompt numbers
are the same as your Company Greetings. Please be sure not to use the same numbers. To record these
prompts, please refer to "Recording System Prompts and Company Greetings".
Operator
This field allows you to specify an operator for this language. It overrides the default operator.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
11
Multi-Lingual Considerations
Perfect Guest Messaging functions differently when it is configured to operate in the multi-lingual mode. It is
important to understand how the Perfect Guest Messaging system answers calls in standard mode and in
multi-lingual mode.
Standard Mode:
When only one language is being used (Standard) the appropriate Greeting plays (Morning,
Afternoon, Evening, or Closed) during which time callers may dial extension numbers, select
Single digit options, press #
to access mailbox options, press *
to access the company
directory, or #
*
to access the System Administrator menu. If the caller does nothing, the
system transfers the caller to the Day or Night Operator two seconds after the main company
greeting ends.
Multi-Lingual Mode:
When Perfect Guest Messaging is configured to operate in Multi-Lingual mode, it operates the
same as standard mode until it begins to play the main company greeting. At this point, the
Morning, Afternoon, Evening, and Closed Greeting are no longer used to offer options to the
callers. The Perfect Guest Messaging system requires the caller to select a language in order to
continue. These language greetings should welcome the caller and ask them to select the
language that they would like to be served with. The Perfect Guest Messaging system then waits
for the caller to make a selection.
No Single digit options are available to the caller at this time. The caller may, however, dial a
desired extension number but he or she will be served in the default language (English by
?
default). Once the caller selects a language, the Multi-Lingual greeting is then played.
The Multi-Lingual Greeting that plays is the prompt programmed on the Language screen. The
Multi-Lingual greeting offers the caller all of the options that would be given to a caller in
Standard mode.
If a caller selects a language other than the default language, the call progress for this caller is
supervised to ensure that in the event that the caller is transferred back to the main greeting, the
Perfect Guest Messaging system continues to play options in the language chosen by the caller.
All calls that are transferred using the default language will use the supervision specified in the
Class of Service.
The number specified in the "Number of Languages" field controls the number of fields provided
to you on the Multi-lingual screen. Select only the languages that have already been installed. If
I&M
these language modules have not been installed, nothing plays.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

12
Database Configuration
Company: Incoming Status Tab
The Incoming Status Tab specifies how the Perfect Guest Messaging system handles incoming calls.
Rings
Open
This parameter specifies the number of rings before the Automated Attendant answers a call during the open
office hours. A value of one (1) intercepts calls quickly.
Closed
This parameter specifies the number of rings before the Automated Attendant answers a call during the closed
office hours. A value of one (1) intercepts calls quickly.
Line Answering
"Line Answering" parameters define how the telephone system and the voice mail / auto attendant system ports
are utilized. If Perfect Guest Messaging is set up for only one company, follow the outline for a single company.
?
For multiple companies, follow the outline for multiple companies.
CO Lines
This field specifies the number of CO lines dedicated to the particular company.
Single Company Configuration: When there is only one company, there is no need to dedicate any C.O.
lines. This field should be left blank.
Multiple Company Configuration: When more than one company is sharing the same telephone system, it
is possible to set up the system with "Floating Ports". This means that both companies share the same
Inbound Ports. However, the C.O. Lines used by each company must be identified so that the Perfect Guest
Messaging system knows which company greeting to play. For example, if you have two companies using a
four port system and each company has two incoming C.O. Lines, dedicate C.O. Lines one (1) and two (2) for
Company A, and dedicate C.O. Lines three (3) and four (4) for Company B. Both companies will use
I&M
Inbound Ports one (1) to four (4).
NOTE: If your telephone system does not have CO Line identification, you may simulate CO line
identification. Set up the CO lines to ring into real extensions that are programmed to forward all calls to
Perfect Guest Messaging. On the "Inband Parameters" screen, enter the inband that you would normally
receive from a forwarded extension into the Parameter 190 "CO Call Code". On the Company screen, enter
the extension number of this forwarded extension in the C.O. Lines field. E.g. Extension 123 is to be used to
identify a call for Company A. The code sent by the telephone to Perfect Guest Messaging is 99E. In
parameter 190, enter 99E. On the company screen, in the C.O. Lines field, enter From: 123 and To: 123.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
13
Inbound Ports
This field identifies the number of ports the system uses to receive incoming calls.
All Company Configurations: Enter the number of ports that the system uses to receive incoming calls in this
field. For example, if you have a four port system, enter one (1) and four (4) in the From and To fields
respectively.
Alternate Method of Multiple Company Configuration
Many telephone systems do not provide C.O Line identification; however, it is still possible to configure the
system with multiple companies by assigning a specific voice port to a particular company. All calls received by
this port will be answered by that particular company's greeting.
NOTE: This method dedicates your voice ports directly to each company. The number of possible companies is
limited to the number of voice cards that fit in the system.
Special Considerations:
When using this method, the system must be able to access at least one voice port to perform several tasks. The
most common of these tasks is Message Waiting Indication. When a message is received or retrieved, an inband
code is sent to the telephone system that activates/deactivates an extension's message waiting indicator.
It is best to dedicate the last port for all notification functions. Do NOT assign this port to a company.
Port Assignment:
You must assign the port numbers for each company to answer. For example, if you have three companies
sharing a 4 port system, you should dedicate port one to company A, port two to company B, and port three to
company C. Port four should be dedicated to Message Notification.
?
To assign these values on company A, enter 1 in the `To" and "From" fields. For company B, enter 2 in the
same fields, and enter 3 for the company C.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

14
Database Configuration
Company: Business Hours Tab
This designates your company's office hours. These business hours are used in conjunction with the Greeting
Times to play the appropriate greeting. To select the desired business hours, use the <TAB> key and move the
cursor to the intended box or click on the desired box. The time must be in military format (i.e. - 5:00 PM is 1700
hours). Input the four (4) digit start and stop time for each day of the week to indicate your regular business
hours.
For example, suppose the normal business hours are 8:30 AM to 5:30 PM, Monday through Friday. You would
enter Monday (From): 0830 (To): 1730. To enter the same times for the rest of the week, press [Tab] down
through Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday. The information you entered for Monday is automatically
entered for those days. Leave the From and To fields for Saturday and Sunday blank. When these fields are left
blank, the system remains in closed mode (which was the last event on Friday) until the next scheduled event
(open mode) occurs on Monday morning.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
15
Company: Single Digit Options Tab
"Single digit options" is used in conjunction with the company greetings to allow callers to transfer to a desired
department or individual by dialing only a single digit (1 through 9). For example, the company greeting might
say, "Good morning, you have reached ABC company...for the sales department press one (1)...for technical
support press two (2)." In the single digit option field, enter the appropriate mailbox number. If the sales
department is Mailbox 101 and technical support is 102, you would enter 101 in single digit number one (1) and
enter 102 in single digit number two (2) and so on. If you do not wish to use this function, leave these fields
blank.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

16
Database Configuration
Special Single Digit Option Values
There are four special values that may be entered in the single digit options fields to offer additional options to
callers. NOTE: Some telephone systems may have predefined features programmed to the #
and *
keys.
*
The asterisk may be entered in any of the nine single digit options fields to allow access
to Directory Assistance. By default, the directory may be accessed by pressing the
asterisk during the main company greeting. For example, if the asterisk is entered in
single digit options field 9, a caller may then access the directory by dialing 9 from the
main greeting.
#E
"#E" may be entered in any of the nine single digit options fields to allow Users to
]
access their mailboxes. By default, when a caller reaches the main company greeting
and presses # followed by an extension number, they are prompted to enter a password
to access that mailbox. For example, if #E is entered in single digit options field 8, a
User may access his or her mailbox by entering <8> + the extension number.
#E#
"#E#" may be entered in any of the nine single digit options fields to allow callers to be
transferred directly to the personal greeting of any mailbox. By default, when a caller
reaches the main company greeting and presses: # an extension number #, he or she
is transferred directly to the personal greeting of that User's mailbox. For example, if
#E# is entered in single digit options field 7, a User may transfer directly to a mailbox
greeting by entering <7> + the extension number.
?
FAX
"FAX" may be entered in any of the nine single digit options fields to allow callers to
send a fax to a User. The caller will be prompted to enter the extension of the person to
send the fax to. (The system must be configured for fax mail.)
NOTE: Please ensure that the Single digit number that you assign to these special keys is NOT the same as
the first digit of any mailbox. This exception is only for these special key assignments.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
17
Company: Greetings Tab
The Greetings Tab is very important. It is responsible for playing your company greetings. Two steps are required
to set up the greetings.
1. The company greetings must be recorded. Refer to "Performing System Administration with the Telephone
Keypad" for details. You may record the company greetings after you complete the settings on this screen.
2. Enter the prompt number of each system salutation for each time of day. If you recorded your morning
prompt: "Good morning, you have reached ABC company..." as prompt number 001, this prompt number
must be entered in the Morning field. Enter the correct prompt number for each time of day (Morning,
Afternoon, Evening, and Closed).
NOTE: The Morning Greeting plays from midnight until noon, the Afternoon Greeting plays from noon until six
(6) PM, and the Evening Greeting plays from six (6) PM until midnight. The Closed Greeting plays whenever the
?
Business Hours indicate that the company is closed. Also note, if your company is only open until five (5) PM, the
Evening Greeting is never played.
To change the Evening Greeting time, you must edit the PERFECT.INI file.
Start With Voice Menu
You may specify the voice menu for this company. If multiple schedules are required, refer to "Creating
Menu Schedules" later in this section.
NOTE: Single digit options do not apply when a voice menu is active. If a voice menu is specified, it
overrides the single digit options.
I&M
IMPORTANT: You may only specify a prompt number or a voice menu. Do not enter both for the same
field.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

18
Database Configuration
6
Mailbox Classes of Service
A Class of Service defines features and functions for mailboxes assigned to a specific Class of Service. Features
include recording limits, message expiration, notification, transfer supervision, transfer options, and mailbox
options.
To Access:
· From the Main Menu, select Classes
?
· You may view, add, delete, or edit Classes of Service. The system may have been shipped with some
Classes of Service already set up. Click the First, Prev, Next, and Last buttons to view Classes of Service.
· Select the options you wish to activate for this Class of Service. Always click the "Save" button before
exiting any screen.
I&M
IMPORTANT: When you delete a Class of Service, the mailboxes associated with it are re-assigned to
Class of Service 1.
NOTE: Once the features have been selected in the Class of Service, Users have the option to enable or disable
many of these features. These include Call Screening, Call Queuing, Call Blocking, Pre-Transfer Paging, Post-
Transfer Paging, Login/Logout, Call Forwarding, Notification, and Message Forwarding. These settings may
be changed by the User when he or she calls into their mailbox and accesses the "Options" menu. The System
Administrator may activate features for individual Users and not allow them to disable these features. To do
this, enable the feature on the User's status screen but disable the feature in the Class of Service.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
19
Class of Service: Storage Field Descriptions
This section of the Mailbox Class of Service screen assigns storage limitations for each User associated with this
Class of Service. For example, the System Administrator may limit the number of new and saved messages
allowed, the length of a message, and the number of days a message can be saved for a given mailbox.
Max Messages
This field specifies the maximum number of messages (including new, saved, and messages deleted that day)
that is allowed for the mailboxes associated with this Class of Service. The maximum messages value should
be based on the needs of the User(s). It is a good idea to allow more than enough message storage space for
each User to ensure that no messages get lost because a mailbox is too full. NOTE: Every ten megabytes of
hard drive space is equal to one hour of voice message storage.
Max. Msg Length
This field determines the length of time that a caller is allowed to record a voice message. This number is
specified in seconds. This value should be set higher than the anticipated message length to ensure that
callers are not disconnected in the middle of their messages.
Max Greeting Length
This field specifies the maximum number of seconds that a mailbox greeting may be. Typically the default
(180 seconds) is sufficient for most applications but if there is a mailbox that provides lengthy information to
callers, this time may need to be increased.
Days to Save New Messages
This field specifies the number of days to save new messages. Messages that have not been tagged by the
User as "Saved" remain on the system for the period of time specified in this field.
Days to Save Old Messages
This field specifies the number of days to save old messages. Messages that have been tagged by the User as
"Saved" remain on the system for the period of time specified in this field.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

20
Database Configuration
Class of Service: Notification Field Descriptions
This section of the Mailbox Class of Service screen dictates what notification features are allowed for this
Class of Service. They include turning on message-waiting lights, allowing beeper notification, allowing
telephone notification, and limiting access to toll lines for long-distance notification.
Message Lights
This field activates or deactivates message lights or LCD screens after a message has been sent to a mailbox.
Activate this feature for message waiting lights.
NOTE: If you have some telephone sets that provide for message waiting lights and some that do not, make
sure that separate Classes of Service are assigned for each type of set. Deactivate this field for the Class of
Service that does not support message-waiting lights.
If you have any mailboxes that do not have a corresponding telephone extension (i.e., phantom mailboxes that
are used for voice menus, guest mailboxes, etc.) do not enable this feature because there are not message
lights to activate.
Light On Code
This field contains the code used to activate the message waiting lights on the telephone set. If this field is
left blank (default), the Perfect Guest Messaging system uses the code contained in the system parameters.
NOTE: If using Centrex SMDI with multiple office codes and four (or fewer) digit mailboxes, the Light On
Code should be 555E!^4 (where 555 is the office code). (The PERFECT.INI file must also be modified for
office codes.)
Light Off Code
This field contains the code used to deactivate the message waiting lights on the telephone set. If this field is
left blank (default), the Perfect Guest Messaging system uses the code contained in the system parameters.
NOTE: If using Centrex SMDI with multiple office codes and four (or fewer) digit mailboxes, the Light On
Code should be 555E!^4 (where 555 is the office code). (The PERFECT.INI file must also be modified for
office codes.)
?
Beeper
Activate this feature to allow the Perfect Guest Messaging system to notify a User via beeper, voice pager, or
alphanumeric pager when a message is recorded in the User's mailbox. For more information about beeper
notification, please refer to "Mailbox: Notification-Set up Outcalling Options for a User".
Outcall
If this field is activated, the Perfect Guest Messaging system notifies a User at a specified telephone number
when a message is recorded in the User's mailbox. If the telephone number is long distance, then the "Long
Distance" box must also be checked to allow long distance dialing.
Long Distance
When this box is activated, the Perfect Guest Messaging system allows long distance telephone numbers to be
dialed for notification.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
21
Class of Service: Transfer Supervision Field Descriptions
This section of the Mailbox Class of Service screen dictates how calls are transferred. Only one transfer option
may be selected for each Class of Service.
None
When "None" is activated, the system transfers calls to extensions without supervising the call (blind
transfer). In this case, a caller being transferred to an extension is placed on hold while the Perfect Guest
Messaging system dials the desired extension. The caller is then released to the telephone system. From this
point, the telephone system controls the call. Calls are forwarded to Perfect Guest Messaging only if the
telephone system has the capability to forward calls on a Busy or a No-Answer condition. If a user activates a
feature that requires supervision, such as screening, the system automatically switches to a Busy/No-Answer
supervision for that user only.
Busy
When "Busy" is activated, the Perfect Guest Messaging system supervises the call while the caller is being
transferred to the extension. If the extension is busy, the system detects the busy tone and the caller is
instructed to leave a voice message. However, if the extension is not busy and a ring signal is heard, the
caller is released to the telephone system. From this point, the telephone system controls the call. Calls are
forwarded to Perfect Guest Messaging only if the telephone system has the capability to forward calls on a
No-Answer condition.
Busy/NA
When "Busy/NA" is activated, the Perfect Guest Messaging system supervises the transfer of calls to the
desired extension. Perfect Guest Messaging checks for both the busy and the no answer conditions and
informs the caller of the options available to them when either situation arises. Using this type of transfer
supervision makes the Perfect Guest Messaging system less efficient because the port being used is not able to
receive any additional calls while Perfect Guest Messaging is supervising the call.
Language
When the Perfect Guest Messaging system is configured with more than one language, the system must
?
remember what language a caller has selected during various types of transfers. In order for Perfect Guest
Messaging to remember, it must be configured to supervise for language. This type of transfer supervision is
similar to the Busy/No-Answer supervision in that the port being supervised is not able to receive any
additional calls while Perfect Guest Messaging is supervising the call.
Class of Service: Transfer Options Field Descriptions
This section of the Mailbox Class of Service screen dictates what transfer options are allowed for each mailbox
Class of Service. To make selections, click in the appropriate box to [X] activate or [ ] deactivate the option.
Call Screening
If this feature is activated, the Perfect Guest Messaging system instructs callers who wish to transfer to an
extension to state their name at the tone. Before the call is transferred, the User hears the caller's name I&M
followed by the system prompt: "To accept the call press 1
, to send the call to another extension,
press w
; to send the caller to your mailbox, press #
." If the User rejects the call, the caller hears a no-
answer message and is given the choice of trying another extension, leaving a voice mail message, or dialing
the operator's extension. If the User redirects the call, he or she presses w
and the destination extension
number, then hangs up to transfer the call.
Call Forwarding
This feature allows a User to have all calls redirected to another extension. If the call is not answered by the
forwarding extension, it is forwarded back to the original User's mailbox. If this feature is activated, the
mailbox number of the User to have calls forwarded to should be entered in the "Forwarding To" field of the
Mailbox Status screen.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

22
Database Configuration
Class of Service: Transfer Options Field Descriptions
Call Blocking
If this feature is activated, callers are forwarded directly into a mailbox without ringing the extension. It is
only available when calls are transferred from the auto attendant.
Busy Hold
When an extension is busy and the "Busy Hold" option is activated, callers are given the option to hold for
the extension, leave a message for that extension, or to try another extension. While on hold, callers may
leave a voice message by pressing *
.
NOTE: This feature is only available on telephone systems that provide a busy tone. Most telephone sets
with multiple extension appearances do not produce a busy tone.
Call Queuing
If this feature is activated, incoming calls are placed in a queue if an extension is busy. Callers are informed
of their position in the hold queue and given opportunities to either continue to hold or leave a voice message.
NOTE: This feature is only available on telephone systems that provide a busy tone. Most multiple telephone
sets do not produce a busy tone.
Forced Messaging
This feature prompts the caller to press any key to leave a message. The mailbox does not automatically
begin recording after the greeting. When a mailbox is associated with a Class of Service with this feature
activated, the caller hears the User's personal greeting and is then prompted to press 5 to leave a message.
This forces the caller to press a digit in order to leave a message. When this feature is activated, it should
help to eliminate short blank messages.
Pre-Paging
If "Pre-Paging" is activated, a User is paged before the call is transferred. When a caller requests an
extension, the caller is put on hold and the Perfect Guest Messaging system pages the User. The system waits
?
for a definable period of time (default is 5 seconds) and transfers the caller to the desired extension.
Post Paging
If "Post-Paging" is activated, the User is paged after call transfer. When a caller transfers to an extension
that is busy or is not answered the caller is forwarded to the User's mailbox. In the User's personal greeting,
he or she can offer callers the predefined option to page them over the telephone intercom system (i.e. "To
page me press 4"). Callers are only informed of the paging feature in the User's personal greeting. The
system does not have a pre-recorded prompt.
Get Caller ID
When this is activated, the User receives a call control pop-up screen when he or she receives an incoming
call.
Local Area Paging
I&M
If "Local Area Paging" is activated, it allows the User to implement local area paging. If a caller chooses to
activate the User's pager, the User may pick up the incoming call from any telephone.
Paging Code
The paging code is only entered in this field if either "Pre-Paging" or "Post Paging" has been activated for
this Class of Service. You may designate different paging zones for different Classes of Service.
Rings
When using Transfer Supervision option "Busy/NA", this is the ring count before forwarding the caller to the
mailbox. Note that the telephone system overrides all systems. If the telephone system is set up to forward
calls after 4 rings, the Rings field must be less than the telephone system value for proper operation.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
23
Class of Service: Mailbox Options Field Descriptions
This section of the Mailbox Class of Service screen lists what options the mailboxes in this Class of Service
receive. To make selections, click in the appropriate box to [X] activate or [ ] deactivate the option.
Distribution List
This option allows Users to send the same message to multiple mailboxes.
Directory
Directory access allows Users to be listed in directory assistance. The dial by name directory is set up in
alphabetic order with respect to the User's last name. Callers may listen to the company directory when they
reach the auto attendant by pressing the *
key. If any particular User does not wish to be listed in the
directory, another Class of Service may be set up with this feature deactivated.
NOTE: All mailboxes are automatically entered into the complete company directory. To remove a name
from the complete company directory, inform the User that they must delete the name prompt recorded in
their own mailbox. Remember that if the name prompt is blank or deleted, any other options that use the
name recording will be affected (paging, distribution lists, forward, etc.)
Confirmation
This option allows you to review the date and time a message was received and the date and time the recipient
listened to the message (for internal Users only).
Auto Login/Logout
When either "Auto Login" or "Auto Logout" is activated, a four-digit field appears. Enter the time in military
format in the four-digit field. For example, if a group of Users always leaves the office at a certain time,
activate "Auto Logout" and specify the time. Callers hear the "Gone Home" greeting of these Users.
Un-Erase Messages
Erased messages may be recovered any time on the same day that they are erased. All erased messages are
permanently deleted during the nightly cleanup of the message database. To un-erase messages(during the
same day that they were erased), the User must access the Perfect Guest Messaging menu and press y
.
?
Login / Logout
All mailboxes may exist in one of two states: "Logged In" which is when the User is in the office and
"Logged Out" which is when the User has left the office for the day. When this field is activated, Users have
the option to either log in or log out. When this feature is deactivated, the mailbox remains in either a Logged
In or a Logged Out state.
Shared Mailbox
This feature changes the way a caller uses Auto Station Login. When this feature is activated and the User
performs an Auto Station Login (i.e. presses a key for message retrieval), Perfect Guest Messaging prompts
for the mailbox number. If this field were not activated, the system would accept the inband extension
number as the mailbox number and ask the User to enter their password. This feature allows Installers to set-
up scenarios with more than one mailbox associated to one extension number. It can also make it easier forI&M
the receptionist to transfer callers directly into Users' mailboxes.
Confirm Delete
When this is activated, Users are prompted to press o
to confirm deletion of a message. This helps to
prevent accidental deletion of important messages.
NOTE: If "Un-Erase Messages" is activated, any message that is erased may be un-erased during the same
day. You should only have "Confirm Delete" or "Message Recovery" activated for all Users. Both are not
necessary.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

24
Database Configuration
Class of Service: Mailbox Options Field Descriptions
Administrator
If the mailbox User is a System Administrator, this field must be checked. A System Administrator has
access to many functions, including the ability to create, edit, and delete mailboxes, and to record system and
personal prompts. When this feature is active, Users associated with this Class of Service may access the
System Administrator menu by logging into their mailbox and pressing *
.
Record Conversation
This feature allows Users to record a telephone conversation. The feature is selected from the Caller ID
screen before the User takes the call.
Forced Tutorial
If selected, a User belonging to this Class of Service will not be able to pick up messages until he or she
completes the tutorial.
Net Popup
If selected, Users belonging to this Class of Service can send LAN and LAP pop-up text messages to other
Users on the network who are also configured for Net Popup.
Multilingual
This feature allows Users to record personal greetings in more than one language. The User is prompted to
select the language.
Guest Mailbox
If this field is activated, Users belonging to a Class of Service hears a simplified message menu. New
messages play automatically. The simplified menu is as follows: 1 to listen to new messages, 2 to listen to
saved messages, 3 to send a new message, 4 to record personal greeting, 5 to record name, 6 to change
password, and 0 to back out.
Hide on Send List
?
If selected, Users belonging to this Class of Service are not displayed in the "send" list on the desktop
interface.
Mailbox Language
This field specifies the default language Users hear when picking up messages.
Caller Language
This field specifies the default language that the caller is greeted with if he or she does not choose a language
at the automated attendant.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
25
7
Mailboxes
This section describes how to create, delete, and edit mailboxes. It also includes a detailed description of Mailbox
Configuration.
To Access Mailbox features:
· From the Main Menu, click the Mailbox button
· The below screen appears
Click Reset to delete
greetings and messages
Scroll through mailboxes
for this mailbox.
using these buttons.
When you
make changes
Click the Create
to a mailbox,
button to add
the Exit button
new mailboxes.
becomes a
Cancel button
and a red box
appears.
Click these buttons
to access the
?
User's notification
schedules, class of
service details, or
distribution lists.
I&M
To immediately "go to" a particular mailbox, press the
Ctrl and G key on the keyboard at the same time. Enter
the mailbox number you wish to open and click OK.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

26
Database Configuration
Creating Mailboxes
To create either a single or multiple mailboxes:
· Click on the Create button from the Mailbox menu (or
select Mailbox, then Create from the top line of the Main
Menu).
· Enter the appropriate information on the Create Mailbox
screen.
(See below for more information on each of these fields.
· Click OK to create mailboxes. The greater the number of
mailboxes that you are creating, the longer it takes.
· When mailbox creation has been completed, a warning
screen appears. Press [Enter] when this message appears.
Mailbox Template
You may wish to create a "Typical User" template to copy from. If so, first create a single mailbox with the
specifications you want "typical" Users to have. When you use this mailbox as your template, the following
major features are duplicated throughout the range that is created:
Class of Service
LIFO/FIFO
Tutorial
Auto Forward Mailbox
Operator
Company Name
Department
Auto Forward Delay
Password
Auto Forward Delete or Keep
?
Call Blocking
Screening
Voice Menu
Call Forwarding
Say Date
Voice Menu Name
Queuing/Pre-Paging/Post-paging/Login
Voice Menu Template
The Voice Menu Template may be used to assign an existing voice menu to a range of mailboxes. Choose a
voice menu from the drop-down list.
Lowest Mailbox, Highest Mailbox
Enter the range of mailboxes that you wish to create by entering the lowest mailbox number in the "Lowest
Mailbox" field and the highest number in the "Highest Mailbox" field. To create a single mailbox, simply
enter the same number for both the "Lowest Mailbox" and "Highest Mailbox" fields and click "OK", or you I&M
may leave the "Highest Mailbox" field empty. Mailboxes may be up to 8 digits.
Class of Service
Select a "Class of Service" to associate these mailboxes to and click "OK". If you do not specify a Class of
Service, the mailboxes is assigned to Class of Service 1. There are 99 available Classes of Service.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
27
Deleting or Resetting Mailboxes
There are two ways to "delete" a mailbox deleting and resetting. Both methods have advantages and
disadvantages. Please review these carefully so that you are aware of the differences.
Physically Delete a Mailbox/Keep the Personal greetings
This method physically deletes the mailbox from the database. All greetings (No-Answer, Busy, Gone Home, and
Name) still exist in the GRT directory. This allows you to re-create a corrupted mailbox and not have to re-record
the personal greetings. NOTE: All greetings (*.GRT) and name recording in the GRT directory will be removed
if the corrupted mailbox is not re-created before the Reorg program is run.
To delete an unwanted mailbox from the database:
· Scroll through the mailboxes by using the First, Prev, Next, and Last buttons on the Mailbox screen or
the [Page Up] and [Page Down] keys on your keyboard.
· When you have selected the unwanted mailbox, click the Delete button to remove it from the database.
When this procedure is complete, the Mailbox field displays the next available mailbox number.
Keep the Mailbox/Delete the Greetings and Messages
When you use this method, the mailbox is NOT physically deleted from the database but all greetings (No-
Answer, Busy, Gone Home, and Name recording) are deleted. This allows the old mailbox to be re-initialized for
a new User without having to go to DOS to delete greetings and messages.
To delete the greetings and messages:
· Scroll through the list of mailboxes until the selected mailbox number appears in the Mailbox field.
·
?
Click the Reset button.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

28
Database Configuration
Editing Mailboxes
When you edit a mailbox, you enter information about an individual User such as: Extension, Last Name, First
Name, Password, Company, Department, and Class of Service. In addition, you specify information on the
"Personal Options", "Transfer Options", "Message Forwarding", "Alternate Spelling", "Other Options", and
"LAP Options" tabs.
Extension
This field specifies the actual telephone extension number that Perfect Guest Messaging dials when a call is
dialed through Perfect Guest Messaging. When a mailbox is created, the extension number is set to the same
value as the mailbox number by default. You may enter values that are different from the mailbox number.
For example, Mailbox 100 may be programmed with Extension number 234. When a caller enters Perfect
Guest Messaging and dials mailbox 100, the Perfect Guest Messaging system dials 234 to the telephone
system and rings extension 234.
In addition, it is possible to enter numbers (and characters) in the extension field to have Perfect Guest
Messaging dial out on a Centrex line and have callers transferred via "Central Office" directly to anywhere in
the world. You MUST have Centrex lines in order to be able to transfer a caller through "Central Office"
over the incoming call C.O. Line. For example, in the extension field of mailbox 100: #4518005551212 is
entered. When a caller reaches Perfect Guest Messaging and dials 100 (Caller on a Centrex line), the Perfect
Guest Messaging system dials #45 (to access a C.O. transfer via Centrex) followed by the telephone number.
Since the number is dialed over the same Centrex line, BELL makes the transfer at the C.O. Perfect Guest
Messaging is then dropped from the loop and all ports are free to receive incoming calls. If you do not wish
for Perfect Guest Messaging to dial an extension (possibly because there is no telephone at a particular
extension), you must enable Do-Not-Disturb on the mailbox status screen.
NOTE: This is the only place that the actual extension number is used. All other fields or prompts that ask
for extensions are referring to the Perfect Guest Messaging mailbox number. If the mailbox is not associated
with an actual extension, be sure that the Class of Service for these mailboxes does not have message lights
activated.
?
Last Name
Enter the User's last name in this field. If the User's last name is larger than the visible field, the information
is rolled-over out of sight but it is all stored in memory. When callers use Directory Assistance to transfer to
an extension, Perfect Guest Messaging uses the spelling in this field to identify the User and to transfer the
caller to the appropriate extension. See "Mailbox: Alternate Spelling Tab" in this section.
First Name
Enter the User's first name in this field. Unlike the "Last Name", this information is not used by Directory
Assistance.
Password
All mailboxes are created with a default password set to 1111. When the system is logged on using the
Installer's password, the actual password appears in this field. However, for security reason, when the System
Administrator logs on using their password, the field appears as ****. If a User forgets their password, the I&M
System Administrator may re-enter the default password (1111) and allow the User to access their mailbox
and re-enter a new password.
NOTE: Passwords cannot begin with 0 (zero). Passwords should be at least 3 digits long. The maximum
length is 15 digits. If the telephone system has a Hang Up Code (e.g. 999), be sure that no one uses 999 in
their password.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
29
Company
If Perfect Guest Messaging is configured for multiple companies, this field identifies which company this
particular User is associated with. Enter the first eight characters identical to those set up on the particular
Company screen. This allows Perfect Guest Messaging to play the proper Company greeting if a caller
transfers back to the auto attendant. If Perfect Guest Messaging is configured for only a single company,
then this field can be left blank.
(The Company field should be exactly the same as the company name in the company screen, a
space is considered a character.)
Department
This field allows you to differentiate between departments within the company. The System Administrator
only uses this information for reference and reports.
Class of Service
The Class of Service defines the options that are associated with a particular mailbox. The Class of Service
may be any number between 1 and 99.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

30
Database Configuration
Mailbox: Personal Options Tab
Select the "Personal Options" tab to specify the User's personal operator, control whether the time and date stamp
plays after every message, select the message playback order, turn on the new User tutorial, and authorize the User
to use a Windows PC to manage their mailbox.
Personal Operator
This field is optional but if you choose it, a mailbox number is required. This mailbox is recognized as the
operator for this individual. When this feature is activated, a caller gets the individual's personal greeting.
However, when the caller presses zero (0) to transfer to the secretary, he or she is transferred to the mailbox
specified in this field. If this field is left blank, callers pressing zero are transferred to the Day or Night
Operator specified on the Company screen.
Say Date
All messages are tagged with time and date stamp. If this field is set to "Yes", the User hears the time and
date stamp after every message. If set to "No", the time and date stamp does not play. Please note that Users
may still hear the time and date stamp by pressing three on the telephone keypad after listening to a message.
Message Playback
Users may listen to messages in two orders:
?
· FIFO (First In, First Out): FIFO plays the oldest message first and the newest, last.
· LIFO (Last In, Last Out): LIFO plays the newest message first.
Tutorial On
By default, this option is activated when a new mailbox is created. This option helps all new Users initialize
their mailbox by prompting them to enter a new password, record their name prompt, three different personal
greetings and , and enter the first three letters of their first name to be added to the directory. The tutorial
plays the first time the User calls into their mailbox. If the User exits the tutorial before completion, the
System Administrator may reset the option by placing an (X) in the tutorial box on the mailbox screen. The
next time the User accesses the mailbox, the tutorial plays again.
Desktop User
I&M
This option is only selected if you are planning to install the Desktop interface on the desktop computer
associated with this extension.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
31
DID Trunk
If the telephone system sends additional digits other than the User's extension number (such as DID or virtual
trunk numbers), enter the number in this field. This field accepts up to 3 digits between 001 and 255.
Active Greeting
This field specifies which mailbox greeting is playing. When "Default" is selected, the system plays the 3
pre-configured greetings (no-answer, busy, and gone home). If an optional greeting is playing for this
mailbox, the greeting number is in this field.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

32
Database Configuration
Mailbox: Transfer Options Tab
Select the "Transfer Options" tab to display the User's call screening, call queuing, call blocking, pre-transfer
paging, post-transfer paging, logged in, call forwarding, forwarding to, voice menus, and message notify settings.
Call Screening
When this feature is activated, all incoming calls are screened by the system before they are transferred to the
extension. Callers are prompted to state their name after the tone. When the call is transferred to the
extension, the User hears the caller's name and then decides to take the call, transfer it to another extension,
or reject it.
The User has the following choices:
· Press 1
to accept call,
· Press w
to redirect call to another extension, or
· Press #
to send the caller to his or her mailbox.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
33
Call Queuing
If this feature is activated, incoming calls are placed in a queue if an extension is busy. Callers are informed
of their position in the hold queue and given opportunities to either continue to hold or leave a voice message.
The caller has the following options:
· Press 1
to try another extension,
· Press w
to remain on hold,
· Press t
to leave a message, or
· Press *
to exit.
All callers on hold hear a pre-recorded music file (MESS500.VOX) that is included with Perfect Guest
Messaging. You may wish to record your own on-hold messages for your callers to listen to while waiting in
the holding queue. You may use as many or as few on-hold messages as you wish but message 500 MUST
exist.
You have ten (10) available voice files you may use. They are System Prompts numbers 500 to 509.
Remember that system prompt 500 (MESS500.VOX) already exists with one (1) minute of music. If you
record over this file, it will be lost.
Three additional pre-recorded music on-hold files are included with the Perfect Guest Messaging system. The
file names are MUSIC15.VOX (which contains 15 seconds), MUSIC30.VOX (30 seconds), and
MUSIC45.VOX (45 seconds). You may replace MESS500.VOX with one of these files. If you do not wish to
use this option or if any of the message files (501 to 509) are not recorded, callers in the holding queue will
hear message 500.
If you are using multiple messages, you must use consecutive message files (i.e. message 500, 501, 502, etc.).
If you choose to use this option, each successive caller in the holding queue will hear a different message.
The first caller hears message 500, the second caller hears message 501, and so on.
NOTE: This feature is only available on telephone systems that provide a busy tone. Most multiple telephone
?
sets do not produce a busy tone. To use this option, you must record your On-Hold messages. Refer to
"Recording System Prompts and Company Greetings".
Call Blocking
If this feature is activated, all callers are routed directly into the User's voice mailbox. Users may activate
this feature when they do not want to accept any calls at their extension. This option is only available when
the auto attendant makes the transfer.
NOTE: If the mailbox is being used as a Phantom mailbox (the mailbox does not have its own extension on
the telephone system), the Call Blocking feature must be activated to prevent Perfect Guest Messaging from
trying to dial an invalid extension number. Dialing invalid extension numbers causes some PBXs to produce
error messages, take ports out of Service, and even disconnect callers.
I&M
Pre Transfer Page
If Pre-Transfer Page is activated, a User is paged over the telephone intercom before the caller is transferred
to the extension. The caller is put on hold and the system pages the user. The system then waits for a
definable period (default = 5 seconds) and transfers the caller to the desired extension.
Post Transfer Page
If Post Transfer Page is activated, the system pages the User's name after the caller is transferred to the
User's extension and there is no answer. The User must inform the caller, in the no-answer and busy
greetings, to press r
to have the call announced over the intercom. This option is a built-in feature of every
mailbox.
NOTE: This feature must be activated in the Class of Service in order for the User to utilize this option.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

34
Database Configuration
Logged In
When the User activates this feature, the system identifies the User as being present in the office and plays
their "No-Answer" greeting if the telephone is not answered. If the feature is not activated, the system
assumes that the User has left the office for the day and plays the User's "Gone Home" greeting.
Call Forwarding
When this feature is activated, the User's calls are forwarded to another extension. The User may want to use
this feature when away from the office and would like all calls answered by someone who is handling his/her
affairs while absent. This extension number is entered into the "Forwarding To" field below. If the
forwarding extension is not available to receive the call, the Perfect Guest Messaging system sends the caller
to the original mailbox.
Forwarding To:
This field appears when Call Forwarding is activated. It should contain the mailbox number that the User
wishes his/her calls to forward to when call forwarding is activated.
Voice Menu
When this feature is activated, the User's calls are answered with a customized voice menu that offers callers
a variety of choices. Select a voice menu from the drop down list. Refer to "AudioText/Voice Menus" for
features and setup instructions.
Notification
This field determines whether or not to notify the User via the outcalling schedules. It is very important if the
User is utilizing call notification. In order to access the Notification options from the mailbox screen, this
feature must be set to "All"; otherwise, the "Notification" button will be deactivated.
"None"
If "None" is selected, call notification is turned off. The system won't try to notify the
User.
"Urgent Only" The User is notified only for those messages that have been tagged as urgent.
"All"
The User is notified of all new messages via the outcalling schedules.
?
Cascading
If "Cascading" is selected, the system notifies the User via the outcalling schedules for each new message. If
it is not selected, the system notifies the User for the first message. The system will not notify for subsequent
messages until the User checks his or her mailbox for messages.
For example, suppose a User receives a new message at 2:00 PM and has three notification schedules.
Whether or not "Cascading" is selected, the system notifies the User via the schedules. Suppose that the User
does not check his or her messages, and, at 3:00 PM, he or she receives another message. If "Cascading" is
selected, the system notifies the User of the second message. If "Cascading" is not selected, the system will
not notify the User of any new subsequent messages until the User checks his or her mailbox.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
35
LAP Message Notify
If selected, the system activates the User's LAP pager for new messages. The LAP pager is activated for new
messages even if "Off" (below) is selected.
Local Area Paging
If this option is activated, a caller may choose to activate the User's beeper.
"Before"
If "Before" is selected, the beeper is activated before all incoming calls only. The User
may then pick up the call from any telephone.
"After"
During the User's personal greeting, the caller may dial a digit to activate the User's
beeper. If "After" is selected, a Voice Menu must be created that specifies the digit for
activating the User's pager. The Voice Menu field must also be selected and the Voice
Menu name must be entered on the Transfer Options tab.
"Both"
The beeper is activated before the call is transferred and the caller may activate it after
the transfer from the voice menu.
"Off"
Local Area Paging is not activated for this User.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

36
Database Configuration
Mailbox: Message Forwarding Tab
Select the Message Forwarding tab from the Mailbox menu. Similar to Call Forwarding, Message Forwarding
allows the User to forward messages to another extension. All new messages may be forwarded to another
mailbox after a specified period of time so that calls may be promptly returned. This feature may be used in
conjunction with Call Forwarding.
Forward Messages to:
In this field, enter the mailbox number to have messages forwarded to. If you choose not to use this feature,
simply leave this field blank. Messages may also be forwarded to off-site (AMIS) mailboxes by entering the
mailbox number, star, and the AMIS site number. For example, to forward messages to mailbox 2404 at site
10, you enter 2404*10.
After (HHMM)
In this field, enter the amount of time to wait before forwarding a message. The Time is specified as Hours,
Minutes and must be 4 digits long. For example, 0005 would forward after 5 minutes and 0100 would
forward after 1 hour. A value of 0000 forwards the message immediately.
Delete After Forward
If this field is set to "Yes", after a message has been forwarded, it is deleted. To save the original message,
?
set this field to "No".
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
37
Mailbox: Alternate Spelling Tab
This field allows you to input up to four different alternate spellings for the User's name to be used in the
company directory. Only the first three letters are required for each alternate spelling. The system does not use
the name entered in the "First Name" field for the company directory. You should enter the first three letters of
the User's first name in the alternate spelling field so that callers can use first names as well as last names when
accessing the directory.
When entering alternate spellings in Users' mailboxes, please note the following suggestions. Do not enter the
same spelling for the last name in the alternate spellings. For example, if the User's last name is "Smith", do not
enter "Smi" as an alternate spelling. If you do, when you save the mailbox settings and then return to check the
settings, the "Smi" is deleted. Also, please note that some alternate spellings are actually dialed the same way by
callers. For example, Mike Nike may be a User who wishes to have alternate spellings of his name for the
directory. Because his first and last name are so close, a caller would dial either one the same way: MIK=645 or
NIK=645. Both the "M" and "N" appear on the six key.
NOTE: "Directory" must be an active feature in the Class of Service to utilize alternate spellings.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

38
Database Configuration
Mailbox: Other Options Tab
The Other Options tab is used when the system is configured for MAPI integration and unified messaging. With
MAPI integration, the User can be set up to receive an e-mail notification when he or she receives a new voice or
fax message. The actual voice or fax file may be attached to the e-mail message.
Chris Nicholson
cnicholson@abc.com
E-Mail Options
Username
In this field, enter the User's e-mail name. For example, Chris Nicholson.
E-Mail Address
Enter the User's e-mail address in this field. For example, cnicholson@abc.com.
Send E-Mail with New Messages
If selected, the User will be notified with an e-mail of new voice mail messages.
Attach Voice File to Message
If selected, the voice mail message is sent and attached to the e-mail message. The User will be able to play
the message directly from the e-mail notification through the message player (which converts it to a WAV
format) if he or she is out of the office.
?
Fax Mail Options
Default Fax Number
In this field, enter the default fax number for this User. If this field is left blank, the system uses the number
entered in the fax parameters.
Send E-Mail with New Faxes
If selected, the User will be notified with an e-mail of new fax messages.
Attach Fax File to Message
If selected, the fax message is converted to a .dcx file and attached to the e-mail message. The User will be
able to print the message directly from the e-mail notification if he or she is out of the office.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
39
Mailbox: Other Options Tab (continued)
Scheduling Options for Fax and E-Mail
Apply Schedule
If selected, a global e-mail schedule may be assigned to this User. (This overrides the Schedule button. If you
wish to set up an individual schedule, click the Schedule button.) The schedule applies to both e-mail and
fax messages. For more information on setting up global e-mail schedules, refer to "Creating Menu
Schedules" later in this section.
Schedule
Use this button to assign a personal schedule to this User. This button displays
this screen which allows you to specify the days you want to receive e-mail
notification of voice and/or fax mail messages. If the Voice or Fax File is
attached to the message, you may also specify whether or not to delete the
messages from the server. NOTE: If you choose to delete the message after
send from the Schedule screen, the message is deleted from the Perfect Guest
Messaging system. In order to keep a copy of the message, you must select
Attach Voice File to Message or Attach Fax File to Message.
NOTE: Global and personal schedules apply to both fax and e-mail messages. Keep in mind that if you
choose to send an e-mail notification for new voice or fax messages and the schedule specifies to delete the
message after sending the e-mail notification, you must attach the actual voice or fax file to the message to
be able to access it.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

40
Database Configuration
Mailbox: LAP Options Tab
Local Area Paging Code
In this field, enter the capcode located on the User's pager.
Pager Baud Rate
Specify the correct baud rate of the User's pager.
Pager Type
Indicate the type of pager for the User.
Refer to "Local Area Paging" in the Optional Applications section for more information on implementing
L.A.P.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
41
Mailbox: Notification Set up Outcalling Options For a User
When a message is left in a mailbox, Perfect Guest Messaging uses the information from this screen to notify the
User. There are ten different calling schedules (0 9), all or none of which can be used for each mailbox. The
system starts with schedule number zero (0).
Select Edit-Notification or the Notification button from the Mailbox menu. The "Outcalling Schedules" screen
appears which enables you to set up outcalling options for an individual User's mailbox.
Schedule
?
There are ten schedules numbered from 0 to 9. Zero (0) has the highest priority and is called first, nine has
the least priority and is contacted last.
NOTE: The very first notification schedule MUST be zero. If this schedule is empty, the Perfect Guest
Messaging system does not look for any other schedule.
Beeper/Phone
Select beeper or telephone. This option determines how Perfect Guest Messaging calls a User when they
have a message. When the notification schedule is configured to call the User on a beeper, the Perfect Guest
Messaging system dials the entered telephone number, including pauses. When the time out occurs, the
Perfect Guest Messaging system sends the voice or DTMF message (see "Phone Number" below for special
dialing options). When the notification schedule is scheduled to call you on a telephone, the Perfect Guest
Messaging system dials the number the same way as for the beeper notification. When the Perfect Guest I&M
Messaging system receives a connect signal, it asks the User to enter a password. When the correct password
is entered, it plays the mailbox main menu which informs the User of new and saved messages and gives all
of the same mailbox options as the User would receive if he or she were picking up messages from inside the
office.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

42
Database Configuration
# (Phone Number)
This field contains the telephone number that the Perfect Guest Messaging system dials to notify Users.
Simply enter the phone number, including ones and area codes if necessary, with no hyphens (-) or spaces
between the numbers. It is not necessary to add the code to secure an outside line (i.e,. 9).
Standard Beeper: If a Standard Beeper is used, it may be necessary to add a few delays or pauses (,)
after the telephone number to allow time for the paging service to play their greeting before the Perfect
Guest Messaging system sends the notification message (e.g. 18645551212,,,,). This example allows
approximately eight seconds for the paging company's greeting to play before sending the message.
Alphanumeric Pager: If an alphanumeric pager is used, callers may leave their telephone number,
which will be sent to the pager. In order to have the telephone number sent, enter E after the pager
number and commas. The mailbox number and number of new messages is displayed on the pager.
Voice Pager: If a voice pager is used, messages may be sent directly to the pager. In order to have
messages sent to the pager, enter the letter M after the telephone number and commas (e.g.
18645551212,,,,M). NOTE: For this option, timing is extremely important. You may have to adjust the
number of pauses until you find the appropriate setting.
Day - Start/End:
This field identifies when the calling schedule is valid. The values for the "Day" may be entered two ways:
Enter as calendar dates (i.e. January 1 to December 31 is entered as 0101 to 1231).
Enter as days of the week (i.e. Monday to Friday is entered as *100 to *500). Monday is considered the first
day of the week (*100) and Sunday is the last (*700). NOTE: The "Start" day must be "lower" than the
"End" day. For example, do not enter *600 to *200.
Time - Start/End
This field identifies what times the calling schedule is active. This value is entered in military format. For
example, if the User wishes to be notified between 5:00 PM and 10:00PM, the values are entered 1700 and
2200.
?
Busy, No Answer
These values specify how many minutes the Perfect Guest Messaging system waits after receiving a busy or a
no answer before retrying the number. If no value is entered for the "Busy" and "No Answer" fields, the
system defaults to fifteen minutes.
Call it
The Call it field specifies the number of times the system retries notification for this schedule before giving up
and trying the next outcalling schedule.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
43
Mailbox: Distribution Lists
The distribution list screen allows you to view, create, and edit specific distribution lists for the User. Enter the
number of the distribution list you wish to view and press [Enter]. Each User mailbox may hold up to 99
distribution lists.
· Select the Distribution Lists button from the Mailbox menu.
· Use the Prev and Next buttons to scroll through the distribution lists or enter the distribution list number
in the List Number field and press [Tab].
· To add distribution list members, you may enter a mailbox number in the Mailbox field and click the
Add button. If you wish to select a mailbox from the Mailbox Directory, you may click the Add button
first. To delete members, you may enter the mailbox number in the Mailbox field and click Delete or
highlight the unwanted mailbox from the list and click the Delete button.
?
Number
This field contains the distribution list number. Each mailbox may have up to 99 distribution lists
I&M
Mailbox
This is the field where the mailboxes for the distribution lists are added and deleted. To add a new mailbox to
the list, enter the mailbox number in this field and click the "Add" button. The mailbox number appears on
the distribution screen. To delete a mailbox from this list, enter the mailbox number in the "Mailbox" field
and click the "Delete" button. Notice that the unwanted number is now gone from the distribution screen.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

44
Database Configuration
Creating a Broadcast Distribution List
You may create a mailbox(es) to be used as broadcast distribution list(s).
To create a broadcast distribution list:
1. Create a new mailbox.
2. On the Transfer Options tab, select Call Blocking.
3. Click the Distribution Lists tab and create Distribution list number 1.
4. Add all desired mailboxes. NOTE: Be sure not to add the same mailbox number that includes this
distribution list. For example, if you created mailbox 500 in step #1, make sure that it is not listed in
distribution list number 1.
5. Select the Message Forwarding tab. Enter *1 in the "Forward Messages to:" field, 0000 in the "After" field,
and select No for "Delete After Forward".
6. Assign this mailbox to the pre-defined Broadcast Distribution List Class of Service. If your system does not
have a pre-defined Broadcast List Class of Service, create a new Class of Service and set it up to delete
messages after one day.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
45
8
System
The System drop-down menu gives access to many useful accessories. This Section describes these accessories.
These Accessories include:
· The Parameters Screen. System parameters may only be accessed at the Installer level. (Refer to the
Installation section).
· The Trace Screen which is used like a digit grabber to troubleshoot system problems.
· The Commands window allows you to enter a limited number of DOS commands without shutting down
the system.
· The Status screen used to supply information about the current status of Perfect Guest Messaging.
· The Debug screen used to set Perfect Guest Messaging in a debug mode to record all Perfect Guest
Messaging activities. When selected, more information appears on the Status screen.
· The Utilities screen which enables you to run reorg and, with fax services, view the fax form and clear
?
the fax queue .
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

46
Database Configuration
System: Trace
When turned "on" , the trace function allows you to monitor all incoming and inband codes to the Perfect Guest
Messaging system for debugging purposes. While the Trace screen is showing, everything that appears on the
trace screen is logged to a file called TRACE.DAT in the C:\WINVM directory. If the process you are tracing
scrolls through the screen too quickly to read, you may use any text-editing program such as Notepad, or Wordpad
to view the contents of the Trace. Note that the Trace screen should be closed before viewing it. The Reset box
clears the Trace Screen, and deletes the file TRACE.DAT, where all trace activities are logged. The Exit box is
used to exit Trace.
On The right side of the screen you may specify to trace the activities of all ports or individual ports. A Scroll bar
is also available to view the activities that have been previously traced.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
47
System: Commands
Turns on
Debug.
Shuts down
the sytsem.
Enter Command
The "Enter Command" field is an interface between the Perfect Guest Messaging system and the DOS
operating system. It allows you to enter DOS commands without shutting down the Perfect Guest Messaging
system. After entering your desired commands (Date, Drop, Refresh, Start/Stop, Time, Lampon, Lampoff),
click on the Execute Button.
· Date:
Sets the system date. The default is the date set by the operating system.
Syntax: DATE mm-dd-yy
For example:DATE 08-14-97. The date is now set for August 14, 1997.
· Drop:
Terminates line activity on all ports or a specific port. The caller is instantly disconnected. The
port is ready to answer another call.
Syntax: DROP n, where n is the port number.
For example:DROP 2. All communication on port 2 is immediately terminated.
· Refresh:
The Refresh command re-lights or extinguishes message lights for all mailboxes.
Syntax: REFRESH
?
· Start / Stop:
The Start and Stop command puts a certain port in and out of service.
Syntax: STOP n and START n, where n is the port number.
For example:To put port 1 out of service, enter STOP 1
· Time:
Sets the system time.
Syntax: TIME hh:mm, where hh:mm are entered in military format.
For example:TIME 13:45. The time is now set to 1:45 PM.
· LampOn x:
Allows you turn Message indicators on. (X = Extension) For LampOn to operate, the target
mailbox must have at least one new message before the command is executed.
I&M
· LampOff x:
Allows you turn Message indicators off. (X = Extension)
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

48
Database Configuration
Shutdown
When there is a need to exit Perfect Guest Messaging, select the "Shutdown" option from the Commands
Screen. You may shut down immediately (Exit Now) or wait until no ports are active (Wait For end of
Activity). Choosing to wait prevents the system from cutting off callers or possibly corrupting data
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
49
System: Status
The Status Screen shows detailed activity of the startup process.
?
The "Clear Status" button resets the number of calls to zero and clears the activity window on the left.
There are two progress indicator bars below the activity box. These bars indicate the progress of re-indexing
Database files. The first indicator shows the percentage of the current Database that has been re-indexed and the
second indicator shows the total progress.
System: Debug
When Debug is selected, the status screen shows more detailed information. The trace information is written to
I&M
the TRACE.DAT file in the C:\WINVM directory.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

50
Database Configuration
System: Utilities
The Utilities Reorg option displays the status of the reorganization utility.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
51
9
View
Selecting "View" from the main menu provides three or four options:
· The Port Activity screen that shows the activity on each port.
· The Mailbox Status screen which indicates whether a User is logged in
or out of the office.
· The Fax Status screen (if fax is installed).
· Call Routing Tables which allow you to map incoming telephone
numbers through Caller ID or PIN numbers to specific extensions.
View: Port Activity
From the main menu select View, then choose Port Activity. The Port Activity Screen displays each port
numerically and the activity associated with it. It also provides general information on the total calls received,
total transfers, and total messages left on a daily basis. All of this information may be set to zero by clicking the
"Reset Counts" button.
You may highlight each port individually by clicking on the desired port, then click the right mouse button. A
pop-up window appears and you may choose from the following options:
· Trace: This option displays the Trace Screen showing the activity of the selected port.
· Disable: This option disables a port for usage, and is normally utilized for testing purposes.
· Enable: This option enables the port for usage. It works in conjunction with "Disable" command. It is
?
normally utilized for testing purposes.
· Drop: This command drops all activity on the specified port. It is normally utilized for testing purposes.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

52
Database Configuration
View: Mailbox Status
The Mailbox Status Screen provides an easy way to check if a person is logged into their mailbox or not. This
Screen displays the mailbox number, the number of New and Old Messages and the Status (In/Out) of each
individual person associated with the mailbox.
You may select a mailbox by clicking on the desired
mailbox number to highlight it and right-mouse click in
this area. A pop-up menu provides the following options:
· Edit: The Mailbox Screen is displayed which
allows you to edit this particular mailbox.
· Delete: This option removes this particular
mailbox from the system.
· Information: This option provides information on
the mailbox. This information includes the name
of the User associated with this mailbox, their
extension, as well as the Class of Service and the
Company the mailbox is associated with.
To close this screen, select "View" from the top menu bar and click "Mailbox Status". The check mark beside it
disappears.
View: Fax Status
This screen displays the status of faxes.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
53
View: Call Routing Tables
Perfect Guest Messaging allows you to create call routing tables that map callers based on Caller ID or PIN
numbers. Call Routing tables may be associated to a schedule which allows you to route numbers to different
extensions (Caller ID) or submenus (PIN) at different times, on different days. Perfect Guest Messaging checks
the schedule and if the current day and time fall within the valid time frame, the call is routed accordingly. Refer
to "Creating Menu Schedules" later in this section for more information on Menu Schedules.
If you create a Call Routing Table for a Caller ID, when that incoming telephone number is picked up by Caller
ID, Perfect Guest Messaging routes that call directly to the extension you specify in the table. Caller ID mapping
may be done at many different levels:
· By specific 10-digit telephone numbers
· By area code
· By area code and city exchange
Call Routing tables based on a PIN number allow you to route a caller to a sub menu number in any V-Menu.
To access Call Routing Tables:
· From the Main Menu, select View, then choose Call
Routing Tables.
· Type: Caller ID tables are designated as
"ID"and PIN number tables are designated as
"Pin".
· Destination: The destination for Caller ID is an
extension and the destination for a PIN number
?
is a Sub Menu Number.
· Number: The Number for Caller ID is a telephone number and for PIN the number is the PIN
number.
· Schedule: If a schedule is applied to the table, the schedule number is displayed. "No" means that
the table does not have a schedule.
To add a Call Routing Table:
1. Click the Add button from the Call Routing Table screen.
I&M
2. The Add screen appears. For the Applies To: field, specify Caller ID or PIN number. Enter the appropriate
information and click OK.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

54
Database Configuration
Adding a Caller ID Routing Table:
For Caller ID, enter the Mailbox Number and the Phone Number you
wish to route to that mailbox. Caller IDs may be mapped by a specific 10-
digit telephone number, area code or city exchange (see below). You may
enter a name in the Associated Name field or apply a schedule to this
Caller ID routing table.
Mapping by Area Code or City Exchange
You may map telephone numbers to a specific extension by area code or city exchange by entering a
wildcard (*) in the Phone Number field of the "Add" screen.
To map by area code, enter:
864*******
To map by city exchange, enter: 864555****
You may also route all area codes that begin with 8 to a specific extension by entering 8******** or 86 by
entering 86********. Note that you may not enter a wildcard between two real numbers (8*4******).
Once a wildcard is used, all remaining digits must be wildcards.
?
Adding a PIN Number Routing Table:
For a PIN routing table, you must first create the appropriate call routing table and then create the V-Menu(s)
that will include the "Get PIN Number" action as one of the options.
Create the Call Routing Table:
Enter the Pin Number and the sub menu number (Menu Number) that
you wish to route that Pin to. You may enter a name in the Associated
Name field. Select Apply Schedule and enter the schedule number if
you wish to have the PIN number routed differently at certain times.
I&M
(Refer to "Creating Menu Schedules" later in this section for more
information.)
IMPORTANT: You must also create the V-Menu(s) that contain
the sub menu number specified in the call routing table.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
55
Create the V-Menu(s):
In the appropriate V-Menu, specify Get PIN Number as the action for the desired option.
Perform the following:
· Specify and record the Action Prompt. In
the adjacent box, enter the number of retries
the caller will have to enter a correct PIN
number. The action prompt re-plays this
number of times.
· In the box labeled "Invalid", enter a sub
menu number level that the caller will go to
if he or she does not enter a valid PIN
number in the number of attempts allowed.
· Create the appropriate Sub Menu Number
level specified in the call routing table.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

56
Database Configuration
10
Voice Menus
Voice Menus give you the ability to customize company greetings and individual mailboxes to meet special needs.
Menus may be created inside a mailbox from which callers may access options to leave or obtain information.
Company greetings can offer callers the option to transfer themselves to specific departments, leave messages, or
obtain company information such as address, telephone number, fax number, or office hours. By using Voice
Menus, you are able to customize how Perfect Guest Messaging answers and directs callers through the system.
Since voice menus offer so much flexibility, it is impossible to describe all of the possible applications. It is
extremely important that you keep in mind the following:
· Plan the voice menu. Use the Voice Menu Worksheets at the end of this section to design the Voice Menu.
· When recording the prompts, mention all options available to callers.
· Always allow callers to exit at any time or return to a previous menu.
· Test the voice menu thoroughly. Try all options to ensure that everything works as you intended.
To Access:
· From the Main Menu, select V-Menus
· The Enter Menu Name screen appears.
?
I&M
1 - Naming a Voice Menu
Move to the top box on the Voice Menu screen. You may enter the name of a voice menu using standard DOS
form (any name consisting of up to eight (8) characters or numbers). You may name a particular voice menu
using a number (such as 100) or using a name (such as JOHN).
Once you name a Voice Menu, you may use the mouse select a particular Voice Menu file and click on Edit.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
57
2 - Assigning Options on the Voice Menu Entry Form
Listing of
This is the name of
voice menus
the voice menu.
Select Allow
Extension Dialing
Each voice menu
to allow the caller
may have up to 99
to transfer to an
sub menus. These
extension while in
fields specify the
this voice menu.
sub menu number,
Timeout specifies
prompt, and the
the maximum
number of attempts
time, in seconds,
the caller will have
that may elapse
to select a valid
between dialed
option (Retries).
Actions may be
digits for the
assigned to 0-9, * or #.
system to
D specifies the default
recognize the
action. This will occur
digits as an
if the caller does not
extension.
select another option.
Voice Menu Name
The name of the Voice Menu file that you are working with appears in this text box at the top of this screen.
?
Every Voice Menu may have up to ninety-nine sub-menus. This Tree Name appears on every level of this
voice menu.
Use Schedule
If the Voice Menu is being activated according to specific schedule, this box should be checked and the
schedule number should be entered in the box that appears beside it. Use Schedule box only appears on Sub
Menu Number 1 of the V-Menu. For more information on menu schedules, refer to "Creating Menu
Schedules" later in this section.
Allow Extension Dialing
If selected, the caller is able to transfer to an extension while in this voice menu. This is related to the
Timeout field.
I&M
Timeout
This value specifies the number of seconds without a response that may elapse before the default action
occurs. The default value is 3. A value of 0 is not allowed; however, if you wish for the default action to
happen immediately, you may enter -1.
Sub Menu Number
Each Voice Menu file may have up to ninety-nine (99) sub-menus. When in the Sub Menu Number box, you
may either enter a number using the keyboard or use the arrow keys on the keyboard to select from the list of
ninety-nine (99) menus.
NOTE: You MUST begin with Sub Menu Number one (1). Perfect Guest Messaging starts all Voice
Menus with Sub Menu Number one.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

58
Database Configuration
Sub Menu Prompt
This field specifies the prompt that plays when a caller accesses this voice
menu. Select the appropriate Sub Menu Prompt from the drop-down list. If
you select Salutation, you need to enter a 3-digit prompt number. If you
select Optional, you need to enter a 2-digit greeting number.
· Salutation: Salutation prompts are located in the SALUTE directory. This directory includes the
Company Greetings and additional prompt numbers you may record. Enter the prompt number, which
may be any 3-digit number between one and nine hundred and ninety-nine (001-999). Be sure not to
select a number that is already assigned to a Company Greeting.
You must record this prompt the same way that you record your company greetings. See "Recording
System Prompts and Company Greetings" in this manual.
NOTE: Salutation prompts (Company Greetings, Voice Menu prompts, and Voice Menu questions) are
exclusive from other System Prompts. Voice Menu prompts and company greetings are stored in the
same directory (SALUTE) so the prompt numbers that you choose for the voice menus cannot be the
same as the company greetings. Refer to the company menu to see company greeting prompt numbers.
System prompts are stored in a separate directory (WINVM) so you do not have to be concerned with the
prompt numbers assigned to regular system prompts.
· Company: This plays the current company greeting.
· Mailbox: This plays the active greeting of the mailbox that the voice menu is associated with.
· Optional: This plays an optional greeting of the mailbox that the voice menu is associated with. Enter
the 2-digit number (01-99) of the optional mailbox greeting.
· None: No prompt plays.
Sub Menu Retries
?
This specifies the number of attempts that the caller has to select a valid option. If the caller does not select
anything, the system repeats the sub menu prompt the number of retries specified in this field before it
performs the default action.
Action
Actions may be assigned to 0-9, #, or *. An action should also be assigned to D, the default. The default
action occurs if the caller does not select another options. Select the desired action from the drop-down list.
The Action list contains all of the options for the voice menus. These options may be used in a variety of ways
to customize how calls are answered. Some of the actions require additional information to be entered. See
the appropriate action for a list of the additional information required. The actions listed below are explained
fully on the next several pages.
· None
I&M
· Send to Mailbox
· Send to Menu
· Ask Question
· Send to Directory
· Send to Login
· Send to Main Greeting
· Ask for Password
· Disconnect
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
59
· Get Transfer Mailbox
· Send Requested Fax
· Send Predefined Fax
· Send Voice Mail Record Tone
· Send to Voice Mail
· LAP Current Mailbox
· Page Current Mailbox
· Beep Caller Phone Number
· Get Transfer Phone Number
· Record Conversation
· Go to Express Voice Mail
· Get PIN Number
· Get Caller ID Info
Action: Send to Mailbox
Use this option to allow callers to transfer to the
extension associated with this option.
Additional information: Enter a mailbox number in the
box labeled "Mailbox".
Action: Send to Menu
Use this option to transfer callers to another sub menu
level in this voice menu. This option facilitates multi-
level voice menus. Every voice menu can have up to
?
ninety-nine (99) sub-menus.
Additional information: Enter a menu number (1-99)
in
the box labeled "Next Menu".
Action: Ask Question
Use this option to obtain information from callers. When
this option is selected, callers hear a pre-recorded question.
Perfect Guest Messaging stores the response to the question
in the specified mailbox and then transfers the caller to the
next voice menu. To ask several questions, use this action
in the next menu. All answers are joined together and
stored as one message in the specified mailbox.
I&M
Additional information: Enter a mailbox number in the box
labeled "Mailbox". Enter a menu number in the box
labeled "Next Menu". Enter the question prompt
number in the box labeled "Action Question". NOTE:
The Questions, Voice Menu prompts and the
Company Greetings are all stored in the same
directory (SALUTE). Be sure that you do not select a
number already assigned to a Voice Menu prompt or
Company Greeting. Refer to the Company Menu to
see company greeting prompt numbers.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

60
Database Configuration
Action: Send to Directory
This option allows callers to transfer themselves to directory assistance.
Action: Send to Login
This action allows callers to access mailboxes to retrieve and send messages. The caller is asked to enter the
mailbox number to be transferred to and then asked to enter the mailbox password to retrieve messages.
Action: Send to Main Greeting
This action transfers callers to the Company Main Greeting. This option transfers callers back to the point where
they first called the Perfect Guest Messaging system.
Action: Ask for Password
This action restricts access to sensitive areas of the voice
menu. Callers selecting this option must enter correct
password to get to the next menu level.
Additional information: Enter a password in the box
labeled "Password".
Enter a menu number in the box labeled "Next Menu".
NOTE: The caller is given three opportunities to enter a correct password before the system terminates the
connection.
Action: Disconnect
This action allows callers to disconnect from the Perfect Guest Messaging system.
Action: Get Transfer Mailbox
Use this action to allow callers to transfer directly from
?
within the voice menu to a desired extension. When a
caller selects this option from a voice menu, a second
prompt, which must be recorded, should tell callers to
"Enter the extension number of the person that you wish
to speak with." The system then tries to transfer to the
desired extension.
Additional information: Enter the Prompt number in
the box labeled "Action Prompt".
Action: Send Requested Fax (available with fax module)
This action prompts the User to enter the document number of the fax document. The system also prompts the
caller to enter their fax machine number including area code.
I&M
Additional information: Enter a menu number in the box labeled "Next Menu".
Action: Send Predefined Fax (available with fax module)
When you use this action, the system does NOT prompt the User to enter a document number. The system sends
the document number entered on this screen. The system prompts the caller to enter their fax machine number
including area code.
Additional information: Enter a FAX document number.
Enter a mailbox number in the box labeled "Mailbox".
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
61
Action: Send to Voice Mail Record Tone
This action sends the caller directly to the Beep to begin recording a message in the mailbox that the voice menu
is configured on. This option does not play another greeting before the caller hears the beep to begin recording.
Action: Send to Voice Mail
Use this option to play the no-answer greeting or gone home greeting of the mailbox that the voice menu is
configured on. This option plays the greeting and then a trailer message (MESS080.VOX) that informs the caller
to record the message after the tone and to press # when finished for more options.
Action: Lap Current Mailbox
When a caller selects this option, Perfect Guest Messaging activates the User's pager. The User may then pick up
the call from any telephone.
Action: Page Current Mailbox
This option acts just like Post-Transfer Paging. When a caller selects this option, they are placed on hold while
Perfect Guest Messaging makes an intercom page announcement. After paging, the caller is transferred to the
User's extension. If the User does not take the call, the caller is transferred back to voice menu.
Action: Beep Caller Phone Number
This option acts just like Send Beeper Message, an option that is available in all mailboxes. A caller selecting this
option is prompted to enter his/her phone number using the telephone keypad. The DTMF digits that are entered
are then sent to the User's Alphanumeric pager.
NOTE: The User must have an Alphanumeric pager that is configured in the Notification of the User's mailbox.
Action: Get Transfer Phone Number
This action prompts the caller to enter a telephone
number to transfer to.
?
Additional information: Enter the required prefix for
accessing an outside line in the box labeled "Prefix".
Action: Record Conversation
This option is available on PBXs only, and acts like a
barge in conference. If the telephone system does not
offer a "record conversation" option, the option puts the
caller on hold, simulates a conference call with the
specified mailbox, and records the conversation.
Additional information: Enter a mailbox number in
the box labeled "Mailbox".
I&M
Action: Goto Express Voice Mail
This action allows callers to transfer directly to a
mailbox, hear the name recording (not the greeting )
followed by a beep, and leave a message.
Additional information: Enter a mailbox number in
the box labeled "Mailbox". Enter a language number in
the box labeled "Language".
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

62
Database Configuration
Action: Get PIN Number
This action allows callers to enter a PIN number. A
PIN number call routing table must be set up and the
appropriate sub menu or nothing will happen when the
caller enters the PIN number. The call routing table
directs the caller to the sub menu in this voice menu.
Additional information: Enter the prompt number in
the box labeled "Action Prompt". In the adjacent box,
enter the number of retries the caller will have to enter
a
correct PIN number. The action prompt will re-play
this number of times. In the box labeled "Invalid", you
must enter a sub menu number level that the caller will
go to if he or she does not enter a valid PIN number in
the number of attempts allowed.
Action: Get PIN Number
This option prompts the caller to enter their telephone number. The number entered is then displayed as Caller
ID on the User's desktop.
3 - Building Your Voice Menu
Now that you have selected a Voice Menu Name, a Sub Menu Number and a Sub Menu Prompt Number, you may
build your voice menu by assigning actions to the menu. When you are satisfied with the voice menu, click OK.
NOTE: You may setup a voice menu to default to a particular action by placing the action on line D in the voice
menu window.
4 - Assigning a Schedule to the Voice Menu
If the voice menu will be activated based upon a schedule, select "Use Schedule" and enter the schedule number in
?
the field that appears. To view the schedule, select Mailbox -- Menu Schedule from the Main Menu. Refer to
"Creating Menu Schedules -- Voice Menu Schedules" for more information.
5 - Activating Your Voice Menu
The Voice Menu may be activated at either the Mailbox level or the Company level.
Mailbox Level
To activate the voice menu, On the "Transfer
Option Tab" in the Mailbox screen of the
individual mailbox, select the "Voice Menu"
I&M
option. Select the desired voice menu from the
drop-down list.
Company Level
On the Greetings Tab in the Company screen of the individual company, select the "Start with Voice Menu"
option. Click on the drop-down menu and select the name of the voice menu file to use.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
63
NOTE: When the Company starts with a voice menu, the Holidays will only take effect if the Prompt field says
Company. This tells the Voice Menu to use the Prompt defined on the Greetings tab of the Company screen and
to check if the current day is a holiday.
6 - Recording Voice Menu Prompts
Once a voice menu is created and all options desired are added, the prompts and questions must be recorded.
Choosing a Prompt Number:
Salutation prompts (Company Greetings, Voice Menu prompts, and Voice Menu questions) are exclusive from
regular System Prompts. Salutation prompts are stored in the SALUTE directory. The prompt number may be any
3-digit number between one and nine hundred ninety-nine (001-999). However, the SALUTE directory includes
the Company Greetings and additional prompt numbers you may record. Be sure not to select a number that is
already assigned to a Company Greeting or another recording. Refer to the company menu to see company
greeting prompt numbers.
System prompts are stored in a separate directory (WINVM) so you do not have to be concerned with the prompt
numbers assigned to regular system prompts.
Recording the Prompt:
It is recommended that you write a script to ensure that you offer all of the options for every menu. You must
record this prompt the same way that you record your company greetings. See "Recording System Prompts and
Company Greetings" in this manual.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

64
Database Configuration
Voice Menu Worksheets
Voice Menu:
Sub Menu Number:
Sub
Option# -- Action
Password
Next
Mailbox
Action
Sub Menu Prompt 
Menu #
Menu
Question
Prompt Number*
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 -
9 -
0 -
# -
* -
D -
Prompt/Question #____: ________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Voice Menu:
Sub Menu Number:
Sub
Option# -- Action
Password
Next
Mailbox
Action
Sub Menu Prompt 
Menu #
Menu
Question
Prompt Number*
?
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 -
9 -
I&M
0 -
# -
* -
D -
Prompt/Question #____:________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
65
Demonstration Voice Menu
Since voice menus offer so much flexibility, it is impossible to describe all of the possible applications. For the
purpose of simplicity and clarity, the following demonstration shows several useful applications:
NOTE: Plan your voice menu
When recording the prompts, mention all options available to callers.
Always allow callers to exit at any time or return to a previous menu.
Test the voice menu thoroughly. Try all options to ensure that each prompt and action works as you
intended.
Enhancing Direct Department Access
Direct department access may be obtained without the use of Voice Menus by entering the extension of the
particular department in the Single digit field of the Company Screen. However, you may wish to enhance this
function with voice menus for each department, allowing callers to select particular extensions, place orders,
obtain company information, etc.
First, decide what options you wish to give your callers. For this demonstration, we offer the following options:
· Transfer to the Sales Department
· Transfer to Technical Support
· Give company information
We will create "Phantom" mailboxes for the Sales Department (MBX 80) and Company Information (MBX 85) so
that we can create Voice Menus. We will assume that the Technical Support Department has only one employee;
therefore, we will transfer directly to this extension (MBX 30).
These Mailbox numbers may now be entered into the Single digit field of the Company screen.
?
These options must be offered to your callers in the Company Main Greeting (Refer to Recording System Prompts
I&M
and Company Greetings.) This Greeting may be as follows:
Prompt 001: "Thank you for calling the ABC company. To transfer to the sales department press 1; to
transfer to technical support press 2. For company information press three (3); or to speak to
an operator, press zero (0)."
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

66
Database Configuration
Caller Presses 1 to Transfer to the Sales Department
Scenario:
When a caller dials single-digit option 1 from the main greeting, he or she is transferred to mailbox 800. The
Sales Voice Menu is assigned to mailbox 800. The caller hears the following prompt:
"You have reached the sales department. For John Smith press one (1); For Jane Doe press two (2); To place a
sales order press three (3); To return to the Main Greeting press eight (8); To disconnect press nine (9); or to
speak to a live operator press zero (0)."
Options 1 and 2 allow the caller to transfer to one of two salespersons. Option 3 requires that the caller enter the
proper password to place a sales order. The Sub Menu Prompt also informs the caller of the options to return to
the Main Greeting (option 8), disconnect (option 9), or transfer to an operator (option 0).
Create mailbox number 800 (Phantom Sales Mailbox):
· Set Call Blocking to "On".
· Set Voice Menu to "On".
· Enter the Voice Menu name. (The name may
be any alpha-numeric name up to 8-characters
in length. For this example, we use the name
SALES).
· Record the "Name" prompt as "Sales
Department". This prompt is used to inform
callers that they are transferring to the Sales
Department. This "Phantom" mailbox does
not need any Personal Greetings. The other
Personal Greetings are not required because
each voice menu has its own Prompt.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
67
Create Sales Voice Menu:
If callers select option one (1) from the Main Greeting, Perfect Guest Messaging transfers them mailbox 800
which has the Sales Voice Menu assigned to it. Sub Menu Number 1 of the Sales Voice Menu plays the following
Sub Menu Prompt (Salutation 100):
"You have reached the sales department. For John Smith press one (1); For Jane Doe press two (2); To place a
sales order press three (3); To return to the Main Greeting press eight (8); To disconnect press nine (9); or to
speak to a live operator press zero (0)."
Callers have the option to transfer to John Smith mailbox 250 (Option 1) or transfer to Jane Doe mailbox 251
(Option 2). Option 3 prompts the to caller enter the proper password (1234) to place a sales order. If the caller
enters the correct password, he or she is sent to Sub Menu Number 2 of the Sales Voice Menu. Callers may also
return to the Main Greeting (Option 8), disconnect (Option 9), or transfer to an operator (Option 0). If the caller
does nothing, he or she is transferred to the main greeting (Option D).
NOTE: All voice menus must begin with Sub Menu Number 1. The system looks for Sub Menu Number 1
first. It must be there for the system to function properly.
Voice Menu: Sales
Sub Menu Number: 1
Sub
Option# -- Action
Password
Next
Mailbox
Action
Sub Menu Prompt 
Menu #
Menu
Question
Prompt Number*
1
Salutation -- 100
1 - Send to Mailbox
250
2 - Send to Mailbox
251
3 - Ask for Password
1234
2
4 -
5 -
?
6 -
7 -
8 - Send to Main Greeting
9 Disconnect
0 - Send to Mailbox
150
# -
* -
D - Send to Main Greeting
Salutation Prompt 100:
"You have reached the sales department. For John Smith press one (1); For Jane
I&M
Doe press two (2); To place a sales order press three (3); To return to the Main
Greeting press eight (8); To disconnect press nine (9); or to speak to a live
operator press zero (0)."
*Remember that the prompt numbers for voice menus are not exclusive from company greeting prompts. For
example, if your company greeting is prompt number 001, you should choose a different prompt number for the
voice menu.
IMPORTANT: If the caller does nothing, he or she is forwarded to the Main Company Greeting. Every menu
should have an action listed in Default (D). This is a default setting to handle callers that do not enter an option.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

68
Database Configuration
If callers select option three (3) from the Sales Menu Sub Menu Number 1 and they enter the correct password,
they are sent to Sub Menu Number 2. They hear Action Question 101:
"Please say your dealer number and the quantity of `widgets' required. Remember to speak in a clear slow
voice. When you are finished, press the pound (#) key."
The caller's response is recorded and stored in mailbox 200. When the caller has finished recording, he or she is
transferred back to the Main Greeting.
Voice Menu: Sales
Sub Menu Number: 2
Sub
Option# -- Action
Password
Next
Mailbox
Action
Sub Menu Prompt 
Menu #
Menu
Question
Prompt Number*
2
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 Send to Menu
1
9 Disconnect
0 -
# -
* -
D Ask Question
1
200
101
?
Action Question 101: "Please say your dealer number and the quantity of `widgets' required. Remember to
speak in a clear slow voice. When you are finished, press the pound (#) key."
Sub Menu Number two (2) has no prompt number. The question in Default (D) plays instead. This question may
ask the caller to state required information (such as dealer name and quantity).
Asking a Series of Questions:
The "Ask Question" option may be set up to ask a series of questions. After the caller answers each question, he or
she may be sent to the next menu, which asks a question, and so on. All of the caller's answers are joined togetherI&M
and stored in mailbox 20. For simplicity, this example only asks one question.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
69
Caller Presses 3 for Company Information
Scenario:
When a caller dials single-digit option 3 from the main greeting, he or she is transferred to mailbox 850. The
Co_Info Voice Menu is assigned to mailbox 850. The caller hears Salutation Prompt 102:
"The ABC company is located at 9120 Leslie St, Richmond Hill. Our office hours are nine to five, Monday to
Friday. Our FAX number is area code 864-555-1212. To return to the Main Greeting, press eight; to
disconnect, press nine; or to speak to a live operator, press zero."
Create mailbox number 850 (Phantom Company Information Mailbox):
· Set Call Blocking to "On".
· Set Voice Menu to "On".
· Enter the Voice Menu name. (The name may be any alpha-numeric name up to 8-characters in length.
For this demo, we use the name CO_INFO).
· Record the "Name" prompt as "Company Information". Like the "Phantom" Sales mailbox, this
"Phantom" mailbox does not need any Personal Greetings.
Create Company Information Voice Menu:
If callers select option three (3) from the Main Greeting, Perfect Guest Messaging transfers them mailbox 850
which has the Company Information Voice Menu assigned to it. Sub Menu Number 1 of the Company
Information Voice Menu plays the following Sub Menu Prompt (Salutation 102):
"The ABC company is located at 9120 Leslie St, Richmond Hill. Our office hours are nine to five, Monday to
Friday. Our FAX number is area code 864-555-1212. To return to the Main Greeting, press eight; to
disconnect, press nine; or to speak to a live operator, press zero."
Callers may return to the Main Greeting (Option 8), disconnect (Option 9), or transfer to an operator (Option 0).
If the caller does nothing, he or she is transferred to the main greeting (Option D).
?
Voice Menu: Company Information
Sub Menu Number: 1
Sub
Option# -- Action
Password
Next
Mailbox
Action
Sub Menu Prompt 
Menu #
Menu
Question
Prompt Number*
1
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
I&M
5 -
6 -
7 -
8 - Send to Main Greeting
9 - Disconnect
0 - Send to Mailbox
100
# -
* -
D - Send to Main Greeting
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

70
Database Configuration
11
Creating Global Menu Schedules
Menu schedules allow you to create exception tables that can be associated to Company templates, mailbox
templates and regular voice menus. The system allows a company to create up to 99 global schedules. Each
schedule allows you to create up to 10 different exceptions. Each exception can be used for:
· Voice menu Schedules
· E-Mail Schedules
· Caller Routing Table (Caller ID and PIN Number)
Menu schedules may be
accessed from the Main
Menu. Select Mailbox from
the top-line menu and select
Menu Schedules.
?
The Schedule screen appears. As mentioned above,
schedules may be applied to Voice Menus, E-Mail, or
Call Routing Tables. The last column changes
depending on what the schedule applies to. For
Voice Menus, the last column is "Menu Number", E-
Mail - "Delete (Y/N)", and Call Routing Table -
"Destination".
I&M
NOTE: Each schedule number can have only one
function. For example, Schedule 1 can be for a voice
menu or E-mail or Call Routing.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
71
Voice Menu Schedules
Applying Menu Schedules to Voice Menus allows you to allocate exceptions based on day of the week and time of
day. This is illustrated in the following example.
Menu Schedule for Voice menus-Example:
1. First create a Voice Menu. In this voice menu
from Monday to Friday, callers have the option to
leave a message for the User, try the User on their
mobile, or send a fax. NOTE: Click Use Schedule
to map this Voice Menu to a global Menu Schedule
you will create. This Voice Menu is mapped to
Menu Schedule 1.
?
2. Create Menu #2 (the exception menu for this
Voice Menu). Menu Number 2 for the CHRIS
Voice Menu specifies the default action to be to
transfer to a mailbox. This mailbox includes the
outdial code and number of the User's home.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

72
Database Configuration
3. Create the Menu Schedule. On Saturday to Sunday, we want calls to be directly routed to the User's home
between 8 AM and 5 PM. The global Menu Schedule includes an exception schedule for Saturday and
Sunday.
In this example the Menu schedule would be set up to have:
From
To
From
To
Menu
Saturday
Sunday
0800
1700
2
· From the top-line menu bar of the Main Menu,
select Mailbox, select Menu Schedules.
· For "Schedule Applies To:", select Voice Menu.
· Enter the appropriate information in the columns.
This Menu Schedule tells the voice menu
associated to it to use menu number 2 in the voice
menu CHRIS on Saturday and Sunday from 8
AM to 5 PM.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
73
E-Mail Schedules
E-mail schedules may only be used if Perfect Guest Messaging is configured for MAPI integration. You may
create E-Mail schedules to schedule when the system will send voice and fax mail messages to the Users e-mail.
Rather than setting up individual delivery schedules for every User, you may set up global templates and associate
it to individual Users using the "Apply Schedule" option on the Mailbox: Other Options tab.
Menu Schedule for E-Mail -Example:
1. First, create a global e-mail deliver schedule within
the Menu schedule form. We will set up Perfect Guest
Messaging to deliver all voice and fax messages to the
User's e-mail from Monday to Friday, 24 hours a day and
to delete the original message off the Perfect Guest
Messaging system after the e-mail delivery.
· From the top-line menu bar of the Main Menu, select
Mailbox, select Menu Schedules.
· For "Schedule Applies To:", select E-Mail
Schedule. Note that the last column changes from
"Menu Number" for Voice Menus to "Delete (Y/N)"
for E-Mail Schedules.
· Enter the following information in the appropriate
columns:
From
To
From
To
Delete (Y/N)
Monday
Friday 0000
2359
Y
2. Apply the Schedule to the User's mailbox. To assign
the E-Mail schedule to a User's mailbox:
?
· From the Main Menu, select the Mailbox button,
select the Other Options tab.
· Under "E-Mail Options", enter the Username and
E-Mail Address of the User. Select "Send E-Mail
with New Messages". Since we chose to delete the
original message from voice mail in the E-Mail
Schedule, select "Attach Voice File to Message" to
attach it to the e-mail message. Select "Apply
Schedule" to apply the E-Mail Schedule just
created. Since we created Schedule 1, enter 1 in
the box that appears. NOTE: Schedules apply to
I&M
both voice mail and fax mail messages. If you
choose to "Send E-Mail with New Faxes", you
must also attach the fax file to the message in order
to access it, since the schedule specifies to delete
after sending.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

74
Database Configuration
Call Routing Table Schedules
Menu schedules may also be used to create exemptions for the Call Routing tables in Perfect Guest Messaging.
Call Routing Tables may be accessed by selecting "View Call Routing Tables" from the top-line menu bar of the
Main Menu. For more information on how to create a Call Routing Table, refer to "View-Call Routing Tables"
earlier in this section. If Call Routing Tables are used to associate telephone numbers to specific mailboxes or
PIN numbers to specific sub menu numbers, Menu Schedules may be created to allocate exception times when
these numbers will be routed to other specific extensions or sub menu numbers automatically.
Menu Schedule for Call Routing Table-Example:
In this example, we have created a call routing table to route all telephone numbers in the 864 area code to
mailbox 101. We want to route these calls to mailbox 102 Monday through Saturday from 12:00 PM to 1:00 PM.
1. First create a Menu Schedule to apply to the Call Routing
Table.
· From the top-line menu bar of the Main Menu, select
Mailbox, select Menu Schedules.
· For "Schedule Applies To:", select Call Routing Table.
Note that the last column changes from "Menu Number"
for Voice Menus, or "Delete (Y/N)" for E-Mail
Schedules, to "Destination" for Call Routing Tables.
· Enter the following information in the appropriate
columns:
From
To
From
To
Destination
Monday
Saturday
1200
1300
102
?
2. Apply the Menu Schedule to the Call Routing Table for Mailbox 101.
· From the top-line menu bar of the Main Menu, select View, select
Call Routing Tables.
· Select Add to create the Caller ID Routing Table for Mailbox 101.
Enter the Mailbox Number and the Phone Number you wish to
route to mailbox 101. Select "Apply Schedule" and enter 1 since
we created Schedule 1 for this Call Routing Table.
· Click OK.
I&M
NOTE: The Menu Schedule would be similar for a PIN Number Routing Table. However, the "Destination" would
be a different Sub Menu Number rather than a mailbox number.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
75
12
Performing System Administration over
the Telephone
The following section outlines System Administrator functions performed using a telephone keypad. Although
Perfect Guest Messaging is designed with a comprehensive set of system screens, it is also possible to perform
many of the system's administrative functions via a telephone. Prompts guide you through these functions.
NOTE: Make sure you read through this section to familiarize yourself with the remote functions that Perfect
Guest Messaging offers before you use these features.
Accessing the System Administrator Menu
To access the System Administrator menu, perform the following steps:
· Pick up your telephone handset and dial the extension that Perfect Guest Messaging is connected to.
· When you hear the Main Company Greeting, press the #
key.
· Press the *
key.
· Enter the System Administrator Password (Default - 9999) when prompted.
NOTE: You may have multiple System Administrators; however, only one System Administrator may access the
system administrative functions at one time.
The System Administrator Menu
In the System Administrator menu, the following options are available:
Press q
to Configure Mailboxes
?
Press w
to Configure Classes of Service
Press e
for System Parameters
Press r
for System Prompts
Press t
for Company Maintenance
Press o
to Check Faxes
Press p
to Return to the Auto-Attendant
Press *
to Disconnect
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

76
Database Configuration
Create or Delete Mailboxes
Press 1 at the System Administrator's Main Menu to create or delete mailboxes. Once in this menu you are
prompted for the following.
· "Enter the first mailbox." Enter the lowest mailbox number in the list.
· "Enter the last mailbox." Enter the highest mailbox number. To work with a single mailbox, enter the
same mailbox number as the first mailbox. If you make a mistake, press star (*) to return to the previous
menu.
HINT: Creating a range of mailboxes automatically creates sequentially numbered mailboxes. You may
always delete any unwanted mailboxes later.
· "To create the range of mailboxes, press 1; Delete range, press 3."
Press 1 to Create Mailboxes:
If you press 1 to create mailboxes, you are prompted to:
· "Enter the two digit Class of Service for these mailboxes." Enter the mailbox Class of Service
number to describe the features assigned to the mailbox(es) you created. There is a short pause
after you enter this value while the system creates the mailbox(es).
· You receive mailbox creation confirmation and are transferred to the System Administrator
Main Menu.
Press 3 to Delete Mailboxes:
If you press 3 to delete mailboxes, the system prompts you to:
· "To confirm deletion of these mailboxes, press 1, or press star to return to the previous
menu." When you press 1, there is a short pause.
· You receive mailbox deletion confirmation and are transferred to the System Administrator
Main Menu.
?
NOTE: When deleting mailboxes, all prompts, messages, and settings are removed. When Reorg is run
(default time is 3:00 AM), all prompts and messages are permanently removed and cannot be recovered.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
77
Configure Class of Service
Press w
at the System Administrator's Main Menu to review or modify Class of Service settings. Once in this
menu, you receive the following prompts:
· "Enter the two Digit Class of Service number to change; to return to the main menu, press star."
Enter the number of the desired Class of Service.
· "Press 1 to review this Class of Service, press 2 to change." To review the settings for the selected
Class of Service, press 1. To change the settings, press 2.
Press 2 to change:
If you press 2 to modify the Class of Service settings, you are prompted to "Press 1 for yes, press 2 for
no" for each of the following Class of Service settings:
"Allow Message lights"
"Allow Beeper Message Delivery"
"Allow Phone Message Delivery"
"Allow Long Distance Message Delivery"
"Allow Call Screening"
"Allow Call Forwarding"
"Allow Call Blocking"
"Allow Busy Hold"
"Allow Call Queuing"
"Allow Pre-Transfer Paging"
"Allow Post-Transfer Paging"
"Allow Distribution Lists "
?
"Allow Directory Registration"
"Allow Message Confirmation"
"Allow Message Recovery"
"Allow Login/ Logout"
"Allow Access to Administrator Functions"
"Enter Maximum number of messages allowed"
"Enter Maximum message length"
"Enter Maximum days to save message"
"Enter Maximum rings for Call Progress"
I&M
"For No Transfer Supervision, press 1; For Busy Only Supervision, press 2; For Busy No
Answer Supervision, press 3; For Multilingual Supervision, press 4"
"Enter mailbox language number"
· Press * to exit the System Administrator's Main Menu.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

78
Database Configuration
System Parameters
Press e
at the System Administrator's Main Menu to modify the System Parameters. Once in this menu the
following prompts are available:
· "Enter the parameter number, followed by the new value for that parameter. Press pound when
complete." For example, if you wish to change the Extension Length of the mailboxes (Parameter 144)
in the system to two (2), after the prompt press [144] followed by [2] followed by [#].
NOTE: The system does not confirm the entered value. The same prompt is played back after each entry. All
parameters MUST be entered as three (3) digits. Parameter twelve (12) MUST be entered - 012.
The telephone keypad values for the special characters utilized by the telephone system and the Perfect Guest
Messaging system are as follows:
Name Character Phone Code
Flash Hook
&
*1
Pause
,
*2
Extension
E
*3
Sender's Extension
S
*4
C.O.
C
*5
Mailbox
M
*6
Code for Inband
$
*7
Underscore
_
*8
Blank
-
*9
?
Pound
#
*0
Star
*
**
· When you have finished entering the new parameters, press # to return to the System Administrator
Main Menu. Press * to exit the System Administrator Main Menu.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Database Configuration
79
Recording System Prompts and Company Greetings
Pressing r
at the Main Menu gives you the following options.
· "For System Prompts, press 1; For Company Greetings, press 2." The System Prompts are the
prerecorded messages listed in the Appendix. The actual prompt files are located in the WINVM
directory. The Company Greetings are the personal salutations that callers hear when they call your
company (i.e. - Good morning...you have reached the ABC company...) as well as voice menu prompts.
These prompts are located in the SALUTE directory.
Press 1 to Record System Prompts:
When you press 1 to Record System Prompts, you are prompted to:
· "Please enter the three digit system prompt to review." Refer to the Appendix for System
Prompts and their prompt number.
· You now hear the System Prompt you have chosen. When the playback ends, the following
options are available: "To accept, press 1; review press 2; re-record prompt, press 3;exit,
press star (*)."
NOTE: "Record" deletes and replaces the original prompt.
· Press 3 to record. After the tone, begin speaking in a clear, slow voice. When you finish, press #.
· The new prompt automatically plays for your review. When the prompt ends, you are asked to
choose one of the following options:
"To accept press 1; review press 2; re-record press 3; exit, press star (*)".
· If you are satisfied, press 1. If you are not, re-record the prompt by pressing 3.
· If you are satisfied and accept the recording, you are transferred to the System Administrator's
Main Menu.
Press 2 to Record Company Greetings:
?
When you press 2 to Record Company Greetings, you are prompted to:
· "Please enter the three digit Company Greeting to create or review."
NOTE: The Company greetings are prompts set up on the Company Menu. The numbers you use MUST
be entered on the Company Menu in the Greeting Times/Prompts section of the screen. In addition,
·
voice menu prompts are created by pressing 2.
· You now hear the Company Greeting/Voice Menu prompt you chose, if it was previously recorded.
· When the recording ends (if a greeting was previously recorded), you are asked to choose one of the
following: "To accept press 1; review press 2; re-record press 3; exit, press star (*)".
NOTE: "Record" deletes and replaces the old greeting/prompt (if one was recorded).
I&M
· Press 3 to record. After the tone, begin speaking in a clear, slow voice. When you finish, press <#>.
HINT: Try to eliminate all background noise. If possible, use a telephone within your office.
Accessing Perfect Guest Messaging through outside lines may result in additional background noise.
· The new greeting/prompt automatically plays for your review. When it ends, you are prompted to
select one of the following options: "To accept press 1; review press 2; re-record press 3; exit,
press star (*)".
· If you are satisfied, press 1. If you are not, re-record the prompt by pressing 3.
· If you are satisfied, and accept the recording, you are transferred to the System Administrator's Main
Menu.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

80
Database Configuration
Change the Holiday Greeting
Press t
at the System Administrator's Main Menu to change the Holiday Greeting menu. Once in this menu
you are prompted for the following:
· "Please enter the two digit Company number." Enter the number of the company that you wish to
modify.
· "To listen to existing holidays press 1; add a holiday, press 2; delete a holiday press 3; return to
the previous menu press star (*)." Press 1 to review the dates and greeting numbers of existing
holidays on this particular company, press 2 to input a new holiday date and prompt number, and press 3
to remove an existing holiday date and prompt number.
Press 1 to listen to existing holidays:
If any holidays exist, Perfect Guest Messaging plays the date and greeting number of each holiday
assigned to this particular company.
Press 2 to add a holiday:
When you press 2 to add a holiday, you are prompted for the following:
· "Enter the 4 digit Holiday date, Month then Day." For example, Christmas Day (December
25) would be entered 1225.
· "Enter the 3 digit Holiday Salutation." For example, if you wish to use Prompt 10, it would be
entered 010.
NOTE: When adding holidays, please remember that you MUST record the Holiday Salutation. To
record these salutations, please refer to "Recording System Prompts and Company Greetings".
?
Press 3 to delete a holiday:
When you press 3 to delete a holiday, you are be prompted for the following:
· "Enter the 4 digit Holiday date to delete, Month than Day." For example, to remove
Christmas Day (December 25) from the holiday list, enter 1225.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional
Applications
?
I&M

?
I&M

CONTENTS
1 - ENABLING AMIS NETWORKING ............................................................................................. 1
1. Design the Network ........................................................................................................................... 1
2. Enable AMIS Networking With the System Configuration Utility......................................................... 2
3. Adding and Defining AMIS Network Sites .......................................................................................... 3
AMIS Network Sites Worksheet.............................................................................................................. 8
2 - LOCAL AREA PAGING (L.A.P) ................................................................................................ 9
1. Complete the Licensing Agreement ................................................................................................... 9
2. Install the Paging Transmitter ............................................................................................................ 9
3. Enable L.A.P. With the System Configuration Utility ........................................................................ 10
4. Configure L.A.P for Each Mailbox.................................................................................................... 11
Set up User to be Paged for All Incoming Calls ..............................................................................................11
Set up User to be Paged at the Caller's Request--Transfer Call Back to the User's Extension ........................12
Set up User to be Paged at the Caller's Request--Transfer Call to the User's Phantom DN ............................14
3 - UNIFIED MESSAGING VIA E-MAIL ........................................................................................ 16
1. Ensure that Microsoft Messaging is Installed on the Perfect Guest Messaging Server ..................... 17
2. Create an E-Mail Account for Perfect Guest Messaging .................................................................. 17
3. Configure Perfect Guest Messaging to Operate in MAPI Mode Using the Configuration Utility......... 19
4. Configure Client So That It Does Not Save a Copy of Sent Messages ............................................. 20
5. Edit Appropriate Mailboxes for Unified Messaging via E-Mail .......................................................... 20
6. Install the E-Mail Player on Each User's Desktop............................................................................. 20
4 - SETTING UP FAX SERVICES (FAX ON DEMAND & FAX MAIL)........................................... 21
1. Set Up Fax Services Using the System Configuration Utility............................................................ 22
2. Modify Fax Parameters ................................................................................................................... 29
3. Reboot the System .......................................................................................................................... 31
4. Verify that the Fax Argument Has Been Added to the Shortcuts .................................................... 31
?
5 - FAX ON DEMAND................................................................................................................... 32
1. Create the Fax On Demand Voice Menu ......................................................................................... 32
2. Add Fax on Demand Documents to the System............................................................................... 36
Faxing documents to Perfect Guest Messaging ...............................................................................................36
Copying documents to Perfect Guest Messaging .............................................................................................37
6 - FAX MAIL................................................................................................................................ 38
1. Designate a Single-Digit Option for Fax........................................................................................... 38
2. Create a V-Menu for Each Mailbox That Will Use Fax Mail ............................................................. 39
7 - GENERATING REPORTS USING PERFECT REPORTER .................................................... 41
Calls Details Summary ......................................................................................................................... 42
Calls Per Hour...................................................................................................................................... 44
Mailbox Usage ..................................................................................................................................... 44
I&M
Mailbox Information.............................................................................................................................. 45
System Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 46
Classes of Service................................................................................................................................ 47

?
I&M

Optional Applications
1
1
Enabling AMIS Networking
Audio Messaging Interchange Specification, or AMIS, is a series of standards that enables voice messaging
systems produced by different vendors to network or inter-network. Before AMIS, systems from different vendors
could not exchange voice messages. AMIS has two specifications: AMIS-Digital and AMIS-Analog. The Perfect
Guest Messaging system is AMIS-Analog compatible. The AMIS-Analog specification calls for the use of DTMF
tones to convey control information and transmission of the message itself in analog form. This means that the
Perfect Guest Messaging system may be networked to other Perfect Guest Messaging systems and/or other
vendors' voice messaging systems that are also AMIS-Analog compatible. With AMIS networking, Users from
different locations can communicate as if they are all on the same voice mail system.
1. Design the Network
Before you build your network site database, you need to decide which type of network you want to create and
gather information about each site. There are two basic approaches for building your network site database. It is
recommended that you create a controlled network.
Controlled Network: A controlled network is one in which an administrator knows where every site is
located and manually registers all network sites. Under this scenario, each location has a unique site
number and all sites have an identical network site database with regard to the numbering plan. The
advantage to this method is that a single list of site numbers may be distributed to every secondary site
just as you would a phone list.
Open Network: An open network is one in which the network site database is built automatically.
When any AMIS-compatible system calls a site for the first time, during the "handshake", the new site is
added to the local site's network site list. The newly registered sites are added to the list counting
backwards from 999. This means that the system administrator has no control over which site number is
assigned to a newly registered site.
?
Below are steps for creating a controlled network:
· Make a list of your network sites using the AMIS Network Sites worksheet located at the end of this
section. Include site number, name, location, and System ID #.
· Identify access codes from each site to the other sites. Example: It is a long distance call when Oakland
calls London; it is a local call when San Francisco calls Oakland, etc. See below.
Site 1: Oakland

* 1. Oakland
2. London
3. San Francisco
Site 1
Oakland
I&M
Long Distance
Local
Site 3
Site 2
S. Francisco
London
Long Distance
Site 3: San Francisco

Site 2: London

1. Oakland
1. Oakland
2. London
*2. London
* 3. San Francisco
3. San Francisco
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

2
Optional Applications
*Indicates Local Site
2. Enable AMIS Networking With the System Configuration Utility
To implement AMIS Networking, the PERFECT.INI file must be modified. The System Configuration Utility
modifies the PERFECT.INI file for AMIS.
NOTE: The sentinel key must also be enabled for AMIS Networking.
· From the Desktop of Perfect Guest Messaging, Select Start
· Select Programs -- Perfect Guest Messaging System Configuration Utility
· Highlight AMIS Settings
· Click the Modify button
· Set the AMIS Installed setting to Yes
· Set the AMIS Initial Delay setting to 0
· Save the changes and exit
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
3
3. Adding and Defining AMIS Network Sites
· Log on to Perfect Guest Messaging
· Click the Company drop-down menu and select A.M.I.S.
· Fill in the necessary information
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

4
Optional Applications
General Information
Fields listed under General Information refer to the remote AMIS site.
Site Number
This field designates a unique number of this AMIS site. Every network site is assigned a unique number
from 1-999. This is used to reference site records.
Description
This field is a description of the site. Typically, it is the company name of the site.
Location
This field designates where the site is located. Typically, it is the City and State for U.S. locations and City
and Country for international locations.
Site ID Number
This field identifies the system ID number of the remote site. AMIS has strict guidelines on the format of a
system ID. It is composed of three numeric fields using the characters 0-9 and each field is terminated with a
# (pound sign). The maximum length of the System ID Number is 18 characters and the minimum is 3
characters. There are two types of System ID Numbers, public and private.
Public System ID Numbers are for all sites that can be direct dialed using the public telephone network.
These ID numbers are always in the format of ccc#nnn#sssssss#, where the value "ccc" is the international
country code (1-4 digits), the value of "nnn" is the national significant number (area or city code of 0-14
digits) and the value of "sssssss" is a local subscriber number of 0-14 digits. All locations in North America
must use the format of 1#aaa#sssssss# where "aaa" is the area code and "sssssss" is the local telephone
number.
Private System ID Numbers are for all sites that are accessible through a private network or behind a PBX.
These always have the format 0##nnnnnnn# where "nnnnnnn" is a site defined number. The site-defined
number is typically the extension number of the site. The value "nnnnnnn" can be from 0-14 digits.
Callback Number
?
This field defines the dialstring, or number, to be dialed to call this site. This number should include any
necessary access numbers (1 or 011); however, do not include the trunk access code (usually 9,).
Access Codes
This field identifies whether the call is to a private, local, long distance, or international number. The choices
for Access Codes are:
Private Number
Local Number
Long Distance Number
International Number
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
5
AMIS Parameters
Fields listed under AMIS Parameters refer to the local AMIS site.
LoopBack Request ID
This field designates the AMIS loopback test number for this site. For LOCAL sites, this defines the
loopback test for incoming calls from other sites. For example, 987654 may be the loopback request ID.
Admin Message User ID
This field defines the User ID to receive messages that can not be delivered or messages that can not be
returned. The default value for this field is blank. If the field is left blank, then these types of messages are
deleted. This field is only used for LOCAL sites, not for REMOTE sites.
System ID Number
This field identifies a unique string that identifies this site to all other sites that it may ever contact and also
identifies the callback telephone number. AMIS has strict guidelines on the format of a system ID. It is
composed of three numeric fields using the characters 0-9 and each field is terminated with a # (pound sign).
The maximum length of the System ID Number is 18 characters and the minimum is 3 characters. There are
two types of System ID Numbers, public and private.
Public System ID Numbers are for all sites that can be direct dialed using the public telephone network.
These ID numbers are always in the format of ccc#nnn#sssssss#, where the value "ccc" is the international
country code (1-4 digits), the value of "nnn" is the national significant number (area or city code of 0-14
digits) and the value of "sssssss" is a local subscriber number of 0-14 digits. All locations in North America
must use the format of 1#aaa#sssssss# where "aaa" is the area code and "sssssss" is the local telephone
number.
Private System ID Numbers are for all sites that are accessible through a private network or behind a PBX.
These always have the format 0##nnnnnnn# where "nnnnnnn" is a site defined number. The site-defined
number is typically the extension number of the site. The value "nnnnnnn" can be from 0-14 digits.
AutoAdd NEW Sites
If this field is set to Y (YES), sites that are not registered are automatically added to the network database.
?
The Description of auto-added sites shows the date the site was auto-added. The newly-added site takes the
highest available site number.
Digit Timeout: For Send/For Receive
These fields specify the total length of time to wait for all digits before timeout occurs.
Packet Delay: For Send/For Receive
These fields specify the length of time to wait between packets before timeout occurs.
AMIS Options
Journal Sessions?
If this field is checked, then information about this session will is logged to a disk file. Incoming calls are
kept in the file "C:\WINVM\AMIS000.LOG". Outbound calls are kept in the file
I&M
"C:\WINVM\AMISnnn.LOG", where "nnn" is the site number. If this is a local site, then this applies to all
incoming and outbound calls to or from this site. If this is a remote site, then this applies to all outbound
calls to this site. If not checked, then journaling is disabled for this site.
Accept Incoming
If this field is selected, then incoming network calls from any REMOTE site are accepted. If it is not
selected, then calls from any REMOTE site are rejected causing the REMOTE site to return the messages to
the senders.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

6
Optional Applications
Accept Broadcast ID
If this field is selected, then incoming network calls may access public broadcast lists. If it is not selected,
then incoming messages for public broadcast will be rejected.
End Record Any
If this field is selected, then recording of incoming messages will terminate on any DTMF tone. This is an
AMIS compatible value. However, this causes any messages that contain partial DTMF tones to be rejected.
The default is for this field to remain unselected. This causes any DTMF tones other than a valid "*" tone to
be ignored. This field should remain unselected.
Place Outbound
If this field is selected, calls may be placed to this remote site. If it is not selected, calls will not be placed to
this remote site. If not selected, the Send and Forward options in the User Mode menus will not allow the
selection of this remote site as a destination for a message.
Ask for Special
THIS FIELD IS NOT YET IMPLEMENTED. If this field is selected, upon calls placed to this remote site,
Perfect Guest Messaging will verify the version of networking being used on the remote site. If the version is
the same as that of Perfect Guest Messaging, then enhanced AMIS protocol will be used to communicate
between the systems. If it is a different version of networking, then Perfect Guest Messaging will use the
standard version of AMIS to communicate. If calls to this remote site fail, and the site is using a different
version, then unselecting this field will cause Perfect Guest Messaging to only use standard AMIS
networking when communicating with this site.
New Messages to Send
THIS FIELD IS NOT YET IMPLEMENTED. If this field is selected, then network management
automatically checks to see if this site has messages waiting for delivery. Selecting this field forces a re-check
for outbound messages. If this field is not selected, outbound delivery attempts are cancelled until more
messages are queued.
Send Site Name
?
THIS FIELD IS NOT YET IMPLEMENTED. If this field is selected, then the site name is transmitted as
part of the AMIS message. If not selected, then no name is transmitted.
Unlisted Site
THIS FIELD IS NOT YET IMPLEMENTED. This field defines whether this site is listed in the Network
Assistance Menu. Network Assistance is used to assist in selecting a site number and is available in User
Mode when sending or forwarding a message. It is invoked by selecting 0 as the site number. Selecting this
field defines this remote site as unlisted. If the field is unselected, the site is listed.
Consec Fails Stop
THIS FIELD IS NOT YET IMPLEMENTED. This field is used to shutdown outbound calling to this site if
there are too many consecutive failures. When the number of consecutive failures reached this value, then the
field New MSGS to Send? will be set to "N". The consecutive failures count is only reset to zero when the
I&M
called site acknowledges a network call, or when the operator clears the count.
Minimum Recall
THIS FIELD IS NOT YET IMPLEMENTED. This field specifies the number of minutes, which must elapse
before attempting a second, and ensuing, outbound calls to this site. The time between ensuing recalls is
increased by this value with each retry until the number of recalls the value in the Maximum Recall field. For
example, if this field is set to 2, then Perfect Voice attempts a second call 2 minutes after the first, four
minutes after the second, etc. until the number of minutes in the Maximum Recall field is reached. Retries
continue within the value of the Maximum Recall field until the Consecutive Fails Stop value is reached.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
7
Maximum Recall
This field specifies the maximum number of minutes between retries of outbound calls until the value of
Consecutive Fails Stop is reached.
Msg Send Exp Hours
THIS FIELD IS NOT YET IMPLEMENTED. This field defines the expiration time period of messages
waiting to be sent via the network. Any undelivered message that has reached expiration is marked as
expired and non-deliverable and be returned to the sender (or to the LOCAL site operator). Setting this
value too low causes messages to be returned unnecessarily. Setting this value to 0 disablea the expiration
option. The default value for this field is 24 hours.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

8
Optional Applications
AMIS Network Sites Worksheet
Site # Name
Location
System ID #
CallBack Number
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
9
2
Local Area Paging (L.A.P)
This feature allows Users to be paged on a beeper when they receive a call or a new message. L. A. P. can be
especially useful for Users that are often away from their desk or out of range of the operator overhead/PBX page.
Users can pick up the call from any telephone. This section presents the steps needed to install the paging
transmitter system, modify the PERFECT.INI file on the Perfect Guest Messaging system, enable L. A. P. on a
per User basis, and assign the phantom DN to the User's extension.
1. Complete the Licensing Agreement
First, complete the licensing agreement included in the paging transmitting package. The WaveLinks paging
system, when used in the United States, is subject to the rules and regulations of the FCC.
2. Install the Paging Transmitter
Your WaveLinks Computer Controlled Paging System includes a Transmitter Unit, A "Rubber Duck" Antenna, a
Right Angle Antenna Adapter, a PC Adapter, a Power/COM Adapter Cable, and a Power Brick. To install the
paging system, perform the following steps:
1. Attach the "Rubber Duck" antenna to the Transmitter Unit. The Right Angle Antenna Adapter is available
for proper antenna positioning. In normal paging operations, the paging transmitter antenna should be
oriented in a vertical position to maximize the paging range.

NOTE: Do not attempt to operate the paging system without the antenna connected to the paging
transmitter because damage to the paging transmitter may occur.
2. Plug the PC adapter into an available DB9 serial port on the back of the Perfect Guest Messaging system PC.
If the DB9 serial port is not available, you need a DB25 to DB9 adapter, which is available from most
?
computer supply companies.
3. Plug the Power/COM Adapter Cable into the DB9 female connector on the Transmitter Unit.
4. Connect the PC Adapter and the Power/COM Adapter Cable.
5. Connect the Power Brick and the Power/COM Adapter Cable. Plug the Power Brick into a 110 VAC power
outlet. The red colored PWR/BAT LED indicator on the Transmitter Unit should be illuminated when power
is properly applied.
For more details on the paging system, refer to the "On-Site Controlled Paging System Handbook" enclosed with
your transmitter.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

10
Optional Applications
3. Enable L.A.P. With the System Configuration Utility
To implement Local Area Paging (L.A.P.), the PERFECT.INI file must be modified. The System Configuration
Utility modifies the PERFECT.INI file for L.A.P.
NOTE: The sentinel key must also be enabled for L.A.P.
· From the Desktop of Perfect Guest Messaging, Select Start
· Select Programs -- Perfect Guest Messaging System Configuration Utility
· Highlight Local Area Paging
· Click the Modify button
?
When you click the Modify button, a screen similar to this appears.
· Set Integration with LAP to Yes
· Click Configure to edit the Port Settings
When you click Configure, a screen similar to this appears.
I&M
· Set Com Port to 2
· Set Baud Rate to 9600
· Set Data Bits to 8
· Set Parity to None
· Set Stop Bit(s) to 1
· Click OK
· Click OK on the "Local Area Paging" screen
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
11
4. Configure L.A.P for Each Mailbox
Users may be paged for all incoming calls or at the caller's request. If the caller requests that the User be paged,
the call may be transferred back to the User's extension or a phantom DN for pick up.
NOTE: When a mailbox is set up for L.A.P., the beeper is activated for all messages as well as incoming
calls.
IMPORTANT: To allow L.A.P., make sure that the Local Area Paging option is checked in the Mailbox Class
of Service.
Set up User to be Paged for All Incoming Calls
If a User is to be paged for all incoming calls, the capcode, baud rate, and pager type must be completed on the
mailbox LAP Options tab and "Before" must be selected on the Transfer Options tab.
For example, to set up mailbox 270 for L.A.P where the User is paged for all incoming calls:
· Log on to Perfect Guest Messaging.
· Select Mailbox.
· Go to the mailbox 270.
· Select the LAP Options tab and fill in
the necessary information: Local Area
Paging Code (This is the capcode that
is printed on the back of the pager),
?
Pager Baud Rate, and Pager Type.
NOTE: If the capcode contains
leading zeroes, it may not be necessary
to enter them as part of the number.
I&M
· Select the Transfer Options tab. Select "Before" to activate L.A.P. When "Before" is selected, the
beeper is activated before all incoming calls. The User may then pick up the call from any telephone.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

12
Optional Applications
Set up User to be Paged at the Caller's Request--Transfer Call Back to the User's
Extension
If the User is to be paged at the caller's request, a Voice Menu must first be created that specifies the digit for
activating the User's pager. The call is then transferred back to the User's extension for pick up. The capcode,
baud rate, and pager type must be completed on the mailbox LAP Options tab. On the Transfer Options tab,
"After" must be selected, the Voice Menu field must be selected and the Voice Menu name entered.
For example, to set up Mailbox 270 to be paged at the Caller's request and the call transferred back to the User's
extension:
Create Voice Menu for Mailbox 270:
· Log on to Perfect Guest Messaging.
· Select V-Menus.
· Enter a menu name and click Edit.
· The Audiotext Entry screen is displayed.
· Select Mailbox for the Sub Menu Prompt field. This plays the active mailbox greeting.
· Highlight the digit you wish to use to activate
the LAP pager. (In this example, when the
caller presses 1, the User's pager is activated.)
For Action, select "LAP Current Mailbox" and
enter the mailbox number in the Mailbox field.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to assign a default
("D") action.
?
NOTE: Using Voice Menus overrides the built-
in options (1 to try another extension, 2 to
try the extension again, 3 to send a beeper
message, 4 to page over the intercom, * to
disconnect, and # to skip to the beep.) To
make these options available, they must be
specified in the Voice Menu.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
13
Set up Mailbox 270 for LAP:
For example, to set up mailbox 270 for L.A.P, perform the following steps:
· Log on to Perfect Guest Messaging.
· Select Mailbox.
· Go to the mailbox 270.
· Select the LAP Options tab and fill in the
necessary information: Local Area Paging
Code (This is the capcode that is printed on
the back of the pager), Pager Baud Rate,
and Pager Type. NOTE: If the capcode
contains leading zeroes, it may not be
necessary to enter them as part of the
number.
?
· Select the Transfer Options tab. Select
"After" or "Both" to activate L.A.P.
· Activate "Voice Menu" and enter the Voice
Menu Name.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

14
Optional Applications
Set up User to be Paged at the Caller's Request--Transfer Call to the User's Phantom
DN
If the User is to be paged at the caller's request, a Voice Menu must first be created that specifies the digit for
activating the User's pager. The call is then transferred back to the phantom DN for pick up (The Phantom
mailbox must exist on Perfect Guest Messaging). The capcode, baud rate, and pager type must be completed on
the phantom mailbox LAP Options tab. On the phantom mailbox Transfer Options tab, "Before" must be
selected. On the User's main mailbox Transfer Options tab, the Voice Menu field must be selected and the Voice
Menu name entered.
For example, to set up Mailbox 270 to be paged at the Caller's request and the call transferred to the User's
phantom DN (570):
In this example, 570 is the phantom DN for 270.
Create Voice Menu for Mailbox 270:
· Log on to Perfect Guest Messaging.
· Select V-Menus.
· Enter a menu name and click Edit.
· The Audiotext Entry screen is displayed.
· Select Mailbox for the Sub Menu Prompt
field. This plays the active mailbox
greeting.
?
· Highlight the digit you wish to use to
activate the LAP pager. (In this example,
when the caller presses 1, phantom DN
570 rings and the User is paged.) For
Action, select "Send to Mailbox" and
enter the phantom DN in the Mailbox
field.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to assign a
default ("D") action.
NOTE: Using Voice Menus overrides the
built-in options (1 to try another
I&M
extension, 2 to try the extension again, 3
to send a beeper message, 4 to page over
the intercom, * to disconnect, and # to
skip to the beep.) To make these options
available, they must be specified in the
Voice Menu.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
15
Set up Mailbox 570 for LAP:
For example, to set up mailbox 570 for L.A.P, perform the following steps:
· Log on to Perfect Guest Messaging.
· Select Mailbox.
· Go to the mailbox 570.
· Select the LAP Options tab and fill in the
necessary information: Local Area Paging Code
(This is the capcode that is printed on the back of
the pager), Pager Baud Rate, and Pager Type.
·
Other
Select the Transfer Options tab. Select "Before"
Options
to activate L.A.P.
?
Set up Mailbox 270 for LAP with Phantom 570:
· Select the Transfer Options tab. Select "Off".
Activate "Voice Menus" and enter the Voice
Other
Options
Menu name.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

16
Optional Applications
3
Unified Messaging Via E-Mail
Unified Messaging Via E-Mail allows Users to access voice, fax, and e-mail messages from one mailbox. When
Perfect Guest Messaging is used with Microsoft Outlook/Exchange or any MAPI compliant server, Users may
access e-mail, voice mail, and fax mail concurrently they no longer have to access different programs for
different forms of messaging. Users may then forward these messages to anyone over the Internet. Messaging
Application Programming Interface (MAPI) is a standard created by Microsoft that allows MAPI-compliant
applications to communicate with each other. When configured for MAPI, Perfect Guest Messaging may
communicate with any MAPI-compliant messaging system.
NOTE: The User's PC must have a soundboard and speakers so that he or she may listen to voice messages from
the inbox. One of the E-mail players must also be installed on the User's desktop.
Generic MAPI Player Versus Outlook Player
There are two types of MAPI available. Each type requires a different MAPI player:
1. Generic MAPI Player: This option requires the MAPI Integration license. It provides "one-way" MAPI
integration. In other words, it sends a voice or fax message from the User's voice mailbox to the specified
e-mail address. Replying to a voice or fax mail message from e-mail works differently than replying to a
message from the Desktop Interface Messages screen or over the telephone. From Outlook, you can't reply
directly to the sender of the message. To send a response from Outlook, it is necessary to create a new e-
mail message. Deleting a message from the e-mail box doesn't automatically delete it from the voice mail
?
system.
2. Outlook Player: This option requires Microsoft Outlook and Exchange server. It also requires the MAPI
Integration license as well as a Desktop Interface license for each User. It allows Users to respond to
messages from Outlook. The User may reply to messages from Outlook as well as record new messages
and forward messages. In addition, when the User deletes a message from Outlook, it is deleted from the
voice mail system as well. (If the User deletes a message from the voice mailbox, it is not deleted from
Outlook.)
In order to configure Perfect Guest Messaging for MAPI integration and Unified Messaging Via E-Mail, you
should perform the following steps.
I&M
1. Ensure that the appropriate e-mail client is installed. The system is shipped pre-configured with Microsoft
Messaging. If this is not what you are using, you need to install the correct e-mail client.
2. Create an e-mail account for Perfect Guest Messaging on the e-mail server.
3. Configure Perfect Guest Messaging to operate in MAPI mode.
4. Setup the client to not save a copy of sent messages.
5. On the Perfect Guest Messaging server, edit the Other Options tab for the appropriate mailboxes.
6. Install the E-Mail player on each User's desktop.
IMPORTANT: To configure Perfect Guest Messaging for MAPI integration, you need
the assistance of the site's Network Administrator or IS Consultant. Ensure that the
Network Administrator or consultant is available BEFORE setting up MAPI and before
calling Technical Support.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
17
NOTE: Below is an example of how to configure Perfect Guest Messaging
for MAPI integration using Microsoft Exchange/Outlook.
1. Ensure that Microsoft Messaging is Installed on the Perfect Guest
Messaging Server
1. Go to the system Control Panel and select Add/Remove Programs.
2. Select the Windows Setup tab. Verify that the Microsoft
Outlook/Exchange item has been selected.
After this has been verified, the next step is to make sure that the proper settings are entered for
Outlook/Exchange to work.
2. Create an E-Mail Account for Perfect Guest Messaging
1. From the Control Panel, select Mail.
2. Select Microsoft Mail
NOTE: You may have to load the protocol
that the mail server is using and configure
?
Perfect Guest Messaging to log into the mail
server for certain MAPI applications.
3. Click on Properties.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

18
Optional Applications
4. Enter the necessary information about the system
Mail Post Office. If there is no Post Office in place,
you need to create a Post Office (there is a selection
for this in the Control Panel) and enter everyone's
name in it.
NOTE: If there is going to be a Network Manager for
the Post Office, the Post Office should be created from
the Network Manager's computer, since all changes to
the Post Office must be done by the person who
created it.
5. Once the Post Office has been identified, enter the mailbox
name for the Perfect Guest Messaging server, and also enter
the password, if any. Passwords are not required for the Mail
server to function. Make sure that you select to have the
password automatically entered. Failure to do so will result
in a Window asking for a Password when Perfect Guest
Messaging is started. This prevents Perfect Guest Messaging
?
from restarting automatically when unattended.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
19
3. Configure Perfect Guest Messaging to Operate in MAPI Mode Using
the System Configuration Utility
The System Configuration Utility modifies the PERFECT.INI file for MAPI.
NOTE: The sentinel key must also be enabled for MAPI.
· From the Desktop of Perfect Guest Messaging, Select Start
· Select Programs -- Perfect Guest Messaging System Configuration Utility
· Highlight MAPI Information
· Click the Modify button
NOTE: This step is the same for all e-mail clients.
?
A screen similar to this appears. Select the desired settings, then
click OK.
· Name: Indicates the User Name. The Username must match
what was created on the e-mail server during the previous step.
·
I&M
Password: Indicates the password for MAPI. The password
must match what was created on the e-mail server during the
previous step.
· Profile: Indicates the User profile (usually the same as User
Name).
· Mode: Indicates MAPI mode.
· MAPI Integration: Indicates whether or not MAPI (Unified
Messaging) is installed.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

20
Optional Applications
4. Configure Client So That It Does Not Save a Copy of Sent Messages
5. Edit Appropriate Mailboxes for Unified Messaging via E-Mail
Set up the appropriate mailboxes for Unified
Messaging via E-Mail. Once Perfect Guest
Messaging has been started, edit the Other
Options tab for the appropriate mailbox. Refer to
"Mailbox: Other Options Tab" in the Database
Configuration section for more information on
these fields.
NOTE: If you choose to delete the message after
send from the Schedule screen, the message is
deleted from the Perfect Guest Messaging
system. In order to keep a copy of the message,
you must select Attach Voice File to Message or
Attach Fax File to Message.
6. Install the E-Mail Player on Each User's Desktop
?
The E-Mail player allows Users to play an attached voice mail message from their e-mail mailbox.
Windows 3.11 Installation:
1. Turn on the computer and start Windows.
2. From the Windows Program Manager, select Run from the File menu. A dialog box appears.
3. In the Command Line field, type X:\\pvoffice\vm\install\E-Mail Player\select directory*\setup.exe (where
X is the network drive for the Perfect Guest Messaging server) and press Enter.
4. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to complete the installation.
Windows 95 Installation:
I&M
1. Turn on the computer and start Windows.
2. Insert Disk 1 into the appropriate disk drive.
3. Click the Start button and select Run. A dialog box appears.
4. In the Open field, type type X:\\pvoffice\vm\install\ E-Mail Player\select directory* \setup.exe (where X is
the network drive for the Perfect Guest Messaging server) and click OK. The initial install screen appears.
5. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to complete the installation.
*Select the appropriate directory for the E-mail player you are installing (Generic MAPI Player or Outlook
Player).
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
21
4
Setting up Fax Services (Fax On
Demand & Fax Mail)
The Fax Services module of Perfect Guest Messaging includes Fax-On-Demand and Fax Mail. Fax On Demand
enables Perfect Guest Messaging to fax information to callers at their request. Fax files are set up in Perfect
Voice one time for information that may be delivered many times. Callers may request a fax by pressing the
appropriate digit(s) on a touch tone telephone. Fax Mail gives Users the ability to receive and store faxes in a
voice mailbox, with the message-handling capabilities of a voice message.
Below is a summary of the steps you need to perform to set up fax services on Perfect Guest Messaging. These
steps are described in more detail on the following pages.
1. Configure the system for Fax Services using the System Configuration Utility.
a. Run the setup program for fax page 22
b. Configure the Fax Board page 23
2. Modify fax parameters page 29
?
3. Reboot the system page 31
4. Verify that the fax argument has been added to the shortcut page 31
5. Perform necessary steps for Fax On Demand and/or Fax Mail pages 32-40
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

22
Optional Applications
1. Set Up Fax Services Using the System Configuration Utility
NOTE: A fax board must be installed and the sentinel key must also be enabled for Fax.
a. Run the Setup Program for Fax
· From the Desktop of Perfect Guest Messaging, Select Start
· Select Programs -- Perfect Guest Messaging System Configuration Utility
· Click Manual Configuration
· Highlight Fax Settings
· Click the Modify button
· Click the Install Perfect Fax button.
?
· Now you must locate the fax setup program. It is
located in the C:\install\fax directory. Highlight
setup.exe and click OK.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
23
· The fax installation begins. When this
screen appears, select GammaFax and
click Next.
· When the fax installation is complete, this screen
appears. Click Cancel to return to Windows
without restarting. You will restart the computer
after you complete the remaining steps to install fax.
b. Configure the Fax Board
?
· Now that fax is installed, you need to configure the fax
board driver. When this screen appears, click Configure
Fax Board.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

24
Optional Applications
· Select GammaLink from the drop down list. Then click the Set
Up Fax Board I/0 button.
· When you click the
Setup Fax Board I/O
button, this screen
appears. Click New
Device.
?
· The "Add Board"
window pops up.
Select
GammaFAX from
the list and click
OK.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
25
· This may take a few
seconds to load. While
it is loading, a series of
"Not found" messages
are displayed in the
window. Wait until
you see "Finished hit
a key to continue".
Press any key.
· Click Modify.
?
· Enter 9, in the "Prefix" field.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

26
Optional Applications
· In the "General Settings"
section, enter the
appropriate Sender
Name.
· You may also specify a
bitmap file in the Default
Logo File.
· Enter the TSID. This is
the name or number to use
for transmission over any
port. This value overrides
the CSID.
· De-select the four Play
Sound options.
· Click Save & Exit. This
updates the i3load.ini file.
· When this screen appears, press
any key.
?
· Close this window by clicking the X in the upper right-hand corner.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
27
· Click Close.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

28
Optional Applications
The Fax Configuration screen appears.
· Verify that the Fax Board Driver is Gamma Link.
· Select "Enabled" for the Fax On Demand Enable
field.
· Verify that the Path for Fax Drivers is C:\FAXDLL.
· Verify that the File and Path for Fax Viewer is
C:\WINDOWS\WANGIMG.EXE.
· Enter the System CSID.
· Specify the Number of Log Entries to Delete.
· Specify the Number of Fax Ports.
· Select "Yes" for Incoming Fax Fax Mail
Installed.
· Select "No" for Allow Printing of Faxes.
· Click OK.
· Enter the extensions connected to the fax
ports and click OK.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
29
2. Modify Fax Parameters
The Fax on Demand feature is an add-on feature to Perfect Guest Messaging and must be configured before it will
function on the system. Once the hardware and software installation is complete, start Perfect Guest Messaging.
Go to the Parameter Screen and select Fax Parameters. Several values must be updated here:
300 Fax on Demand
Set Parameter 300 to one (1) to activate Fax on
Demand.
301 Local Area Code 1
Many large urban centers encompass several local
302 Local Area Code 2
area codes. In parameters 301 to 303, enter the local
area codes for your particular area. You may have up
303 Local Area Code 3
to three (3) local area codes. If you do not require all
three choices, leave the unused parameters blank.
304 Local and Toll Area Code 1
Again, many metropolitan cities have certain area
305 Local and Toll Area Code 2
codes that are both local and long distance. In
parameters 304 to 305, enter the local / long distance
area codes for your particular area. You may have
two (2) local / long distance area codes. Note that if
you do require these fields, a DOS text file
containing a list of local exchanges must be created
in the \WINVM directory. (See below.) If you do not
require one or both choices, leave the unused
parameter(s) blank.
306 Code to Access Outside Line
These parameters identify the outside line access
307 Code to Access Toll Line
codes for the PBX system. The default value for 306
is "nine pause" (9,); for 307, "nine pause one" (9,.1).
308 Number of Digits in Area Code
These parameters identify the number of digits in the
309 Number of Digits in Telephone Number
area code and in the telephone number. The default
?
settings are three (3) digit area codes and seven (7)
digit telephone numbers.
310 Fax Directory
This parameter lists the name of the directory to be
used to store FAX documents. This directory must
be created at the root directory. The default
directory name is FAXOUT. If you wish to use a
different name, the directory name must be changed
in this parameter field as well as created as a
directory on the hard drive. For example, if you want
to use a directory named TEST as you FAX
directory, change parameter 310 to read "\TEST",
and also create a directory C:\TEST. Valid fax file
I&M
types are ASCII, .dcx, or .pcx files.
311 Dialing Suffix
Enter the code, if any, that must be dialed after a
long distance number.
313 Ask for Extension Number
If enabled, the system prompts the caller for his or
her extension number so that the caller may be
identified on the fax. A value of 0 enables; 1,
disables this function.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

30
Optional Applications
314 Fax Pickup Code
This is the code that the fax card dials to pick up a
parked call.
315 Default Fax Number
This is the default fax number where faxes are
printed when another number has not been
specified.
316 Default Fax Mailbox
This is the default mailbox for faxes.
NOTE: If an area code is both Local and Long Distance, it should ONLY be entered in the Local/Toll parameters
(304 and 305). The area code cannot appear in both parameter sections.
If you entered values for Parameter 304 or 305, you must create a data file called <Areacode>.FAX. For example,
if your Local/Toll Area Code is `905', the data file will be called 905.FAX. If you do not have an area code in
your area that is both local and long distance, you may skip the following steps:
· From the Perfect Guest Messaging directory C:\WINVM>, type EDIT <Areacode>.FAX and press
<Enter>. This file, <Areacode>.FAX, will be blank because you are creating it now.
· In this file, <Areacode>.FAX, enter all of the exchanges that are local exchanges for your area. You
can find this information in the local telephone book in the section entitled "Local Calls and Calling
Instructions". In this file, <Areacode>.FAX, enter each local exchange on a new line as shown
below.
?
I&M
DOS Editor Screen with <Areacode>.FAX file
Once all local exchanges have been entered, save this file and exit the DOS editor.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
31
3. Reboot the System
4. Verify that the Fax Argument Has Been Added to the Shortcuts
Add the fax argument to the program line on the Desktop, Startup group, and Programs group:
1. Right-click the Perfect Guest Messaging icon (on the Desktop, Startup group, or Programs group)*
2. Select Properties
3. Select the Shortcut tab
4. Verify thatfax has been added to the Target as shown below. If not, add a space, then fax.
?
NOTE: After you enter the fax argument, shutdown the system and reboot to load the fax drivers.
*To access the Startup group and Programs group, right-click the Start button. Select Open. From the "Start
Menu", double-click Programs. To add the argument to the Startup group, double-click Startup and right-click
the Perfect Guest Messaging icon. Repeat steps 2-4 above. To add the argument to the Programs group, double-
click Programs and right-click the Perfect Guest Messaging icon. Repeat steps 2-4.
NOTE: If fax is not loading properly, you may see error messages stating "File Not Found". The system
I&M
cannot find the i3load.ini file that is created and modified when you install and configure fax correctly. If the
voice mail system does not start, manually remove the fax arguments from the Target. This allows the
voice mail system to run until you resolve the fax issue(s).
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

32
Optional Applications
5
Fax On Demand
Fax-On-Demand enables Perfect Guest Messaging to fax information to callers at their request. Fax files are set
up in Perfect Voice one time for information that may be delivered many times. Callers may request a fax by
pressing the appropriate digit(s) on a touch tone telephone. To set up Perfect Guest Messaging for Fax On
Demand, the system must first be set up for fax services (see previous section). Then the Fax On Demand Voice
Menu must be created and fax documents may be added to the system.
1. Create the Fax On Demand Voice Menu
In order for callers to be able to use Fax on Demand, they must be offered the option. The Fax on Demand option
may be offered to the callers in the Main Company Greeting. Please note that the Fax on Demand option is a
function of the Voice Menus and may be offered as an option on any Voice Menu. For the purpose of this
example, we will offer the Fax on Demand option in the Main Company Greeting.
1. First we will create a "Phantom" mailbox (MBX 80) for Fax on Demand so that we can create a Voice Menu.
In this mailbox (MBX 80), activate the following features on the Transfer Option Tab in the Mailbox screen:
· Call Blocking
· Logged In
· Voice Menu
· Also, enter a NAME for the Voice Menu. For our example, we will call this voice menu "FAX".
?
Mailbox Transfer Option tab Mailbox Screen for Mailbox 80
2. Record the name prompt for mailbox 80 as "Fax Options". This informs callers that they are transferring to I&M
the Fax options menu. It is not necessary to record any personal greetings for this phantom mailbox because
each voice menu has its own prompt.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
33
3. Since the Fax on Demand option is to be offered in the Main Company Greeting, the mailbox number must be
entered in the Company Single digit field on the Company Screen.
Company Single digit Field
4. This option must be offered to your callers in the Main Company Greeting (Refer to "Recording System
Prompts and Company Greetings"). This Greeting can be as follows:
Prompt XXX:
"Thank you for calling the ABC company. If you know the extension number of the
party you wish to speak with, you may dial it now or you may press the star key for a
company directory. To request a FAX document, press one; or to speak to an
operator, press zero."
5. The Voice Menu "FAX" must now be created. To do this, select V-Menus from the Main Screen. The Voice
Menu Screen appears similar to the Screen shown below. Enter the name of the voice menu to create. For our
example, we will enter "FAX" and click OK.
?
I&M
Voice Menu Screen
6. When the AudioText Entry Form appears, select sub menu number one.
NOTE: All Voice Menus MUST begin with menu number one (1). From menu number one, callers may be
routed to any of the other 98 sub-menus available for this Voice Menu.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

34
Optional Applications
7. There are only two actions associated with the Fax on Demand feature. These actions are explained below.
Send Predefined FAX
This option sends a FAX document that has been predefined in the voice menu setup. This option is useful to
provide a list of all FAX documents available on the Perfect Guest Messaging system for Users to select from.
Additional Information: Enter a Fax document number (four digits).
Enter a menu number in the box labeled "Next Menu".
Send Requested Fax (Available with Fax On Demand Module):
When you use this option, the Perfect Guest Messaging system prompts the caller for the document number
of the FAX document they wish to receive. The Perfect Guest Messaging system also prompts the caller for
their FAX machine number including area code.
Additional information: Enter a menu number in the box labeled "Next Menu".
8. For the purpose of our demonstration, we will offer our callers the option to receive a list of available
documents and the option to select a specific FAX document to be sent.
Menu #
Option
DOC #
Next Menu
Mailbox
Question
Prompt
1
100
1 Send Predefined FAX
1234
2
2 Send Requested Fax
2
3
4
5
6
?
7
8
9 Disconnect
0
#
*
D Send to Main Greeting
Fax on Demand Menu
Question 100:
"To receive a list of available FAX documents, press 1. To request a specific Fax
I&M
document, press 2. To disconnect at any time, press 9; otherwise, remain on the line and
you will return to the Main Greeting."
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
35
9. Both Fax options require the caller to enter some information in order for the Fax to be sent. The "Send
Requested Fax" requires a document number to be entered, while the "Send Predefined Fax" does not. Both of
these options, however, require that the caller enter the following information:
· Enter the telephone number where the fax is to be sent.
· Enter the Extension number to be printed on the top line of the fax document so the caller can
identify it when it arrives at his/her fax machine.
Menu #
Option
DOC #
Next Menu
Mailbox
Question
Prompt
2
101
1 Send to Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 Disconnect
0
#
*
D Send to Main Greeting
Fax on Demand Menu
?
Question 101:
"Your fax document will be sent. If you need to request more documents, press 1 to return
to the previous menu. To disconnect, press 9; or stay on the line to return to the Main
Company Greeting"
This example shows a very simple use of the Fax on Demand feature. This idea may be used with all other voice
menu configurations and options. For more on Voice Menu options, refer to AudioText/Voice Menu in the
Database Configuration section of this manual.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

36
Optional Applications
2. Add Fax on Demand Documents to the System
There are two ways to input Fax on Demand documents into the Perfect Guest Messaging system:
1. The system may receive fax documents sent by another fax machine without shutting down the Perfect
Guest Messaging system (see "Faxing Documents to Perfect Guest Messaging").
2. Fax or files can be copied from diskette to the hard drive (see "Copying Documents to Perfect Guest
Messaging"). Copying documents requires that the Perfect Guest Messaging system be shut down.
Each choice is outlined below with advantages and disadvantages to each method.
Faxing documents to Perfect Guest Messaging
A document may be entered into the Perfect Guest Messaging system via the fax machine while the Perfect Guest
Messaging system is on-line and handling other voice processing functions. To do so:
· Place a document into the fax machine.
· Dial the number to access the Perfect Guest Messaging system.
· Transfer to the extension that is connected to the installed fax coprocessor board and send the document.
The documents that are faxed into the system are stored in a holding queue until they are saved with a document
number. To save a document with a document number:
· Access the System Administrator Menu {refer to "Accessing the System Administrator Menu").
· When you are in the System Administrator's menu, press nine (9) to "Check faxes". You are informed of
the number of the new fax document that needs to be saved. You are prompted to enter a document
number for each document to save. All documents must be named a four digit number. They are stored
as nnnn.fax in the /FAXOUT directory.
NOTE: When you input more than one document, these documents are stored in the holding queue in the order
?
that they were sent. When you access the System Administrator's menu to save these documents, you must save
them in the order that you sent them to the Perfect Guest Messaging.
Advantages:
A document can be stored on the hard drive without shutting the Perfect Guest Messaging system down.
Disadvantages:
Each time a document is faxed, the quality diminishes. When a document is faxed into Perfect Guest Messaging,
the image of the document, not the original, is stored on the hard drive. When the document is sent again, the
caller receives an image of the image of the original. The quality of the end document may be degraded.
I&M
This method is most useful for busy systems that cannot afford to be shut down but need to have updated
documents available any time. If you do choose to use this method, consider using the other method when you
have time to shut down the system and copy the original files to the hard drive. This ensures that your document
quality is as high as possible.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
37
Copying documents to Perfect Guest Messaging
In order to copy a document file to the Perfect Guest Messaging system, the document must be saved in the proper
format. Fax documents MUST be in one of the three (3) forms: ASCII, *.PCX, and *.DCX. Fax documents
copied to the Perfect Guest Messaging system must be saved as nnnn.FAX files. The "nnnn" may be any four
digit number from 1000 to 9999.
To copy a fax document to the Perfect Guest Messaging system:
· Shut Down the Perfect Guest Messaging System (refer to "Shutting Down the System" in the Database
Configuration section of this manual).
· Copy the ****.FAX documents to the directory C:\FAXOUT.
· When all files are copied to the hard drive, restart Perfect Guest Messaging.
Advantages:
By using original files of documents, the quality of the fax documents received by callers is better.
Disadvantages:
The Perfect Guest Messaging system MUST be shut down to copy files to the hard drive. While Perfect Guest
Messaging is turned off, callers cannot access Perfect Guest Messaging.
For companies whose Perfect Guest Messaging system is too busy to be turned off, refer to faxing documents to
Perfect Guest Messaging on the previous page.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

38
Optional Applications
6
Fax Mail
Fax Mail gives Users the ability to receive and store fax messages in a voice mailbox, with the message-handling
capabilities of a voice message. Fax messages may be replied to, forwarded to other Users of the system (with or
without voice comments), saved or deleted. If the Desktop interface is used, fax messages may be archived.
Fax Mail offers several benefits for Users:
· Speedy, accurate delivery. Faxes are sent directly to the voice mailbox, not a fax machine tray. There
is no chance for missed pages, etc.
· Privacy. Fax messages cannot be accessed by anyone but the recipient; they are just as private as voice
mail messages.
· Flexibility. Fax mail may be forwarded to other Users of the voice mail system. Users may even attach a
voice prefix to explain the content of the fax before it is reviewed. If a "hard copy" of a fax is desired, it
may be printed, if necessary, on a network printer. If the User is away from the office, he or she may
redirect the fax message to a local fax machine.
Users may receive the faxes from the telephone or with the Desktop interface. If using the telephone, incoming
faxes are handled much like voice messages, the message waiting lamp lights for a new fax message, etc. When
the User plays a fax message, the system announces "This message is a fax" and plays a special set of instructions.
The User may choose to send a fax to the default fax machine or specify another fax machine. Faxes may also be
forwarded to the User's e-mail address.
To set up Perfect Guest Messaging for Fax Mail:
1. Designate a Single-Digit Option for Fax, and/or
2. Create a V-Menu for each mailbox that will use fax mail.
?
NOTE: It is a good idea to use these two methods in conjunction with one another.
1. Designate a Single-Digit Option for Fax
First a single digit option must be specified for fax. This allows a caller to send a fax to a mailbox from a fax
machine by dialing the single digit option + the mailbox number. To designate a single digit option:
· From the Main Menu, select Company
· Select the Single Digit Options tab
· Type FAX in the desired option
I&M
Example:
In this example, single digit option number 7
is set up for fax. To send a fax, the caller
would call the system from a fax machine and
press u
. The caller would then enter the
mailbox number of the person he or she
wished to send the fax to. At the sound of the
fax tone, he or she would press the start
button on the fax machine.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
39
2. Create a V-Menu for Each Mailbox That Will Use Fax Mail
To enable Fax Mail on a per-mailbox basis, a V-menu must be created for each mailbox.
· Select V-Menus from the Main Menu.
· Create a V-Menu for the appropriate mailbox. HINT: You may want to name the V-Menu the extension
number + "FAX". For example, for mailbox 270, name the V-Menu 270FAX.
· Specify Send to Menu as the action for one of the options and enter the number of the sub menu in the Next
Number field. HINT: If you have designated a single-digit option from the main greeting for fax, it is a
good idea to use the same option number.
· Create the submenu specified in the action above. For the Sub Menu Prompt, select Salutation and enter the
appropriate prompt number that plays "At the sound of the fax tone, press start on your fax machine."
IMPORTANT: The "At the sound of the fax tone, press start on your fax machine" prompt is a standard
system prompt (MESS640.VOX) located in the WINVM directory. However, you need to copy this prompt
to the SALUTE directory to use it in the V-Menu.
· If you wish to override the default fax number, enter the fax number in the Default Fax Number on the
"Other Options" tab of the User's mailbox.
· If this User is set up for Unified Messaging via E-Mail, you may also want to do further editing on the "Other
Options" tab.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

40
Optional Applications
Example:
In this example, the 270FAX V-Menu is being created
for fax mail. Send to Menu is the action specified for
option number 7. The Next Menu field is set to 2. This
means that when the caller presses 7 from the User's
mailbox greeting, he or she will be sent to sub menu 2 of
this voice menu.
?
Create Sub Menu Number 2 for the 270FAX voice menu.
(The MESS640.VOX file has been copied to the
SALUTE directory as prompt 700.) To play this prompt
for callers, "Salutation" is selected from the drop-down
list for the Sub Menu Prompt and 700 is entered for the
prompt number. The caller hears "At the sound of the
fax tone, press start on your fax machine".
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
41
7
Generating Reports Using Perfect
Reporter
Click the Reports button from the Main Menu to access Perfect Reporter. The following reports may be generated
using the Perfect Reporter program:
· Call Details Summary
· Calls Per Hour
· Mailbox Usage
· Mailbox Information
· System Parameters
· Classes of Service
When you start Perfect Reporter, the login screen appears.
?
Enter the User Mailbox and Password and click OK. NOTE: To access reports, you must use the System
Administrator mailbox and password. The screen below appears.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

42
Optional Applications
You may preview (display on the screen), print, or export any report.
Calls Details Summary
When you select the Call Details Summary report, you may specify date range of the report by clicking Today,
This Week, This Month or entering a From Date and To Date. You may preview, print, or export this report.
The below screen is the "Preview" report. Note that you still have the option to print or export the report.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
43
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

44
Optional Applications
Calls Per Hour
The Calls Per Hour report graphically displays the number of calls received per hour. You may specify the date
range of the report. You may preview, print, or export this report. The below screen is the "Preview" report.
Selecting Text displays a listing of times and number of calls per hour located at the left of the screen.
Mailbox Usage
?
This report lists mailbox activity including number of blind transfers, hang-ups during mailbox greeting,
messages deleted in mailbox, and times the mailbox was entered and exited. You may specify the date range and
mailbox range.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
45
Mailbox Information
The Mailbox Information report displays general mailbox information such as extension, first and last name,
company name, department, feature group (Class of Service), etc. You may specify the date range and mailbox
range.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

46
Optional Applications
System Parameters
This report lists values assigned to system parameters.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Optional Applications
47
Classes of Service
This report lists the settings for each Class of Service.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

Appendix
?
I&M

?
I&M

CONTENTS
A: PERFECT GUEST MESSAGING CONFIGURATION ............................................................... 1
Perfect Guest Messaging Program Group .............................................................................................. 1
Starting Perfect Guest Messaging .......................................................................................................... 1
Directory Structure of Perfect Guest Messaging ..................................................................................... 2
B: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION UTILITY ...................................................................................... 3
Configuration Utility Dealer Information ............................................................................................... 4
Configuration Utility Site Information ................................................................................................... 5
Configuration Utility Voice Board Settings ........................................................................................... 6
Configuration Utility PBX Integration.................................................................................................. 10
Configuration Utility SMDI/MCI Settings ............................................................................................ 12
Configuration Utility Caller ID Settings............................................................................................... 14
Configuration Utility Fax Settings....................................................................................................... 15
Configuration Utility General Settings ................................................................................................ 16
Configuration Utility MAPI Information............................................................................................... 20
Configuration Utility REORGANIZATION SETTINGS ........................................................................ 21
Configuration Utility AMIS Settings .................................................................................................... 22
Configuration Utility Local Area Paging.............................................................................................. 23
Configuration Utility Property Management System (Perfect STAY!) ................................................. 24
Configuration Utility Dialup Properties ............................................................................................... 25
C: THE PERFECT.INI FILE......................................................................................................... 26
D: TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................................................ 34
How to Effectively Troubleshoot Problems ........................................................................................... 34
System Hardware (Peripherals) ............................................................................................................ 35
Set Up.................................................................................................................................................. 35
Perfect Guest Messaging Access Problems.......................................................................................... 35
System Administrator Problems ........................................................................................................... 36
User Problems...................................................................................................................................... 37
?
Caller Problems.................................................................................................................................... 37
Messages ............................................................................................................................................. 38
Perfect Guest Messaging Features....................................................................................................... 39
Mailboxes............................................................................................................................................. 40
Class of Services ................................................................................................................................. 41
Notification ........................................................................................................................................... 41
Reports ................................................................................................................................................ 41
E: ADDING AUDIOBOARDS TO PERFECT GUEST MESSAGING............................................ 42
F: ADDING RHETOREX AUDIO BOARDS ................................................................................. 43
Configuring the Rhetorex Audio Board(s) ............................................................................................. 43
Define the Settings Selected in the System Configuration Utility........................................................... 45
If Telephone System is Not Defined in Software: Perform Call Analysis ............................................... 45
I&M
G: ADDING DIALOGIC AUDIO BOARDS ................................................................................... 53
Dialogic Audio Boards .......................................................................................................................... 53
Configuring Dialogic Boards ................................................................................................................. 57
If Telephone System is Not Defined in Software: Perform Call Analysis ............................................... 60
PBXpert................................................................................................................................................ 61
H: INSTALLING A FAX BOARD.................................................................................................. 66
Installing the GammaLink FAX Board ................................................................................................... 66
Software Setup..................................................................................................................................... 66
I: SYSTEM PROMPTS ................................................................................................................ 67
J: GLOSSARY .......................................................................................................................... 100

?
I&M

Appendix
1
A
Perfect Guest Messaging Configuration
This section outlines the directory structure of Perfect Guest Messaging and also shows the contents of these
files.
Perfect Guest Messaging Program Group
Upon installation, a Windows program group is created.
Starting Perfect Guest Messaging
To start Perfect Guest Messaging from the Windows Desktop, follow these steps:
· Click on the Start Button.
· Select Programs from the menu.
· Select the Perfect Guest Messaging Folder.
· Click on Perfect Guest Messaging.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

2
Appendix
Directory Structure of Perfect Guest Messaging
The installation procedure creates the directories shown here. Each directory contains specific types of files.
WINVM
All of Perfect Guest Messaging system files and the system prompts
(MESS.VOX) are stored in this directory.
GRT
All mailbox greetings are stored here as the following: .GR1, .GR2, .GR3,
.NAM.
MSGS
All messages are stored as .MSG.
SALUTE
All of the Greetings that are recorded for Companies, Holidays, and Voice Menu
Prompts are stored in this directory. These voice files are stored as SAL.VOX.
VTR
All Voice Menus that are created are stored as files in this directory. These files are
?
stored as .VTR and .VTN (version 1.3 and above).
FAXOUT
When the FAX on Demand module is added to the Perfect Guest Messaging system,
this directory is used to store all of the fax documents. These files are stored as
.FAX.
FAX
This directory contains all the system files for fax on demand.
FAX\ QUEUE\
All pending activities are stored in this directory
WINVM\FRENCH\
This directory is created according to the language modules installed. For example
the French language disks creates the FRENCH directory, Spanish language disks I&M
create SPANISH.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
3
B
System Configuration Utility
The System Configuration Utility may be used to configure the Perfect Guest Messaging parameters and
environmental controls.
To access the System Configuration Utility:
· Select Start, Programs, Perfect Guest Messaging, then Configuration Wizard.
· This screen appears. You may modify sections individually by highlighting the section on the left side of
the screen and clicking Modify, or click the Wizard button to edit every section.
To edit an individual
option, select it on
the left side of the
screen.
The current settings
appear on the right
side of the screen. To
edit, click the
Modify button.

?

I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

4
Appendix
Configuration Utility Dealer Information
The Dealer Information screen displays the current Dealer Information, including Dealer Name, Contact
Name, and the Dealer's Telephone Number. To edit this information, click Modify, enter the desired values,
then click OK.
· Dealer Name: Enter the name of the dealer that installed the Voice Mail System.
· Contact Name: Enter the specific person at the Dealer that end users should call for support.
?
· Phone: Enter the telephone number that end users should call when they have questions.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
5
Configuration Utility Site Information
The Site Information screen displays the current Site Information, including modem number, fax number,
and e-mail address. To edit this information, click Modify, enter the desired values, then click OK.
· Name: Enter the Company Name where the Voice Mail system is being installed.
· Remote Maintenance Number: Enter the telephone number of the modem that is installed in the PC.
This can be a direct line or an extension.
·
?
Fax Number: Enter the Fax Number of the site.
· E-Mail: Enter the e-mail address of the site.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

6
Appendix
Configuration Utility Voice Board Settings
The Voice Board Settings screen displays the current Voice Board Settings, including Hardware Setup, Type
of Voice Board, Number of Ports, Interrupt Level, Message Light Options, and some settings for special
circumstances.
To edit this information, click the Modify button. A screen similar to the ones below appears. The options
are listed on the left-hand side of the screen, and the settings are listed on the right. Select the appropriate
board type from the drop-down list at the top of the screen. Then select setting you wish to modify.
?
NOTE: If Rhetorex is chosen as the Voice Board, another button appears that says Configuration Settings.
It displays the current System Configuration in the C:\WINVM\CONFIGUR.EXE program.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
7
Voice Board Hardware Settings
· Interrupt Level: Indicates the interrupt level at
which the voice board is installed.
· Number of Boards: Indicates the number of voice
boards installed on the PC.
· Number of Ports: Indicates the number of ports in
the voice mail system.
· Base Memory Address: Indicates the starting
address at which the voice board is loaded in
memory.
Voice Board Voice Board Options
· VoxFormat: Indicates the type of format that is
being used to interpret voice.
· Telephone System: Indicates the telephone
system.
· Verify Inband Length: Specifies whether or not
to verify the length of inband signal each time it is
received.
· Pulse Detection: Specifies whether or not to detect
?
pulse (rotary-dial) digits.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

8
Appendix
Voice Board Reserved Codes
· Inband Reserved Codes: These codes indicate the
action(s) that is assigned to the Reserved Codes.
Voice Board Global Tone Settings
· Template: This is a Dialogic feature that indicates
the template to use for C.O. Fast Busy tones. If any
of these templates are matched, the Dialogic board
drops the call.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
9
Voice Board Confirmation
· Confirmation: These indicate the inband codes to
echo back to the telephone system.
Voice Board Message Lights
· Log Message Lights: Indicates whether or not to
log the message light functions that the voice mail
system performs to the system status screen. This
option applies only to systems using SMDI or MCI.
· Message Lights On Hook: Indicates whether or
not to go off hook to send the message light codes
to the telephone system.
· Port Settings: Indicates the baud rate, parity,
databits, and stopbits.
· Refresh Ports Interval: Indicates the number of
?
minutes between refreshes of the ports. The port is
refreshed by going off hook, then back onhook.
When you have finished editing the Voice Board
Settings, click OK. The Voice Mail Extensions screen
appears. Enter the extension numbers connected to
each port and click Continue. After this screen is
completed, both the Perfect Guest Messaging window
and the Startup window appears, indicating that
changes are being made. When this procedure is
I&M
complete (a few seconds), the Main Screen appears
again.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

10
Appendix
Configuration Utility PBX Integration
The PBX Integration section displays the current PBX Integration setup. It lists the Make, Model, and
Version of telephone system. To edit this information, click the Modify button. This starts the Telephone
System Integration Utility Wizard.
Telephone System Integration Wizard
The Switch Integrator is a program that
configures Perfect Guest Messaging with
?
integration parameters for some of the
more commonly installed telephone
systems. Select the Make (Manufacturer)
and Model of the telephone system and
click Next.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
11
A screen appears indicating your
selection. Click Next to continue.
The Switch Integrator automatically
updates Perfect Guest Messaging with
the selected telephone system
parameters. Click Finish.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

12
Appendix
Configuration Utility SMDI/MCI Settings
The SMDI/MCI Settings section displays the current SMDI/MCI Settings, including Type of Integration, Port
Settings and SMDI Packet Information.
To edit this information, click the Modify button. The Integration
Technique screen appears. Select the desired Integration.
You may also edit the port settings or additional SMDI/MCI settings.
Click OK when you are finished.
?
I&M
Editing Port Settings
To edit the port settings, click Configure. The Communication
Port Settings screen appears. You may edit the Com Port, baud
rate, data bits, parity, and stop bits. Click OK when finished.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
13
Editing Additional SMDI/MCI Settings
There are also some other SMDI/MCI settings that may need to be
modified, such as whether or not to turn Debug mode on and
indicating the packet settings. To modify these settings, click
Other Settings. A screen similar to this appears.
· Debug Mode: Indicates whether or not to activate the debug
option. Debug is used for troubleshooting purposes only.
· Number of Digits: Indicates the number of digits in each
packet that is received.
· Pad Digits With: Indicates the character to use to represent an
unused area of packets.
· Handshaking: Indicates the Handshake mode to use.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

14
Appendix
Configuration Utility Caller ID Settings
The Caller ID Settings screen displays the current Caller ID Settings, including the type of Caller ID being
used, the length of the Caller ID string, and the line assignments.
To edit these settings, click the Modify button.
A screen similar to this appears. Select the desired information, then click OK.
· Type of Caller ID: Indicates the method to
receive Caller ID.
?
· Pad Short Caller ID Number With: Specifies
the character that indicates an unused area of a
packet.
· Length of Caller ID: Indicates the number of
digits to expect for Caller ID.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
15
Configuration Utility Fax Settings
The Fax Settings screen displays the current fax settings.
To edit these settings, click on the Modify button. Enter the correct information, then click OK.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

16
Appendix
Configuration Utility General Settings
The General Settings screen displays the current settings that are general environment controls, such as
System Path, Log Options, and whether or not to Refresh Message Lights.
To edit this information, click the Modify button. A screen similar to the one below appears. The options
that may be modified are listed on the left side of the screen. The settings for each option are displayed on the
right. The available options are Log, Mailbox, Daily Hours, Message, and System.
?
General Settings Log Options
· Log System Statistics: Indicates whether
or not to log system activity. This value
must be enabled to use the Reports module
effectively.
· Days to Keep Logs For: Indicates the
number of days to save the report logs
before deleting the files.
· Log Mailbox Activity: Indicates whether
or not to log mailbox activity. This value
must be enabled to use the Reports module
I&M
effectively.
· Log Record Termination: Indicates
whether or not to delete log files.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
17
General Settings Mailbox Options
· Refresh Message Lights: Indicates whether
or not to refresh the message lights for the
mailboxes upon Startup.
· Show Password: "Yes" will display the
password for each mailbox in the Password
field of the Mailbox screen. "No" will
display asterisks.
· Play Owner's Name During Transfer: If
you select "Yes", the system plays
"Transferring to <name>" during the
transfer of the call. If you select "No", the
system plays "Please hold while I transfer
your call".
· Use Mailbox Language as Default: If you
select "Yes", when the caller exits the
mailbox, he or she will hear other voice
mail prompts in the language specified in
the mailbox.
General Settings Daily Hours
· Afternoon Hours Start At: This specifies
the time, in military format, that afternoon
begins.
· Evening Hours Start At: This specifies
the time, in military format, that evening
?
begins.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

18
Appendix
General Settings Message Options
· Maximum Call Length: This specifies
the maximum length of a call (in minutes)
if the User wishes to define a limit.
· Reindex Message Files: Indicates
whether or not to reindex the message file
when the Reorganization utility is
performed.
· Message Lights On Hook: Indicates
whether or not to go off hook to send the
message light codes to the telephone
system.
· When Transferring, Play "Transferring
to" Prompt: If you select "Yes", the
system plays "Transferring To" during a
transfer.
· When Sending a Message Ask for
Mailbox Number: If you select "First",
when sending a message, the system
prompts the User to enter the destination
mailbox number before he or she records the message. "Last" prompts for the destination mailbox after
the User records the message.
· When Auto Forwarding, Cancel Forwarding Only When Message is Saved or Deleted: Indicates
whether or not to cancel the auto forwarding if the message has been saved or deleted and the auto
forwarding has not yet occurred.
· Add Number of Messages to Beeper Number: If "Yes", the number of new messages will be included
?
when outcalling to a beeper.
· Message Forwarding Allowed: Indicates whether or not message forwarding is permitted.
· AutoPlay of Messages Enabled: Indicates whether or not to enable a hotkey to automatically play all
new messages continuously with no breaks or prompts. (The hotkey to use is 7.)
· Message Send Interdigit Delay: Indicates how many seconds between digits before the system assumes
the caller has finished entering digits.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
19
General Settings System Options
· System Path: Indicates the application
path.
· Exclusive Company Directory: Indicates
whether or not the directory will be
exclusive to each company in a multiple
company configuration.
· Default Language: Indicates the language
that the system will always default to if no
language is specified.
· Use Port Mailbox: Indicates whether or
not to monitor the ports for abnormal
activity. It is a safety mode to drop the
port is abnormal activity continues for
more than 30 minutes.
· Show Moving Logo: If "Yes", the logo on
the main menu screen will change colors.
· Loop Current On In Record: Indicates
whether or not to look for loop current
during recording.
· Record With AGC: Indicates whether or not to activate Automatic Gain Control (AGC) during
recording. This is used for low-volume messages.
· Attach Comment on Reply: Indicates whether or not to attach comments when replying to or
forwarding a message.
· Disable Fax Detection: Indicates whether or not to listen for fax tones and send the fax to the fax
machine when receiving faxes.
?
· Relate Company To: Relates companies in a multiple company configuration to either a specific line or
mailbox.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

20
Appendix
Configuration Utility MAPI Information
The MAPI Information screen displays the current MAPI setup.
To edit this information, click the Modify button. A screen
similar to this appears. Select the desired settings, then click OK.
· Name: Indicates the User Name.
· Password: Indicates the password for MAPI.
?
· Profile: Indicates the User profile (usually the same as User
Name).
· Mode: Indicates MAPI mode. For the standard E-Mail
player, select Standard. For the Outlook player, select OLE.
· MAPI Integration: Indicates whether or not MAPI is
installed.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
21
Configuration Utility REORGANIZATION SETTINGS
The Reorganization Settings screen displays the current REORG settings. It indicates such things as
procedures to perform before or after running the Reorganization Utility, and indicates what, exactly, to
reorganize, to some degree.
To edit these settings, click the Modify button. A screen
similar to this appears. Select the desired settings and
click OK when finished.
· Shutdown Application for Reorg: Indicates
whether or not to shutdown Perfect Guest Messaging
?
when running the reorganization utility.
· Backup Files Before Reorg: Indicates whether to
backup files to the C:\~OLDB~ directory before the
reorganization utility runs.
· Reindex Files on Mondays...Saturdays: Indicates
which action to perform on the given day.
· Batch File to Run at Reorg Time: Indicates
whether or not to run a user-defined file before
running the reogranization utlity.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

22
Appendix
Configuration Utility AMIS Settings
The AMIS Settings screen displays the current settings for AMIS Configuration. When you modify values on
this screen, the PERFECT.INI file is updated.
To edit these settings, click the Modify button. Edit the desired information and click OK.
· AMIS Installed: Indicates whether or not the AMIS Networking option is installed.
· AMIS Initial Delay: Indicates the number of seconds to ignore the C tone that AMIS sends.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
23
Configuration Utility Local Area Paging
The Local Area Paging (LAP) Settings screen displays the current settings for Local Area Paging.
To edit these settings, click the Modify button. A screen
similar to this appears. Make the desired changes (click
Configure to modify the Com Port settings). Click OK to
return to the Main Screen.
?
· Integration with LAP: Indicates whether or not LAP is
installed.
· Port Settings: Indicates the COM port, baud rate,
parity, databits, and stopbits.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

24
Appendix
Configuration Utility Property Management System (Perfect STAY!)
The Perfect Stay screen lists the settings for the property management system (Perfect Stay).
To edit these settings, click the Modify button. A screen
similar to this appears. After making the desired
changes, click OK to return to the Main Screen.
· PMS Installed: Indicates whether or not Property
Management System is installed.
· PMS Type: Specifies the serial port protocol.
?
· Port Settings: Indicates the Com port, baud rate,
parity, databits, and stopbits settings for PMS.
· PMS Mode: Indicates the mode to use for PMS.
· PMS Shared Directory: Works with file mode to
indicate which shared directory to use.
· PMS Checkout Messages Destination: Works in
hotel situations. Upon checkout, messages that are
still present in the mailbox are moved to a phantom
mailbox that starts with the value entered in this field
and ends with the mailbox number. For example, if
the mailbox number is 250, the phantom mailbox is
I&M
7250.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
25
Configuration Utility Dialup Properties
The Perfect Stay screen lists the dialup properties.
To edit these settings, click the Modify button. A screen
similar to this appears. After making the desired changes,
click OK to return to the Main Screen.
If all calls in a particular area code are local, enter the
appropriate area code(s) in the Local Area Code section. If
you have 10-digit local dialing, enter the area code in the Toll
Area Code section.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

26
Appendix
C
The PERFECT.INI file
Below is the PERFECT.INI file. This file is included FOR REFERENCE PURPOSES ONLY. All
changes to the PERFECT.INI file are to be performed using the PVO Configuration Wizard. Below each line
or group of lines is a definition of the purpose of the statement and the possible choices for the value. The
value already specified is the default value.
[General Settings]
Refresh Mailbox Message Lights=Yes
Indicates whether to refresh the message lights for the mailboxes upon Startup or not.
Choices are Yes, No
Maximum Call Length=60
Indicates the maximum length of a call (in minutes) if the user wishes to define a limit.
Show Mailbox Password=No
Indicates whether to show the passwords for each mailbox in the Password field of the mailbox screen (Yes),
or show asterisks (*) instead (No).
Choices are Yes, No
Default System Language=English
Indicates the language that the system will always default to.
Choices are English, French, German, Spanish, Italian, Cantonese, Mandarin, Japanese, Arabic, Farsi,
Russian, Polish, Hungarian, Greek, Thai, Portugese
NOTE: If the choice is a language other than English, the appropriate language module must be installed.
Debug Mode=No
Indicates whether to activate the Debug option or not.
Choices are Debug, Event, No
NOTE: If Event is chosen, Perfect Guest Messaging writes ALL system activity to a file called EVENT.LOG.
?
This file gets VERY large, VERY fast, so this option should only be activated for a short time, and for
troubleshooting purposes only.
Play Mailbox Owner's Name During Transfer=Yes
Indicates whether to play "Transferring you to <name>" during a transfer (Yes), or "Please hold while I
transfer your call" (No).
Choices are Yes, No
When Transferring, Play 'Transferring to Prompt'=Yes
Indicates whether or not to play a transfer message during a transfer.
Choices are Yes, No
Path for System=C:\Winvm
Indicates the application path.
Reindex Message Files=No
Indicates whether or not to reindex the message files when executing the WINREORG.EXE application.
I&M
Choices are Yes, No
Log System Statistics=Yes
Indicates whether or not to log system activity. This value must be enabled to use the Reports application
effectively.
Choices are Yes, No
Log Mailbox Activity=Yes
Indicates whether or not to log mailbox activity. This creates the file C:\WINVM\MBXLOG.LOG. This must
be enabled to use the Reports utility effectively.
NOTE: This file gets VERY large, VERY fast, so this option should only be activated for a short time, and for
troubleshooting purposes only.
Choices are Yes, No
Log Record Termination=No
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
27
If set to yes, it indicates why a recording was terminated in the log file.
Days to Keep Report Logs=30
Indicates the number of days to save the report logs before deleting the files.
When Sending A Message Ask for Mailbox Number=First
Indicates whether to ask for the mailbox number to send the message to before (First) recording the message,
or after (Last) recording the message.
Choices are First, Last
When Auto Forwarding, Cancel Forwarding Only when Message Saved Or Deleted=No
Indicates whether or not to cancel the auto forwarding if the message has been saved or deleted and the auto
forward has not yet occurred.
Choices are Yes, No
Exclusive Company Directory=Yes
Indicates whether or not the directory will be exclusive to each company or not in a multiple company
configuration.
Choices are Yes, No
Afternoon Hours Start At=1200
Indicates the time that the afternoon greeting will start to play (military format).
Evening Hours Start At=1800
Indicates the time that the evening greeting will start to play (military format).
Use Mailbox Language as Default=No
Indicates whether or not to use the mailbox language settings as the default when a caller exits the mailbox
and is still in the Perfect Guest Messaging system.
Choices are Yes, No
Use Port Monitor=No
Indicates whether or not to act as a watchdog and monitor the ports for abnormal activity. It is a safety mode
to drop the port if the abnormal activity continues for more than 30 minutes.
Choices are Yes, No
Add Number of Messages to Beeper Number=Yes
Indicates whether or not to indicate the number of new messages in the mailbox when outcalling to a beeper.
This is shown with an asterisk (*), followed by the number (i.e. 201 *3 indicates 3 new messages in mailbox
?
201).
Choices are Yes, No
Message Forwarding Allowed=Yes
Indicates whether or not message forwarding is permitted.
Choices are Yes, No
Loop Current On In Record=Yes
Indicates whether or not to look for loop current during recording.
Choices are Yes, No
Record with AGC=Yes
Indicates whether or not to activate Automatic Gain Control during recording.
Choices are Yes, No
Record Compression=Yes
Indicates whether or not to compress the recordings performed through Perfect Guest Messaging.
I&M
Choices are Yes, No
Attach Comment on Reply=No
Indicates whether or not to attach comments when replying to or forwarding a message.
Choices are Yes, No
AutoPlay of Messages Enabled=Yes
Indicates whether or not to enable a hotkey to automatically play all new messages continuously with no breaks
or prompts. The hotkey to use on the telephone keypad is 7.
Choices are Yes, No
Disable Fax Detection=No
Indicates whether or not to listen for fax tones and send the fax to the fax machine when receiving faxes.
Choices are Yes, No
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

28
Appendix
[Voice Board Settings]
Refresh Ports Interval=30
Indicates the number of minutes between refreshes of the ports. The ports are refreshed by going offhook, then
back onhook.
Voice Board=Rhetorex
Indicates the voice board type.
Choices are Rhetorex, Dialogic, NewVoice
Number of Channels=4
Indicates the total number of ports on the Perfect Guest Messaging system.
Voice Board Interrupt=5
Indicates the interrupt at which the voice board is located.
Choices are 3, 4, 5, or 7 for Rhetorex systems, or 2,,3,4,5,7,10,11,or 12 for Dialogic systems.
Telephone System=Standard
Indicates a standard telephone system.
VoxFormat=Rhet32
Indicates the format in which the voice files are saved.
Choices are OKI24, OKI32,, RHET24, OR RHET32 for Rhetorex systems, or OKI24 OR OKI32 for Dialogic
systems.
Telephone System Make=Lucent
Indicates the make of the telephone system.
Telephone System Model=Definity
Indicates the model of the telephone system.
Choices are based on the make of the telephone system.
Telephone System Version=SMDI
Indicates the version of the telephone system
Global Tone Template 1=375,50,420,50,220,60,300,60,2
Global Tone Template 2=330,50,460,50,2000,200,0,0,1
Global Tone Template 3=
Global Tone Template 4=
Dialogic feature to indicate the template to use for C.O. Fast Busy tones. If any of these templates are
?
matched, the Dialogic board drops the call.
Settings are Frequency1, ±x Hz, Frequency2, ±x Hz, Cadence On, ±x ms, Cadence Off, ±x ms, number of
cycles to repeat for.
Code for Reserved Code 1=CoCall
Code for Reserved Code 2=NoAnswer
The following describe the actions of the Inband Reserved Codes.
Choices are:
Login Performs Auto-Station Login
NoAnswer Sends the caller to the mailbox personal greeting
Busy Sends the caller to the mailbox busy greeting
CoCall Looks for the incoming CO Line Number
Invalid Causes the system to ignore the inband and disconnect
Record Goes to the specified mailbox and starts recording
I&M
Confirm Inband Signals=No
Indicates whether or not to perform a confirmation on the inband signals.
Choices are Yes, No
Code for Confirm Busy=C51E
Code for Confirm NoAnswer= C51E
Code for Confirm Login= C51E
Code for Confirm CoCall= C51E
Indicates the inband codes to echo back to the telephone system. Specific to the Matra PBX (France).
Pulse Detection Enabled=Yes
Indicates whether or not to detect a pulse or rotary dial digits.
Choices are Yes, No
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
29
Log Message Lights=No
Indicates whether or not to log the message light functions that Perfect Guest Messaging performs to the
system status screen. This options applies only to systems using SMDI or MCI.
Choices are Yes, No
Message Lights On Hook=No
Indicates whether or not to go off hook to send the message light codes to the telephone system.
Choices are Yes, No
Port used for Message Lights=No
Indicates the COM port to use for Message Light Notification.
Choices are Com1, Com2, No
Message Lights Port Settings=2400,N,8,1
Indicates the Com Port settings to use for message light notification.
Settings are Baud Rate, Parity, Databits,Stopbits
Channel Mode=NNNN
Indicates the mode of each channel. One digit per port.
Choices are D (DID Mode), N (Normal Mode).
[Reorganization Settings]
Shutdown Application For Reorg=No
Indicates whether or not to shut down Perfect VoiceOffice to run the reorganization utility.
Choices are Yes, No
Backup Files Before Reorg=No
Indicates whether or not to back up files to the ~OLDDB directory before running the reorganization utility.
Choices are Yes, No
Message Database Safety Threshold=30
Indicates the minimum percentage of all files that exist as unattached messages before Perfect Guest
Messaging will delete them when it runs the reorganization utility.
(number of files * 30%) > number of records in database
Batch File to run at Reorg Time=
If a specific file is to be run each time the reorganization utility is run, enter the path and filename here.
?
Reindex Files on Mondays=All But Reports
Reindex Files on Tuesdays=All But Reports
Reindex Files on Wednesdays=All But Reports
Reindex Files on Thursdays=All But Reports
Reindex Files on Fridays=All But Reports
Reindex Files on Saturdays=All But Reports
Reindex Files on Sundays=All
Indicates which database files to reindex on a given day when the reorganization utility is run.
Choices are All But Reports, All, None
[SMDI Settings]
Com Port=2
Indicates the COM Port to use with SMDI.
I&M
Com Port Settings=1200,E,7,1
Indicates the COM Port settings to use with SMDI.
Settings are Baud Rate, Parity, Databits,Stopbits
Number of Digits in SMDI=7
Indicates the digit length of the SMDI strings.
Choices are 7,8,9,10
SMDI Debug Mode=No
Indicates whether or not to activate the debug mode for SMDI. Useful for troubleshooting purposes.
Pad SMDI Digits with=Zero
Indicates what to use to fill the extra digit spots in the string.
Choices are Zero, Space or Null
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

30
Appendix
SMDI Carrier Detect=No
Determines whether or not to enable the Carrier Detect (CD) line. Carrier Detect is a signal sent from a
modem to the attached computer to indicate that the modem is online.
SMDI Clear to Send=No
Determines whether or not to enable the Clear To Send (CTS) line. Typically, the Clear To Send signal is sent
from a modem to the attached computer to indicate that transmission can proceed.
SMDI Data Set Ready=No
Determines the whether or not to enable the Data Set Ready (DSR) line. Typically, the Data Set Ready signal
is sent by a modem to its attached computer to indicate that it is ready to operate.
SMDI Request to Send=No
Determines whether or not to enable the Request To Send (RTS) line. Typically, the Request To Send signal
that requests permission to transmit data is sent from a computer to its attached modem.
SMDI HANDSHAKING=Yes
When COM Port settings are 9600, N, 8, 1, the values are 0, 500, 500, 1, 0 respectively.
When COM Port Settings are 1200, E, 7, 1, the values are 1000, 500, 1000, 1, 0 respectively.
These values will be changed from the default only on MCI systems or Fujitsu systems with SMDI.
[Caller ID Settings]
Caller ID Installed=Yes
Indicates whether or not a Caller ID box is installed.
Choices are Yes, No
Number of lines used for Caller ID=6
Indicates the number of lines that go into the Caller ID box. FOR ROCHELLE SYSTEMS ONLY.
Choices are a number value up to 6.
Type of Caller ID=Rochelle
Indicates the type of Caller ID being used.
Choices are Rochelle, Inband, or SMDI
Com Port used for Caller ID=2
Indicates the COM Port that the Caller ID box is connected to. FOR ROCHELLE SYSTEMS ONLY.
Choices are 1,2
?
Pad Short Caller ID Numbers with=905
If the Caller ID is not the maximum length (below), this field indicates the area code to assume for local calls.
Length of Caller ID=10
Indicates the number of digits to accept for the Caller ID string.
Fake Caller ID=No
Indicates to simulate Caller ID for demo purposes.
Choices are Yes, No
Fake Caller ID Name=YOUR COMPANY
Indicates the name to display on the Caller ID screen for Caller ID simulation.
Fake Caller ID Number=8645551212
Indicates the phone number to display on the Caller ID screen for Caller ID simulation.
Caller ID Mode=Rochelle
Indicates the mode to use to receive the Caller ID.
I&M
Choices are None, Inband, Rochelle, SMDI
Ask for Phone Number when no Caller ID=No
Indicates whether or not to request the caller to enter their phone number if Caller ID is not enabled.
Choices are Yes, No
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
31
[Form Positions]
Main Form Top=150
Main Form Left=75
Port Form Top=2000
Port Form Left=9600
Mailbox Status Form Top=90
Mailbox Status Form Left=7020
Mailbox Status Form Height=6225
Main Form Width=6675
Port Form Height=5000
Port Form Width=2400
Port Form Loaded=False
Mailbox Status Form Loaded=True
Caller ID Form Top=2115
Caller ID Form Left=840
Caller ID Form Loaded=True
** This section is not to be modified. Indicates the default size of the different screens.
[MAPI Information]
Username=
Indicates the Username of the User.
Password=
Indicates the Password of the User.
Profile=
Indicates the user profile of the User. Usually same as Username.
Integration with Mapi=Yes
Indicates whether or not MAPI is being used.
Choices are Yes, No
Mapi Mode=Ole
Choices are Ole, Standard.
?
Standard mode applies if Perfect Guest Messaging is used for standard MAPI. Ole mode applies only if
Outlook Player is being used with Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Exchange.
[Fax Settings]
Path for Fax Drivers=C:\FAXDLL
Indicates the default directory where the fax drivers are located.
System CSID=Perfect Guest Messaging
Indicates the System ID.
Number of Log Entries to Delete=25
Indicates the number of old log entries to delete, starting from the oldest date.
Fax Mail Installed=Yes
Indicates whether or not fax mail is installed.
Choices are Yes, No
I&M
File and Path for Fax Viewer=C:\WINDOWS\FAXVIEW.EXE
Indicates the system path and filename where the Fax Viewer is located.
[Voice Mail Extensions]
Extension Connected to Port 1=17
Extension Connected to Port 2=18
Extension Connected to Port 3=19
Extension Connected to Port 4=20
`(etc... for each port in the system)
Indicates the extension numbers assigned to the ports.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

32
Appendix
[Caller ID Ports]
Line Connected to Caller ID Port 1=1
Line Connected to Caller ID Port 2=2
Line Connected to Caller ID Port 3=3
Line Connected to Caller ID Port 4=5
Line Connected to Caller ID Port 5=7
Line Connected to Caller ID Port 6=8
Indicates the line number assigned to each Caller ID port.
[Local Area Paging]
Integration with LAP=Yes
Indicates whether or not the voice mail system is integrated to perform Local Area Paging.
Choices are Yes, No
Com Port to use for LAP=1
Indicates the COM Port to use for Local Area Paging.
Choices are 1,2
LAP Port Settings=9600,N,8,1
Indicates the LAP settings for the port.
Settings are Baud Rate, Parity, Databits, Stopbits
[Fax Board Extensions]
Extension Connected to Fax Port 1=21
Extension Connected to Fax Port 2=
Extension Connected to Fax Port 3=
Extension Connected to Fax Port 4=
`(etc... up to 12 ports)
Indicates the extension numbers of each fax port.
[AMIS Settings]
AMIS Installed=Yes
?
Indicates whether or not AMIS is installed on the voice mail system.
Choices are Yes, No
AMIS Initial Delay=3
Indicates the number of seconds to ignore the C tone that AMIS sends.
[Dealer Information]
Dealer Name=Your Dealer
Indicates Dealer Name to display in help file.
Contact Name=Your Name
Indicates Contact Name to display in help file.
Technical Support Number=Your Number
Indicates telephone number to display in help file where users can call for technical support.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
33
[PMS Settings]
PMS Installed=Yes
Indicates whether or not a Property Management System is installed.
Choices are Yes, No
Com Port Used with PMS=Com2
Indicates the Com Port to use for PMS.
Choices are Com1, Com2
Pms Com Port Settings=2400,E,7,1
Indicates the Com Port Settings to configure PMS for.
Settings are Baud Rate, Parity, Databits, Stopbits
PMS Mode=
Indicates the mode to use for PMS.
Choices are File (use shared directory), Serial (use Com Settings)
PMS Type=Centigram
Indicates the type of serial port protocol to use.
PMS Shared Directory=
Works with File mode (under PMS mode above) to indicate the Shared Directory to use.
PMS Checkout Messages Destination=
Works in hotel situations. Upon checkout, messages that are still present in the mailbox are moved to a
phantom mailbox that starts with the above value and ends with the mailbox number.
(i.e. If value is 7 and mailbox is 202, messages that are current upon checkout are moved to 7202)
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

34
Appendix
D
Troubleshooting
This section offers useful methods to diagnose and solve system and software problems. You should read over
this section to familiarize yourself with the type of problems encountered and what should be done to correct
them. This section is divided into subsections that contain similar or related problems for easy referencing.
How to Effectively Troubleshoot Problems
1. Investigate the problem and identify what systems are working and what systems are not.
· Is the computer hardware working?
· When did the problem happen?
· What happened?
· Was there a power surge?
· Did the system crash?
2. Now that you have an idea where the problem is, look under the related sub-section for corrective action
relevant to your particular problem.
Sub-sections:
· System Hardware (peripherals)
· Set Up
· System Software
· Perfect Guest Messaging Access Problems
?
· System Administrator Problems
· User Problems
· Caller Problems
· Messages
· Perfect Guest Messaging features
· Mailboxes
· Class of Services
· Notification
· Reports
NOTE: It is possible that the solution to your problem may be found under several sub-sections. This allows I&M
for easier problem solution.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
35
System Hardware (Peripherals)
Message waiting lights do not work:
· Check on the Mailbox Class of Service screen to be sure that the Msg Light option has been selected in
the Notification field.
· Check that Parameters 167 and 168 have the appropriate dial string entered for your telephone system.
Refer to your telephone system documentation or contact your dealer for more information about the
message waiting light dial string.
· If using SMDI integration, verify that parameters 167 and 168 are blank.
Power Failure:
· The system is designed to run the REORGanization program in the event of a power failure.
· You should run the REORG option every time a power failure occurs because data file corruption can
occur during a power failure. REORG clears any problems experienced.
Set Up
System reboots when trying to load Windows 95 Software or the Windows 95 logo page
remains constantly on the screen:
· Ensure that the sentinel is properly connected.
· Reboot the computer and when you see "Starting Windows 95"
· Press the F8 key. A screen appears and gives you several choices, select step by step procedure. Answer
Y to all questions. Look to see that all drivers are being loaded correctly. If you have a fax on demand
system make sure I3LOAD.DRV has loaded. If you are using Rhetorex or Dialogic voice boards make
sure they are loading correctly.
?
Perfect Guest Messaging Access Problems
Fields and buttons will not respond:
· Ensure that you are logged on, press F11 and enter the System Administrator password (Default
password - 9999) and press <ENTER>.
· Use the <TAB> and <SHIFT-TAB> keys to move through the fields.
· Use the mouse to point to a field and click the mouse button to select choice.
I&M
Cannot select items with brackets [ ] or parentheses ( ):
· Use the <TAB> or <SHIFT-TAB> keys to move to the field with brackets or parentheses. Use the
<SPACEBAR> to toggle the choice on or off.
· Items in a list with parentheses ( ), allow only one choice to be made. However, items in a list with
brackets [ ], allow any number of choices to be made (including - all or none).
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

36
Appendix
Cannot exit Perfect Guest Messaging:
· Press F12 to log off. Then press Alt+F and S to shutdown..
· Select Wait for End of Activity or <ALT-W> and press <ENTER> to exit Perfect Guest Messaging .
This selection waits until all ports are free before shutting down. This ensures that callers will not be cut-
off.
DTMFs are not being detected by the system
· If the system is not detecting DTMFs during internal functions, it is possible that the parameters
controlling the length or edge detection may be set incorrectly. The following Channel-Internal
Parameters - 064, 065, and 066 control the internal DTMF signals. Refer to the Installation section for
more details on the parameters or contact your dealer.
· If the system is not detecting DTMFs during external functions, it is possible that the parameters
controlling the length, edge detection may be set incorrectly. The following Channel-External
Parameters - 104, 105, and 106 control the external DTMF signals. Refer to the Installation section for
more details on the parameters or contact your dealer.
· If your system is not recognizing the * or the # tones from a touch tone telephone , the telephone system
that you are using may reserve these for other services, such a call waiting. If this is the case, refer to
Auto Attendant Parameters - 150 and 151, which control the alternate star and alternate pound
parameters respectively. Refer to the Installation section for more details on the parameters or contact
your dealer.
System Administrator Problems
Fields and buttons will not respond on main menu:
· Ensure that you are Logged on by pressing F11 and the System Administrator password (Default
?
password - 9999) and press <ENTER>.
· Another System Administrator may have changed the password or the password may have been
forgotten. Please contact your dealer for support.
System Administrator cannot change password:
· Enter old password when you Log On.
· Click the Parameters button
· Select the Auto Attendant tab.
· Update Parameter 146 with the NEW password.
I&M
· Press <ENTER>.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
37
User Problems
User cannot gain access to own mailbox:
· Dial into User's mailbox and enter User's password (Default - 1111).
· If the user is told that the password is invalid, try one more time in case there was an entry error.
· If password is invalid or the user simply forgot the password, the System Administrator can re-enter the
password or re-set the password to 1111 and allow the individual to set his/her own password.
There are no greetings:
· The individual must enter his/her own greetings. If this is the first time that a user has used the system,
the System Administrator should set the Tutorial On field to on in the Parameters section of the
Mailbox screen. This allows the user to hear sample greetings to record and to familiarize themself with
the recording procedure.
Receiving short-blank messages in mailbox:
§ Adjust the Silence Detection parameter [#174] on the Disconnect Parameters tab.
§ Adjust the Minimum Message Length parameter [#160] to be greater than or equal to the Silence
Detection parameter.
NOTE: Do not set #160 too high or you may lose short messages.
Caller Problems
Callers are being disconnected:
· The system may interpret the caller's voice as a dial tone if there is a lot of background noise or
?
interference. The Parameter - 175 on the Disconnect Parameters tab controls the amount of noise to be
interpreted as a disconnect signal. Try increasing this value. DEFAULT=4sec.
NOTE: You can also set this value to zero, which records everything. This is dangerous because if a caller
hangs up you will record a dial tone or a fast busy signal for the maximum length of message.
Callers are informed that the mailbox is full:
· On the Class of Service screen, increase the Max Messages field to allow a larger number of messages
to be stored.
· It is also possible that this mailbox has a great number of saved messages that are consuming this
mailbox's memory space. Check to see that these old messages are erased. This can be done over the I&M
telephone.
· If you have recently (today) erased a large number of messages, these messages are still stored in system
memory until the system reorganizes the mailboxes, which it does every night. To purge all erased
messages, go to System-Utilities-Reorg and press Start. When you are asked if you want unattached
messages deleted, select Yes. When prompted about Reports, select No. This will purge all erased
messages and restart the system.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

38
Appendix
Messages
Cannot save messages:
· The Storage section on the Class of Service screen for the mailbox may not be set properly. The Days
To Save Old field may be set to zero (0). If so, increase this value.
· It is also possible that this mailbox has a great number of saved messages that are consuming this
mailbox's memory space. Check to see that these old messages are erased. This can be done over the
telephone.
Mailbox is full:
· The Storage section on the Class of Service screen may not be set properly. You may wish to increase
the Max Message field.
· It is also possible that this mailbox has a great number of saved messages that are consuming this
mailbox's memory space. Check to see that these old messages are erased. This can be done over the
telephone.
· If you have recently (today) erased a large number of messages, these messages are still stored in the
systems memory until the system reorganizes the mailboxes, which it does every night. To purge all
erased messages, go to System-Utilities-Reorg and press Start. When you are asked if you want
unattached messages deleted, select Yes. When prompted about Reports, select No. This will purge all
erased messages and restart the system.
Receiving short-blank messages in mailbox:
· Adjust the Silence Detection parameter [#173].
· Adjust the Minimum Message Length parameter [#159] to be greater than or equal to the Silence
Detection parameter.
NOTE: Do not set #160 too high or you may lose short messages.
?
Message confirmation does not work:
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Mailbox Options section on the Mailbox Class of Service
screen.
Message waiting lights do not work:
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Notification section on the Mailbox Class of Service
screen.
· Check the codes on the Message Lights tab in Parameters.
I&M
· If using SMDI integration, the codes should be blank.
Message playback has loud static:
· Check to see if the voxformat line is set to RHET32. There is a voxformat statement in the following
files: perfect.ini on the Perfect Guest Messaging system, pvodesk.ini and pvxxxx.ini (where xxxx=the
mailbox number) on the workstations.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
39
Perfect Guest Messaging Features
Fields and buttons will not respond on main menu:
· Ensure that you are logged on press F11 and enter the System Administrator password (Default
password - 9999) and press <enter>.
· Another System Administrator may have changed the password or the password may have been
forgotten. Contact your dealer for support.
Cannot exit Perfect Guest Messaging :
· Choose the File from the MAIN screen Select Shut Down, and click on it.
· Select Wait for End of Activity or <ALT-W> and press <ENTER> to exit Perfect Guest Messaging .
This selection waits until all ports are free before shutting down. This ensures that callers will not be cut-
off.
Message waiting lights do not work:
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Notification section on the Mailbox Class of Service
screen.
· Check the Message Light On/Off codes on the Message Lights tab in Parameters. If you are using SMDI
integration, the codes should be left blank.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

40
Appendix
Mailboxes
User cannot gain access to own mailbox:
· Dial into user's mailbox and enter user's password (Default - 1111).
· If the user is told that the password is invalid, try one more time in case there was an entry error.
· If password is invalid or the user simply forgot the password, the System Administrator can re-enter the
password or reset the password to 1111 and allow the individual to set his/her own password.
· The System Administrator should ensure that the new password is working for that particular mailbox.
There are no greetings:
· The individual must enter his/her own greetings. If this is the first time that a user has used the system,
the System Administrator should set the Tutorial On field to on in the Parameters section of the
Mailbox screen. This allows the user to hear sample greetings to record and to familiarize themself with
the recording procedure.
Call forwarding does not work:
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Transfer Options section on the Class of Service screen.
Distribution lists are not working:
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Mailbox Options section on the Class of Service screen.
Paging is not working:
· Check to see that one of these options (Pre-Trans. Page or Post-Trans. Page) is activated in the
Transfer Options section on the Class of Service screen or the Transfer Options tab on the Mailbox
?
screen. This option refers to internal voice paging through the telephone speaker, not to be confused with
paging a beeper.
Receiving short-blank messages in mailbox:
· Adjust the Silence Detection parameter [#174] on the Disconnect Parameters tab.
· Adjust the Minimum Message Length parameter [#160] to be greater than or equal to the Silence
Detection parameter.
NOTE: Do not set #160 too high or you may lose short messages.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
41
Class of Services
Call queuing does not work:
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Transfer Options section on the Mailbox Class of Service
screen.
Call screening does not work:
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Transfer Options section on the Mailbox Class of Service
screen.
Distribution lists do not work:
· Check to see that this option is activated in the Mailbox Options section on the Mailbox Class of Service
screen.
Notification
Beeper is not working:
· When entering the telephone number of the beeper in the notification section, add a few pauses (,) after
the number. This allows time for the paging company's greeting to play before sending the message.
Reports
Reports will not print:
?
· From the main menu, choose REPORTS and ensure that the reports are initialized to be sent to the
printer (LPT1) and the FILE option is off.
· Check to make sure that the printer is turned on, is on line, and has enough paper to print.
· Check the sentinel key and printer cable connection.
Reports will not save on disk:
· From the main menu, choose REPORTS and ensure that the reports are initialized to be written to a file
(FILE option is on) and the LPT1 option is off.
· Ensure that you have used a valid drive name and valid file name.
I&M
· Be sure that the disk you are using is formatted and not write protected, in the appropriate drive, and that
the drive door is closed and the disk has `clicked' into place.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

42
Appendix
E
Adding AudioBoards to Perfect Guest
Messaging
WARNING:
When handling audio boards, wear a grounding wrist strap to control static electricity.
Failure to control static electricity may cause damage to the electronic device.
Please see Section relating to your particular audioboard. Detailed configuration instructions are included for
Rhetorex and Dialogic Boards.
1. Unplug the PC and any peripherals connected to the system.
2. Position the PC to have easy access to the rear or the side.
3. Remove the screws on the rear or front of the PC with a screwdriver or other appropriate tools.
4. Slide the cover directly away from the rear of the PC until it has cleared the face of the unit. Tilt the
cover and remove it.
5. Insert the board into the expansion slots by holding the board at the top of each corner. Apply equal
?
pressure to both sides of the board, and push down firmly to seat the board. The board should easily slide
down. If you experience any difficulties, check the alignment of the board.
6. Fasten the board's metal bracket with the screw previously removed. Make sure the RJ-14 jacks are
accessible from the rear of the PC Unit before securing the board.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
43
F
Adding Rhetorex Audio Boards
The models discussed in this section include the Quartet and Duet, 432 and 232, and the 21xx and 41xx
models. All models function identically. There is, however, a limitation on the number of Quartets and Duets
that can be installed. Also included is a discussion on Rhetorex's Accucall call analysis software.
Configuring the Rhetorex Audio Board(s)
Your audio board(s) contain jumpers that must be configured properly to operate with Perfect Guest
Messaging.
Check your PC manual to determine an available I/O address. All Rhetorex boards are shipped pre-configured
with a default address of 300 hex. This address should be satisfactory for a first board in a Perfect Guest
Messaging system.
Duet and Quartet Series
This half-length card comes in a 2-Port (Duet) and a 4-Port (Quartet) model. These cards do not have any
jumpers. The I/O Address coded to the board is 300H. There is a limit of one (1) Duet or Quartet board per
Perfect Guest Messaging system. However, if you wish to add more ports to your system that has a Quartet or
Duet board, you must use either 232/432 boards or 21xx/41xx boards.
RHETOREX
Duet and
?
Quartet
Duet and Quartet Series Rhetorex board
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

44
Appendix
232 and 432 Series
This half-length card comes in a 2-Port (232) and a 4-Port (432) model. The board has one bank of jumpers
that configure the I/O Address of each particular board. The Default setting is 300H. To configure alternate
addresses, please refer to the I/O Address Jumper Setting chart on the following page. The only limitation to
the number of 232/432 audio boards that you can install is the number of available expansion slots in your
PC. Typically, there is room for six (6) audio cards in a standard 386 or 486 PC. Please refer to your PC
documentation for more information on available expansion slots.
RHETOREX
232 and
432
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
232 and 432 Series Rhetorex board
21xx and 41xx Series
This full-length card comes in a 2-Port (21xx) and a 4-Port (41xx) model. The board has one bank of jumpers
that configure the I/O Address of each particular board. The Default setting is 300H. All features and
configuration for these audio boards are the same as the 232/432 Series. Please refer to the discussion on 232
and 432 audio boards for configuration instructions.
RHETOREX
?
2132 and
4132
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
21xx and 41xx Series Rhetorex board
BASE I/O
JUMPERS OPEN
First board (Default)
300 Hex
8,9
I&M
Second board
301 Hex
0,8,9
Third board
302 Hex
1,8,9
Fourth board
303 Hex
0,1,8,9
Fifth board
304 Hex
2,8,9
Sixth board
305 Hex
0,2,8,9
To determine other base I/O addresses once the software is installed, type SHOWJUMP from the
C:\WINVM> prompt. If you need to remove the Rhetorex driver from memory, type RDSPEXIT from the
C:\WINVM> prompt.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
45
Define the Settings Selected in the System Configuration Utility
When the board settings are complete, you need to define the settings you selected in the System
Configuration Utility. Refer to Voice Board Settings in Appendix 2.
If Telephone System is Not Defined in Software: Perform Call Analysis
Skip this section if the telephone system was defined in the Perfect Guest Messaging software,
If the auto attendant feature of Perfect Guest Messaging is used or it will be outdialing, the Perfect Guest
Messaging system must recognize the different tones produced by the telephone system. This is the only way
that the system knows whether a line has been answered or is busy. If the telephone system is not included in
the Perfect Guest Messaging software, you must run the call analysis program.
Accucall Plus, by Rhetorex, uses at least one extension on the telephone system for testing. Be sure that this
extension is a straight connection to the telephone system with absolutely no features. These features
include: Hunt (or Rollover) Groups, which means if the extension is busy the switch will hunt (or rollover)
for the next available extension; Call Forwarding, which is a feature offered by telephone companies, where
a call can be transferred to another telephone number; Call Waiting, another feature offered by the telephone
company, which does not produce a busy signal for the caller and produces a new tone for the called party; or
any Auto Answer features including answering machines or other answering services. The telephone line
should not be in use by any other calls for the duration of the call analysis.
1. To run the Rhetorex's Accucall Plus program, from the C:\WINVM> prompt type RHETDRV and
press <enter> to load the Rhetorex audio driver. NOTE: IF you have already booted with Rhetorex
setup, skip to step 2.
2. Type ACCUCALL ACCUCALL.TON and press <enter>. Accucall Plus begins with a Main Menu
screen.
?
I&M
Accucall Plus Main Menu Screen
3. To proceed to the Setup screen press <F5> Key.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

46
Appendix
4. In the RUN/AUTO RUN PARAMETERS section of the Setup screen it is necessary to change two of
these settings. Use the up and down arrow keys to look through the selections.
· Hardware Interrupt: Ensure that this value is set to 5.
· Out Dial Channel Number: This can be changed to any number up to and including the
highest port number. For example, on a four port system channel 1, 2, 3, or 4 may be chosen for
the Out Dial Channel Number.
NOTE: This channel number must be the channel that is setup to run the Call Analysis on. If unsure
which line was selected, refer to "Connecting Telephone Lines" section in this manual or refer to the
Rhetorex Documentation.
5. Save these settings by pressing the <F7> Key.
6. Proceed to the Auto Run procedure by pressing the <F6> Key.
?
Auto Run Screen
7. Enter the extension number of the telephone in the Out Dial Number Field of the parameters section on
this screen.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
47
8. Leave the receiver on-hook at the extension being used for testing and start the auto run procedure to
detect the ring signal by pressing the <F9> Key. The cadence of the signal is displayed in the
CADENCE DETECTED window of this screen.
Auto Run Screen
When complete, you see a pop-up. Press F8 to add the tone, any key to abort.
9. When the Auto Run sequence is complete you should edit this tone. Press <F8> to Add Tones.
Edit Tones Screen
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

48
Appendix
10. There are several parameters to change on the "Edit Tones" screen:
PARAMETER
NAME
Give this signal a name that represents the signal. The name of the telephone
system should be included when naming this signal.
For example, if your telephone system is a Teleco UST 1280DK and the signal
that you just captured was a Ring signal, you should name this signal Teleco
UST 1280DK Ring.
TYPE
To chose the type of tone, use the <space bar> to look through the choices to
select the type of tone. There are only five choices...
· Busy1 (normal busy signal)
· Busy2 (double busy signal)
· Ring1 (normal ring signal)
· Ring2 (double ring signal)
· Other
Normally in North America we only have a BUSY1 and a RING1 signal. Both
of these signals will be displayed similar to the RING1 signal as it appears in
the CADENCE window of the EDIT TONES screen above.
TERMINATING
Use the <space> bar to select either yes or no for the terminating field. Normally
this setting is left alone (NO). A terminating tone is a tone from the telephone
system that is used to terminate a call. It may be necessary to designate the fast
busy signal as a terminating signal on some telephone systems. If a signal is
designated as terminating, at least one of the frequencies must appear in the
FREQUENCY1 or FREQUENCY2 fields. Also, this value must be added to
the FILTERS table in one of the first three positions.
?
CADENCE
Use the <space> Bar to select either yes or no for the cadence field. If the word
NONE appears in both the FREQUENCY1 and the FREQUENCY2 fields
then chose YES. This allows the signal to be identified by its cadence when the
frequencies are unknown. If the frequencies are known then select NO for the
cadence.
FREQUENCY1 and
There must be a minimum of 40Hz. between these frequencies. If there is not,
FREQUENCY2
adjust both frequencies equally to achieve this span. If the tones are less than or
equal to 10Hz. Apart, increase the lower value to equal the higher value.
PCPM CODE
This is a numeric identifier for the tone. Enter a value of 7 for all busy tones
and a value of 8 for all ring tones. NOTE: If the tone is undefined, the device
driver will send back a code 9, and if an answer is detected, the device driver
returns with code 10. A value of 31 indicates terminating.
I&M
ON MAX
These values are tolerance levels that accommodate slight variation in the on-
VARIANCE and ON
time of the signals. This value should be increased to the next highest value.
MIN VARIANCE
OFF MAX
The values, like the previous values, are tolerance levels that accommodate
VARIANCE and
slight variances in the off-time of the signals. This value should be increased to
OFF MIN
the next highest value.
VARIANCE
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
49
11. Press <F8> to add this tone and then press <F8> again to save the tone. Press <F10> to go to the Main
Menu.
12. Take the receiver off-hook and repeat steps 6 through 12 for the busy tone of this telephone. The
extension number remains the same for this telephone .
13. Repeat steps 6 through 12 for all other telephone devices and signals until all tones have been identified.
When all the tones have been captured, proceed to the FILTERS screen by pressing <F10> to return to
the AUTO RUN screen then <F10> to return to the MAIN MENU. Press <F3> to enter the FILTERS
screen, which is illustrated below.
?
Filters screen
14. All the frequencies that were detected during the call analysis now appear in the UNDEFINED TONE
FREQUENCIES box on this screen. All of these frequencies must be added to the FILTERS box on this
screen. Before adding to the Filters screen, ensure that there is a 40Hz. difference between all
frequencies. If not you should return to the EDIT TONES screen to make any needed adjustments to
these frequencies. Refer to Step 10 (Frequency 1 and Frequency 2) for more information on these
frequencies.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

50
Appendix
15. When all filter frequencies have been entered into the FILTERS box, test that all tones are recognized by
running the program. Press <F2> to enter the RUN screen, shown below.
Run Screen 1
16. To test the BUSY1 signal, enter the extension number in the OUT DIAL NUMBER and then press
<F9>. A PCPM code of 7 for the busy signal should be received. The RUN screen should give results
like those shown in the Run Screen 2.
?
I&M
Run Screen 2
17. Run this analysis for all types of signals. Entering the extension number in the OUT DIAL NUMBER
and testing the ring and busy ensures that the system will run properly. NOTE:
If any of these tones
return with a PCPM code - 9 then the tone is undefined. Refer to steps 6 to 15 in this section.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
51
18. TERMINATION TONES: These tones are important because the system must know when to terminate
a call. There are several forms and functions of termination tones. These types are explained below
followed by programming instructions for the Accucall Plus settings.
· A regular busy tone can be used as a termination tone if you want the system to hang-up when it
hears this tone. Edit this tone in the EDIT TONES screen and set the TERMINATING field to
YES by moving to the field with the arrow up or down keys and looking the field with the <space>
bar.
· If the termination tone is a tone other than the busy signal (i.e. - fast busy), use the AUTO RUN
screen to learn the tone. In the EDIT TONES screen, set the TERMINATING field to YES, set
the PCPMCODE field to 31, and set the TYPE field to OTHER.
· If the termination code is a fast busy or a re-order (dial) tone, you can set the Auto Run Quick
Frequency Scan field in the SETUP screen to YES and run the AUTO RUN section of Accucall
Plus to capture these two frequencies.
· If the termination tone is a solid or a "D" tone (which is a tone sent by some telephone systems that
is similar to the DTMF tones on the touch tone telephone ), it does not need to be analyzed by
Accucall. Enter a value of "D" in Parameter 180 - HANG-UP STRING in Perfect Guest
Messaging's Parameter Section. Refer to your telephone system documentation for more information
on the disconnect codes.
NOTE: Any frequency used for a TERMINATING tone MUST appear first in the FILTERS box on the
FILTERS screen.
19. When all the tones have been analyzed and tested, save this file. Return to the Main Menu by pressing
?
<F10> . Then press <F7> to go to the FILE screen. Give this file a name relevant to the type of
telephone system (i.e. - ATTPARTN.TON).
20. Press <F8> to Save, <F10> to Exit Accucall Plus, and Y (yes) to confirm.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

52
Appendix
21. At the C:\WINVM> prompt type CONFIGUR then press <enter>. The following menu appears.
Configure Screen
22. Press <F4>. Then type the filename selected in step 19 (i.e. - ATTPARTN.TON). and press <enter>.
Then press <F10> to return to the Configure screen.
23. Verify that the following information is correct on this screen.
· All PORT values are correct for each audio board installed. The first RDSP value should be set to
300H for the first audio board. If there is more than one audio board, the RDSP values will be 301H
?
for the second, 302H for the third, and so on. The remaining RDSP values should be left blank.
· In the SYMBOLS box, ensure that the ENTRYPOINT field is set to 66H.
· In the MEMORY box, the REALMORY field should be set for 32KB for every audio board
installed. For example, if the system is using two (2) - four port boards, it will require 64KB of
REALMEMORY. Leave the EMSMEMORY and the RAMDISK values set to 0KB.
24. When satisfied with the settings of the CONFIGURE screen, press <F10> to EXIT the program and
then press Y (yes) to save the changes.
I&M
25. Type EXIT to go back to the Windows Desktop screen.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
53
G
Adding Dialogic Audio Boards
The Dialogic boards discussed in this section include the following models: D/41D, D/42-SX, D/42-SL, and
D/42-NS. All boards have the same basic features described in the D/41D Board Description. The other three
boards have special features that are unique to each board. These features are outlined in the description for
each individual board.
Dialogic Audio Boards
D/4xD Board Description
D/4xD board includes the following capabilities on up to 4 channels:
· Record, digitize, and compress audio in real time.
· Play back previously recorded files.
· Generate and detect DTMF tones.
· Initiate and receive calls through the loop start telephone interface.
· Perform Call Progress Analysis for outbound dialing.
On the D/4xD board, the factory defaults are as follows:
Board Component
Function
Default
?
JP5,JP6
Base Memory Address Segment
D000H
SW1
Offset Address
0000H
JP1
Interrupt Level
IRQ 3
JP7
Multiple Audio Board Installation
Single
NOTE: For information regarding configuration of jumpers and switches, please see the detailed description
of each function later in this chapter. All Dialogic boards contain the same Board Components.
I&M
P2
P3
JP8
DIALOGIC
JP6 JP5
Address switch
SW1
D/4xD
JP1
JP7
Dialogic D/4xD Audio Board
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

54
Appendix
D/42-SX Board Description
D/42-SX is specifically designed to connect directly to a MITEL SUPERSET Line Circuit Card in a MITEL
PBX. The D42-SX board has all the capabilities as the D/4xD board, plus additional capabilities to access
enhanced PBX features:
· Call transfer / conference.
· Turn on, off, or toggle telephone message waiting indicators.
· Call back request.
· Calling number identification (Calling Number ID).
On the D/42-SX board, the factory defaults are as follows:
Board Component
Function
Default
JP5,JP6
Base Memory Address Segment
D000H
SW1
Offset Address
0000H
JP1
Interrupt Level
IRQ 2
JP7
Multiple Audio Board Installation
Single
NOTE: For information regarding configuration of jumpers and switches, please see detailed description of
each Function later in this chapter. All Dialogic boards contain the same Board Components.
DIALOGIC
?
D/42-SX
Address switch
JP6 JP5
SW1
JP1
JP7
Dialogic D/42-SX Audio Board
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
55
D/42-SL Board Description
D/42-SL is specifically designed to connect directly to a NORTHERN TELECOM PBX through a line circuit
card. The D42-SL board has all the capabilities as the D/4xD board, plus additional capabilities to access
enhanced PBX features:
· Call transfer.
· Turn telephone message waiting indicators on or off.
· Calling number identification (Calling Number ID).
On the D/42-SL board, the factory defaults are as follows:
Board Component
Function
Default
JP5,JP6
Base Memory Address Segment
D000H
SW1
Offset Address
0000H
JP1
Interrupt Level
IRQ 2
JP7
Multiple Audio Board Installation
Single
NOTE: For information regarding configuration of jumpers and switches, please see detailed description of
each Function later in this chapter. All Dialogic boards contain the same Board Components.
DIALOGIC
D/42-SL
?
Address switch
JP6 JP5
SW1
JP1
JP7
Dialogic D/42-SL Audio Board
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

56
Appendix
D/42-NS Board Description
D/42-NS is specifically designed to connect directly to a NORTHERN TELECOM NORSTAR KSU Software
release DR5. The D42-SL board has all the capabilities as the D/4xD board, plus additional capabilities to
access enhanced PBX features:
· Call transfer.
· Turn telephone message waiting indicators on or off.
· Receive called party identification.
· Receive positive disconnect supervision
On the D/42-NS board, the factory defaults are as follows:
Board Component
Function
Default
JP5,JP6
Base Memory Address Segment
D000H
SW1
Offset Address
0000H
JP1
Interrupt Level
IRQ 3
JP7
Multiple Audio Board Installation
Single
NOTE: For information regarding configuration of jumpers and switches, please see detailed description of
each Function later in this chapter. All Dialogic boards contain the same Board Components.
Address switch
SW1
?
DIALOGIC
D/42-NS
JP1, JP2, JP3, JP4
Dialogic D/42-NS Audio Board
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
57
Configuring Dialogic Boards
The jumpers JP1, JP5, JP6, JP7 and SW1 dip switch must be configured before the Dialogic board(s) is
installed. See relative positions of the switches and jumpers below.
Setting the Interrupt Level (JP1)
Find the JP1 jumper block from the Board Diagrams above. To configure the jumper block, choose from
interrupt levels 2 through 7. Recommended levels are 3, 5, and 7. JP1 should be set to IRQ5. Typically, the
interrupt levels for a PC are set as follows:
IRQ - 3 = COM1
IRQ - 4 = COM2
IRQ - 5 = LPT2
IRQ - 6 = FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
IRQ - 7 = LPT1
NOTE: Make note of the IRQ settings selected because this information is needed during the installation of
Perfect Guest Messaging software.
The IRQ settings are positioned from left to right, 2 being the left-most position. Here is an example of an
interrupt level 7 setting:
?
2
3
4
5
6
7
Interrupt Setting on Jumper JP1
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

58
Appendix
Setting the Base Memory Address (JP5 and JP6)
Select the base memory address segment by installing (Closed) or removing (Open) jumpers JP5 and JP6. All
Dialogic audio boards have a factory default setting of D000H. The other choices of address segments include
the A000H segment, which is typically used for VGA, and the C000H segment. Refer to the table below for
appropriate base memory jumper settings.
NOTE: Do not change the Default factory setting of D000H unless one of the following conditions apply:
· More than eight (8) D/4xD boards are installed in the PC.
· Other device drivers are already using the D000H segment.
Jumper JP5
Jumper JP6
Base Memory Address
Open
Open
D000H (Default)
Closed
Open
A000H
Open
Closed
C000H
Base Memory Address Jumper Settings
Multiple Audio Board Installation (JP7)
Use the following guidelines to determine whether the Interrupt Termination jumper, JP7, should be installed
(closed) or removed (open):
· If ONLY one (1) Dialogic audio board will be installed in the PC, jumper JP7 MUST be closed.
· If more than one (1) Dialogic audio board will be installed in the PC, jumper JP7 MUST be open on
?
all boards except the first board. This means that only one (1) board will have jumper JP7 installed.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
59
Setting the Offset Address (SW1)
The Dialogic board and the PC communicate with each other through a shared memory block that sits in the
memory address of the PC. Altering the first three dip switches of SW1 may modify the physical address
offset where the memory block is located. The SW1 switch on the Dialogic board has four dip switches. Refer
to the specific board diagram earlier in this section to locate the SW1 dip switch.
Switch Position
Board# Offset Address-SW1 BASE(Hex)
1
0000
(Factory Setting)
2
2000
3
4000
4
6000
5
8000
6
A000
7
C000
8
E000
First three positions of SW1 dip switch
?
The fourth position of the SW1 dip switch must always be configured "off-hook" as shown below.
tion
Line
State
"on-hook"
(no answer)
"off-hook"
(busy)
Fourth position of SW1 dip switch
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

60
Appendix
If Telephone System is Not Defined in Software: Perform Call Analysis
Skip this section and the PBXpert section if the telephone system was defined in the Perfect Guest Messaging
software.
The following procedure is a `Quick-Start' procedure that loads the diagnostic software and runs all tests on
the Dialogic audio boards installed in the PC. For a more in-depth explanation of the D40CHK diagnostic
software, please refer to the Dialogic Manuals.
Be sure that the following has been completed before running D40CHK:
· All audio boards have been configured properly and installed in the PC.
· Perfect Guest Messaging software has been installed.
1. From the C:\WINVM> prompt, load the Dialogic driver by typing D40DRV and press <Enter>.
2. Load the diagnostic software by typing D40CHK and press <Enter>.
3. Chose the boards, test selections, and the test options. Use the arrow keys on the numeric keypad to move
the cursor and use the spacebar to enable or disable menu items (Enabled items have a "" next to them).
4. Move the cursor to START DIAGNOSTICS and press <Enter>.
NOTE: Do NOT select Loopback Test from the test selection menu unless you have a solid understanding
of the hardware required for this test. For more information on the Loopback Test, refer to the Dialogic
Manual.
?
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
61
PBXpert
PBXpert is a learning tool that enables a Dialogic audio board to "listen" to call progress tones, measure their
frequency and cadence (called tone definitions), and store these measured values in a tone set. A tone set is a
group of five tone definitions for dial, ringback, busy, reorder, and disconnect with a specified name. After a
tone set is learned, it can be saved by itself in a tone set file (TSF), or included with other existing tone set
from another TSF.
PBXpert by Dialogic, uses two extensions on the telephone system for testing. Be sure that the extensions are
straight connections to the telephone system with absolutely no features. These features include: Hunt (or
Rollover) Groups, which means if the extension is busy the switch will hunt (or rollover) for the next
available extension; Call Forwarding, which is a feature offered by telephone companies, where a call can be
transferred to another telephone number; Call Waiting, another feature offered by the telephone company,
which does not produce a busy signal for the caller and produces a new tone for the called party; or any Auto
Answer features including answering machines or other answering services. The telephone lines should not
be in use by any other calls for the duration of the call analysis.
Load the Audio Drivers with a G150 Switch:
In order to use PBXpert to learn the telephone systems progress tones, a Dialogic audio board must be
installed and the drivers loaded. Please note that in order to run the PBXpert, the audio drivers must be
loaded with a -G150 switch. To do this:
· Edit the d40loadr.bat file located in the WINVM directory. Set the D40DRV line to:
d40drv -i66 -h5 -sd000/d1ff -g150
where:
d40drv is the driver for the Dialogic audio board
-i66 specifies the entry point
-h5 specifies the interrupt level of the audio board
?
-sd000/d1ff specifies the memory segment that the audio board uses for its TSR programs
NOTE: One 4-Port board requires 1FFh of memory to load the TSRs; hence, the address shown
above {d000/d1ff) is enough memory to load one 4-Port board and the -g150 must be added in order
to run PBXpert.
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

62
Appendix
Start PBXpert:
Once the audio board drivers have been loaded, start PBXpert.
· Type PBXPERT at the WINVM prompt and press <Enter>. A screen appears similar to the one shown
below.
PBXpert Main Screen
· From the Config menu, select Setup. Verify IRQ setting is 5.
· From the File menu, select "New".
· From the Learn menu, select "Learn New".
· Enter the Make and Model of the telephone system tones to learn. In this example, it is the Mitel SX2000
telephone system.
?
Tone Set Name
Now it is required to enter information that the PBXpert needs to learn the telephone system call progress
tones.
I&M
PBXpert Learn Screen
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
63
The definitions of the PBXpert Learn Screen fields are listed below. The default values for PBXpert, shown
above, should be adequate for most telephone systems. The only information that you should need to enter is
the Dialing Prefix/Extension and Phone Number fields. If dialing internally, only the Dialing
Prefix/Extension should need to be entered. Enter the extension number connected to port-2.
Dialing Prefix/Extension
This field contains any characters that must precede a telephone number, such as a long distance dialing
prefix (e.g., "1"). You may also use this field to enter an extension to dial when learning PBX tones. The
dialed extension is connected to the Inbound Channel. If a PBX extension is entered in this field, do not
enter a Phone Number.
Phone Number
This field contains the telephone number to dial when learning network tones. The dialed number is the
telephone number of the line connected to the Inbound Channel.
Outbound Channel (learning channel)
This field contains the channel number of the audio board performing the learning. This channel calls the
Inbound Channel.
Inbound Channel (controlling channel)
This field contains the channel number of the audio board used to set up the required tone scenarios on the
PBX or network. This channel is called by the Outbound Channel.
Reorder Dial String
This field contains characters that cause the PBX or network to generate a reorder tone. If a reorder dial
string is not included, do not select Learn Reorder Tone.
Merge Current Definitions
This parameter is only valid during RE-LEARN. If YES is selected, the current tone definitions will be
combined with the re-learned tone definitions. If NO is selected, the current tone definitions will be
overwritten with the re-learned tone definitions.
?
Learn Discnct on Inbound/Outbound Channel
This parameter is only valid if the disconnect tone was selected. The extension that receives the disconnect
differs among PBX's.
· Select OUTBOUND if the calling extension (outbound channel) receives a disconnect when the
called extension (inbound channel) hangs up.
· Select INBOUND if the called extension (inbound channel) receives the disconnect when the calling
extension (outbound channel) hangs up.
NOTE: For the fast busy, the system may have to dial 9 for an outside line, and then dial an invalid code to
I&M
generate the fast busy. The default invalid code is **.
Be sure that the telephone extensions that are connected to the Dialogic audio board Ports 1 and 2 do not have
any features programmed. Turn off any call forwarding features for these extensions during the learning
process.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

64
Appendix
· Once all of the required information has been entered, select START from the PBXpert Learn screen.
· When the learning is complete, save the settings and return to the previous menu, shown below. The
newly learned call progress tones appear in the Tone Set window.
Tone Set for the Newly Learned Call Progress Tones.
· From the Tone Set menu, select VIEW to see the values of the call progress tones that were just learned.
Selecting MODIFY from the Tone Set menu allows you to change any of the values that you see on the
screen. Both screens look similar to the one shown below.
?
Tone Set View Screen
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
65
· From the main menu, highlight the Mitel SX2000 (the name given in the Make and Model line in the
Tone Set window) and press <Enter>. You should now see the telephone system name in the
Consolidated Sets window.
Non-consolidated Tone Set
Notice that the "Consolidated Sets" window says Not Consolidated at the bottom of the window.
· Select "Consolidate" from the Tone Set menu and press <Enter>. The program may ask you to overwrite.
Select LOCAL table to be overwritten and give the file a name. (your_file_name.tsf). You notice that the
word Consolidated now appears at the bottom of the Consolidated Set window.
· From the File menu, select SAVE to save changes and then exit.
NOTE: If your telephone system produces multiple fast busy tones, you can create multiple Tone Sets that
can be consolidated into one TSF.
?
Edit the Autoexec.bat file:
You must edit the D40LOADR.BAT file and change the TSF filename that is added.
Fix the following line in D40LOADR.BAT:
TONEDNLD -fyour_file_name.tsf -h5
TONEDNLD is the downloading utility file name, -f specifies the tone file to download to the audio board,
and -h5 specifies the interrupt that the audio board is using.
I&M
Once the file has been edited and saved, you should shutdown your computer and restart Perfect Guest
Messaging.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

66
Appendix
H
Installing a FAX Board
This section describes the installation procedure for installing a FAX board into the PC. The fax coprocessor
board must be a GammaLink board to work with the Perfect Guest Messaging system drivers (included with
Perfect Guest Messaging software package.)
Installing the GammaLink FAX Board
A minimum of an 80386 machine, at least 4 MB total system RAM and MS DOS 6.22 or greater is required
for implementation of any fax capability.
Before installation, check the package contents for the following items. If any items are missing, contact your
Teleco Sales Representative or Teleco Customer Support.
· Fax coprocessor board, software package, and manuals
· Sentinel key, programmed for Perfect Guest Messaging, and Fax (other options may also be enabled).
NOTE: If Fax Services was requested on the original order from Teleco, then the fax coprocessor board and
software has been loaded prior to shipment.
If this is a field upgrade to add Fax to an existing system, complete the following steps for installation:
· The fax coprocessor board should be jumpered for I/O address 350H. This is the factory setting and
should not be changed.
NOTE: Check the fax board documentation to verify that the addresses on the coprocessor board are
correct.
· Install the fax coprocessor board. The board may be installed in any vacant slot in the PC chassis.
· Connect phone cord from the modular (RJ11) jack on the fax board (labeled "wall") to the telephone
extension number for the fax board.
?
Software Setup
Refer to "Setting Up Fax Services" in the Optional Applications section of this manual.
I&M
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
67
I
System Prompts
The following pages list all of the prompts Perfect Guest Messaging uses to answer and transfer calls. These
prompts are stored as MESS***.VOX files in the C:\WINVM directory where *** is the System Prompt
number listed preceding each prompt. The sole exception is the default company greeting, SAL000.VOX,
which resides in the C:\SALUTE directory. Use this list if you are re-recording any of these prompts.
NOTE: This list also contains alternate prompts used for special circumstances or for the Perfect Stay
hospitality application. These prompts are indicated by an 'A' or 'H' in the file name prefix following the
numbers, e.g. {MESS001A.VOX}.
Words that appear in italics are not actually part of the recorded prompt.
AUTO-ATTENDANT
{SAL000.VOX}
HELLO. THANK YOU FOR CALLING. ENTER THE EXTENSION OF THE PERSON YOU WISH TO SPEAK
WITH. IF YOU DO NOT KNOW THE EXTENSION, PRESS THE STAR KEY FOR A COMPANY DIRECTORY,
OR STAY ON THE LINE FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE.
{MESS003.VOX}
HELLO. THANK YOU FOR CALLING.
{MESS004.VOX}
?
ENTER THE EXTENSION OF THE PERSON YOU WISH TO SPEAK WITH.
{MESS006.VOX}
IF YOU DO NOT KNOW THE EXTENSION, PRESS THE STAR KEY FOR A
COMPANY DIRECTORY, OR STAY ON THE LINE FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE.
{MESS007.VOX}
PLEASE HOLD FOR ASSISTANCE.
{MESS008.VOX}
PLEASE HOLD WHILE I PAGE YOUR PARTY.
I&M
{MESS009.VOX}
GOOD-BYE. THANK YOU FOR CALLING.
{MESS010.VOX}
PLEASE HOLD.
{MESS011.VOX}
TRANSFERRING TO JANE DOE.
{MESS012.VOX}
PLEASE HOLD WHILE I PAGE TOM JONES.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

68
Appendix
{MESS013.VOX}
ONE MOMENT, YOU HAVE A CALL.
{MESS014.VOX}
I DID NOT UNDERSTAND YOUR REQUEST, PLEASE TRY AGAIN.
{MESS015.VOX}
THAT EXTENSION IS BUSY;
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1;
RE-TRY THAT EXTENSION, PRESS 2;
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, WAIT FOR THE TONE;
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS 0.
{MESS015A.VOX}
THAT EXTENSION IS BUSY;
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, ENTER IT NOW;
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, WAIT FOR THE TONE;
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS 0.
{MESS015H.VOX}
THE GUEST YOU ARE CALLING IS CURRENTLY ON THE TELEPHONE. PLEASE LEAVE A MESSAGE
AFTER THE TONE OR PRESS ZERO TO TRANSFER TO THE OPERATOR.
{MESS016.VOX}
THERE IS NO ANSWER AT THAT EXTENSION
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, WAIT FOR THE TONE
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS 0.
?
{MESS016A.VOX}
THERE IS NO ANSWER AT THAT EXTENSION
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, ENTER IT NOW
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, WAIT FOR THE TONE
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS ZERO
{MESS016H.VOX}
THE GUEST YOU ARE CALLING IS UNAVAILABLE. PLEASE LEAVE A MESSAGE AFTER THE TONE OR
PRESS ZERO TO TRANSFER TO THE OPERATOR.
{MESS017.VOX}
I&M
YOUR PARTY IS NOT IN THE OFFICE RIGHT NOW.
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, WAIT FOR THE TONE
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS ZERO.
{MESS017H.VOX}
THE GUEST YOU ARE TRYING TO REACH IS NO LONGER REGISTERED TO THIS ROOM. PLEASE PRESS
ZERO TO RETURN TO THE OPERATOR.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
69
{MESS017A.VOX}
YOUR PARTY IS NOT CURRENTLY IN THE OFFICE
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, ENTER IT NOW
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, WAIT FOR THE TONE
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS ZERO
{MESS018.VOX}
JOHN DOE IS OUT OF THE OFFICE AND WILL RETURN AT 3:30PM
{MESS019.VOX}
PLEASE ENTER YOUR AREA CODE AND TELEPHONE NUMBER.
{MESS020.VOX}
CALL FOR JOHN DOE
{MESS022.VOX}
LET ME REPEAT YOUR CHOICES SO THAT YOU MAY START OVER.
{MESS027.VOX}
YOUR CALLER HAS BEEN FOUND, A TRANSFER WILL BE MADE SHORTLY
{MESS028.VOX}
NO-ONE IS CURRENTLY LEAVING YOU A MESSAGE.
{MESS029.VOX}
THE PARTY YOU ARE CALLING IS NOW AVAILABLE
{MESS033.VOX}
?
ENTER THE EXTENSION OF THE PERSON YOU WISH TO REDIRECT YOUR CALL TO.
SCREENING
{MESS035.VOX}
WHO'S CALLING?
{MESS035A.VOX}
PLEASE STATE YOUR NAME AT THE TONE SO I MAY SAY WHO IS CALLING.
{MESS038.VOX}
I&M
YOUR CALLER IS JOHN DOE
{MESS040.VOX}
TO ACCEPT THIS CALL, PRESS 1,
TO SEND THE CALL TO ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 2,
TO SEND THE CALLER TO YOUR MAILBOX, PRESS POUND.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

70
Appendix
{MESS041.VOX}
TO ACCEPT THIS CALL, PRESS 1;
SEND THE CALL TO ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 2;
RECORD THIS CALL, PRESS 3;
SEND THE CALLER TO YOUR MAILBOX, PRESS POUND.
{MESS043.VOX} "THERE ARE"
{MESS045.VOX} "CALLS AHEAD OF YOU"
THERE ARE "3" CALLS AHEAD OF YOU.
{MESS044.VOX} "THERE IS"
{MESS046.VOX} "CALL AHEAD OF YOU"
THERE IS 1 CALL AHEAD OF YOU
{MESS047.VOX}
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1;
TO REMAIN ON HOLD, PRESS 2;
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, PRESS 5;
TO EXIT, PRESS STAR.
{MESS048.VOX}
THAT EXTENSION IS STILL BUSY.
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1
TO HOLD AND RETRY, PRESS 2
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, PRESS 5
TO EXIT, PRESS STAR.
{MESS049.VOX}
?
THAT EXTENSION IS BUSY
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1
TO HOLD AND RETRY, PRESS 2
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, PRESS 5
TO EXIT, PRESS STAR.
{MESS050.VOX}
THAT EXTENSION IS BUSY.
AND NO ONE ELSE IS HOLDING
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1
TO HOLD AND TRY AGAIN, PRESS 2
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, PRESS 5
TO EXIT, PRESS STAR.
I&M
{MESS052.VOX}
THAT EXTENSION IS STILL BUSY, AND NO ONE ELSE IS HOLDING.
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1;
TO HOLD AND TRY AGAIN, PRESS 2
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, PRESS 5
TO EXIT, PRESS STAR.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
71
{MESS053.VOX}
TO ADD A NOTIFICATION SCHEDULE, PRESS 1
REVIEW ALL SCHEDULES, PRESS 2;
CHANGE A SCHEDULE, PRESS 3;
DELETE A SCHEDULE, PRESS 4;
TURN NOTIFICATION ON OR OFF, PRESS 5;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO.
DIRECTORY ASSISTANCE
{MESS054.VOX}
WHEN YOU HEAR THE NAME OF THE PERSON YOU WISH TO BE TRANSFERRED TO, PRESS 1
{MESS055.VOX}
USING YOUR TELEPHONE KEYPAD,
SPELL OUT THE FIRST FEW LETTERS OF THE PERSON'S NAME
FOR THE LETTERS Q OR Z, PRESS 1
FOR A COMPLETE DIRECTORY, PRESS POUND.
TO RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS STAR
FOR ASSISTANCE PRESS ZERO
{MESS056.VOX}
USING YOUR TELEPHONE KEYPAD,
SPELL OUT THE FIRST FEW LETTERS OF THE PERSON'S FIRST OR LAST NAME.
FOR THE LETTERS Q OR Z, PRESS 1;
FOR A COMPLETE DIRECTORY, PRESS POUND.
TO RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS STAR;
?
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS ZERO
{MESS057.VOX}
NO MATCHES WERE FOUND.
PLEASE RE-ENTER THE PERSON'S FIRST OR LAST NAME;
FOR THE LETTERS Q OR Z, PRESS 1
{MESS058.VOX}
NO MATCHES WERE FOUND
PLEASE, RE-ENTER THE PERSON'S LAST NAME.
FOR THE LETTERS Q OR Z, PRESS 1
I&M
{MESS059.VOX}
FOR A COMPLETE DIRECTORY, PRESS STAR.
{MESS060.VOX}
BLANK.
0 LENGTH FILE
{MESS061.VOX}
PRESS 1 FOR...
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

72
Appendix
{MESS062.VOX}
PRESS 2 FOR...
{MESS063.VOX}
PRESS 3 FOR...
{MESS064.VOX}
PRESS 4 FOR...
{MESS065.VOX}
PRESS 5 FOR...
{MESS066.VOX}
PRESS 6 FOR...
{MESS067.VOX}
PRESS 7 FOR...
{MESS068.VOX}
PRESS 8 FOR...
{MESS069.VOX}
PRESS 9 FOR...
{MESS073.VOX}
ENTER THE TELEPHONE NUMBER OR NUMERIC MESSAGE TO BE SENT.
{MESS074.VOX}
?
YOU ENTERED
{MESS075.VOX}
THANK YOU. YOUR MESSAGE WILL BE SENT.
{MESS077.VOX}
THAT MAILBOX IS FULL, PLEASE TRY AGAIN LATER.
{MESS080.VOX}
RECORD YOUR MESSAGE AFTER THE TONE.
{MESS081.VOX}
I&M
TO TRY ANOTHER EXTENSION, PRESS 1,
TO LEAVE A MESSAGE, PRESS 5,
FOR ASSISTANCE, PRESS ZERO
{MESS082.VOX}
TO ACCEPT THIS MESSAGE, PRESS 1;
REVIEW, PRESS 2;
RE-RECORD, PRESS 3;
CONTINUE RECORDING, PRESS 4;
CANCEL YOUR MESSAGE, PRESS STAR.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
73
{MESS083.VOX}
TO SEND YOUR MESSAGE WITH NORMAL DELIVERY, PRESS 1;
TO SEND YOUR MESSAGE WITH URGENT DELIVERY, PRESS 2.
{MESS084.VOX}
THERE ARE 10 SECONDS OF RECORDING TIME LEFT.
{MESS085.VOX}
TO SPEAK TO THE OPERATOR, PLEASE SAY YES AFTER THE TONE.
{MESS086.VOX}
IF YOU WOULD LIKE TO RECEIVE A RESPONSE FOR THIS MESSAGE, PRESS 1.
{MESS087.VOX}
YOUR CALLBACK CODE IS...
{MESS089.VOX}
TO SEND YOUR MESSAGE, PRESS1,
RE-RECORD PRESS 2,
TO CONTINUE RECORDING PRESS 4,
TO ATTACH A FAX PRESS 5,
TO CANCEL YOUR MESSAGE PRESS STAR.
{MESS090.VOX}
MESSAGE SENT.
?
MESSAGE MANAGEMENT
{MESS100.VOX}
TO LISTEN TO NEW MESSAGES, PRESS 1.
{MESS101.VOX}
LISTEN TO SAVED MESSAGES, PRESS 2.
{MESS102.VOX}
SEND A NEW MESSAGE, PRESS 3,
MAILBOX OPTIONS, PRESS 4,
I&M
CHANGE YOUR LOGIN STATUS, PRESS 5,
UN-ERASE MESSAGES, PRESS 6,
PLAY ACTIVE FEATURES, PRESS 9,
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO,
TO DISCONNECT, SIMPLY HANG UP.
{MESS103.VOX}
TO CONFIRM DELETION OF THIS MESSAGE PRESS 9,
OR PRESS STAR TO RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

74
Appendix
{MESS104.VOX}
TO SEND A MESSAGE, PRESS 3;
RECORD YOUR PERSONAL GREETING, PRESS 4;
RECORD YOUR NAME PROMPT, PRESS 5;
CHANGE MAILBOX PASSWORD, PRESS 6;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO;
TO DISCONNECT, SIMPLY HANG UP.
{MESS105.VOX}
TO RECORD YOUR PERSONAL GREETING, PRESS 4;
TO RECORD YOUR NAME, PRESS 5;
TO CHANGE YOUR PASSWORD, PRESS 6;
TO DISCONNECT, SIMPLY HANG UP.
{MESS106.VOX}
TO RECOVER YOUR LAST DELETED MESSAGE, PRESS 1;
RECOVER ALL MESSAGES DELETED TODAY, PRESS 2.
{MESS108.VOX}
YOU DO NOT CURRENTLY HAVE ACCESS TO THAT FEATURE.
{MESS109.VOX}
THAT IS NOT A VALID ENTRY.
{MESS110.VOX} "YOU HAVE"
{MESS113.VOX} "NEW MESSAGE"
{MESS114.VOX} "SAVED MESSAGES"
YOU HAVE "1" NEW MESSAGE AND "2" SAVED MESSAGES
?
{MESS111.VOX}
YOU HAVE NO MESSAGES.
{MESS112.VOX} "NEW MESSAGES"
{MESS116.VOX} "SAVED MESSAGE"
YOU HAVE "4" NEW MESSAGES AND "1" SAVED MESSAGE
{MESS117.VOX}
TWO NEW MESSAGES.
{MESS118.VOX}
I&M
TWO SAVED MESSAGES.
{MESS119.VOX}
THIS MESSAGE IS A FAX..
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
75
{MESS120.VOX}
TO SAVE THIS FAX, PRESS 1
PRINT AT A FAX MACHINE, PRESS 2
HEAR TIME AND DATE STAMP, PRESS 3
ERASE FAX, PRESS 4
FORWARD FAX, PRESS 5
REPLY TO FAX, PRESS 6
SKIP TO NEXT MESSAGE, PRESS POUND
RETURN TO PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
{MESS121.VOX}
END OF NEW MESSAGES.
{MESS122.VOX}
END OF SAVED MESSAGES.
{MESS123.VOX}
TO SAVE THIS MESSAGE, PRESS 1
RE-PLAY MESSAGE, PRESS 2
HEAR TIME AND DATE STAMP, PRESS 3
ERASE MESSAGE, PRESS 4
FORWARD MESSAGE, PRESS 5
REPLY TO MESSAGE, PRESS 6
SKIP TO NEXT MESSAGE, PRESS POUND
RETURN TO PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR
{MESS124.VOX}
YOU MAY NOT REPLY TO A MESSAGE SENT BY AN OUTSIDE CALLER.
?
{MESS125.VOX} "RECEIVED YOUR MESSAGE ON"
RECEIVED YOUR MESSAGE ON TUESDAY, APRIL 11TH AT 1PM
{MESS131.VOX}
YOUR REPLY HAS BEEN SENT. WHAT WOULD YOU LIKE TO DO WITH THE ORIGINAL MESSAGE?
{MESS132.VOX}
TO SEND MESSAGE STANDARD, PRESS 1,
SEND MESSAGE CERTIFIED, PRESS 2.
{MESS133.VOX}
I&M
YOUR MESSAGE HAS BEEN SENT CERTIFIED.
{MESS134.VOX}
MESSAGE SAVED.
{MESS135.VOX}
MESSAGE MARKED FOR ERASE.
{MESS139.VOX}
ENTER THE NEXT RECIPIENT'S MAILBOX NUMBER; PRESS POUND WHEN FINISHED.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

76
Appendix
{MESS140.VOX}
ENTER THE MAILBOX NUMBER OF THE PERSON YOU WISH
TO SEND THIS MESSAGE TO.
{MESS141.VOX}
ENTER THE MAILBOX NUMBER OF THE PERSON YOU WISH
TO SEND THIS MESSAGE TO; FOR A DIRECTORY, PRESS STAR.
{MESS142.VOX}
THAT IS AN INVALID MAILBOX, PLEASE TRY AGAIN.
{MESS143.VOX}
BEGIN SPEAKING AFTER THE TONE,
PRESS POUND WHEN FINISHED.
{MESS145.VOX}
TO ACCEPT THIS MESSAGE, PRESS 1;
REVIEW, PRESS 2;
RE-RECORD, PRESS 3;
CONTINUE RECORDING, PRESS 4;
CANCEL YOUR MESSAGE, PRESS STAR.
{MESS147.VOX}
NOTHING RECORDED.
{MESS148.VOX}
SCHEDULE DELETED.
?
{MESS152.VOX}
NOTIFICATION SCHEDULES.
{MESS153.VOX}
NOTIFICATION SCHEDULE.
{MESS155.VOX}
BLANK.
0 LENGTH FILE
{MESS156.VOX}
ENTER THE NOTIFICATION SCHEDULE NUMBER TO REVIEW.
I&M
{MESS160.VOX}
TO ADD A NOTIFICATION SCHEDULE, PRESS 1
REVIEW ALL SCHEDULES, PRESS 2;
CHANGE A SCHEDULE, PRESS 3;
DELETE A SCHEDULE, PRESS 4;
TURN NOTIFICATION ON OR OFF, PRESS 5;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
77
{MESS161.VOX}
TO BE NOTIFIED OF ALL MESSAGES, PRESS 1,
TO BE NOTIFIED OF URGENT MESSAGES, PRESS 2.
{MESS162.VOX}
YOUR OUTCALL NOTIFICATION TABLE IS FULL.
{MESS163.VOX}
ENTER THE OUTSIDE TELEPHONE NUMBER FOR NOTIFICATION;
PRESS POUND WHEN FINISHED.
{MESS166.VOX}
IF THIS NUMBER IS CORRECT, PRESS 1;
OTHERWISE, PRESS 2.
{MESS167.VOX}
IF THIS IS CORRECT, PRESS 1;
OTHERWISE, PRESS 2..
{MESS168.VOX}
ARE YOU SURE? PRESS 1 TO CONTINUE, OR PRESS POUND TO RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU.
{MESS170.VOX}
RECORD YOUR NOTIFICATION PROMPT AT THE TONE,
PRESS POUND WHEN FINISHED.
{MESS172.VOX}
?
ENTER THE 4 DIGIT NOTIFICATION START TIME,
HOUR THEN MINUTE.
{MESS173.VOX}
ENTER THE 4 DIGIT NOTIFICATION START DATE, MONTH THEN DAY - OR PRESS THE STARTING DAY
NUMBER; MONDAY IS *100, SUNDAY IS *700.
{MESS174.VOX}
ENTER THE 4 DIGIT NOTIFICATION STOP TIME, HOUR THEN MINUTE.
{MESS175.VOX}
I&M
ENTER THE 4 DIGIT NOTIFICATION STOP DATE, MONTH THEN DAY - OR PRESS THE ENDING DAY
NUMBER; MONDAY IS *100, SUNDAY IS *700.
{MESS176.VOX}
ENTER THE NOTIFICATION SCHEDULE NUMBER TO CHANGE
{MESS177.VOX}
THAT IS AN INVALID OUTCALL ENTRY.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

78
Appendix
{MESS178.VOX}
ENTER THE NOTIFICATION SCHEDULE NUMBER TO DELETE;
TO DELETE ALL ENTRIES, PRESS STAR.
{MESS179.VOX}
NOTIFICATION IS NOW ACTIVE.
{MESS180.VOX}
NOTIFICATION IS NOW OFF.
{MESS181.VOX}
YOU WILL BE NOTIFIED FOR ALL NEW MESSAGES.
{MESS182.VOX}
YOU WILL BE NOTIFIED FOR ALL URGENT MESSAGES.
{MESS186.VOX}
THIS IS YOUR AUTOMATED RECEPTIONIST,
THERE ARE MESSAGES FOR JOHN DOE
{MESS189.VOX}
URGENT MESSAGE.
{MESS190.VOX}
NEW VOICE MESSAGE.
{MESS191.VOX}
NEW VOICE MESSAGES.
?
{MESS192.VOX}
NEW FAX MESSAGE.
{MESS193.VOX}
NEW FAX MESSAGES.
{MESS194.VOX}
NEW DATA MESSAGE.
{MESS195.VOX}
I&M
NEW DATA MESSAGES.
{MESS196.VOX}
NEW EMAIL MESSAGE.
{MESS197.VOX}
NEW EMAIL MESSAGES.
{MESS198.VOX}
ACCOUNT NUMBER.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
79
{MESS199.VOX}
HAS....
{MESS200.VOX}
ENTER THE MAILBOX NUMBER OF THE PERSON
YOU WISH TO SEND THIS MESSAGE TO.
{MESS202.VOX}
THAT IS AN INVALID MAILBOX NUMBER.
{MESS203.VOX}
TO RECORD MESSAGE PREFIX, PRESS 1
SEND MESSAGE WITHOUT PREFIX, PRESS 2
{MESS205.VOX}
MESSAGE FORWARDED.
WHAT WOULD YOU LIKE TO DO WITH THE ORIGINAL MESSAGE
{MESS230.VOX}
TO ADD A LIST, PRESS 1;
TO LISTEN TO AN EXISTING LIST, PRESS 2;
CHANGE A LIST, PRESS 3;
DELETE A LIST, PRESS 4;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
{MESS233.VOX}
THERE ARE NO DISTRIBUTION LISTS AT THIS TIME.
?
{MESS235.VOX}
END OF LIST.
{MESS240.VOX}
ENTER THE LIST NUMBER TO CHANGE.
{MESS242.VOX}
THAT LIST NUMBER DOES NOT EXIST.
{MESS245.VOX}
TO ADD MEMBERS TO YOUR LIST, PRESS 1;
I&M
LISTEN TO LIST MEMBERS, PRESS 2;
CHANGE LIST NAME, PRESS 3;
DELETE MEMBERS FROM YOUR LIST, PRESS 4;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU PRESS STAR.
{MESS248.VOX}
END OF LIST.
{MESS255.VOX}
ENTER MAILBOX NUMBERS TO BE ADDED; PRESS POUND WHEN FINISHED.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

80
Appendix
{MESS260.VOX}
ENTER MAILBOX NUMBERS TO BE DELETED; PRESS POUND WHEN FINISHED.
{MESS267.VOX}
RECORD LIST NAME AFTER THE TONE;
PRESS POUND WHEN FINISHED.
{MESS270.VOX}
TO ACCEPT, PRESS 1
RE-RECORD, PRESS 2
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
{MESS272.VOX}
TO ADD MEMBERS TO THIS LIST, PRESS 1;
TO CONTINUE, PRESS 2;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
{MESS275.VOX}
ENTER THE LIST NUMBER TO BE DELETED.
{MESS280.VOX}
ENTER THE LIST NUMBER TO SEND THIS MESSAGE TO.
{MESS281.VOX}
YOUR DISTRIBUTION LIST IS BEING PROCESSED. PLEASE WAIT FOR THE MAIN MENU PROMPT, OR
HANG UP AND CALL BACK LATER.
{MESS300.VOX}
?
ENTER THE ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD.
{MESS305.VOX}
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAIN MENU-
TO CONFIGURE MAILBOXES, PRESS 1;
CLASSES OF SERVICE, PRESS 2;
SYSTEM PARAMETERS PRESS 3;
SYSTEM PROMPTS, PRESS 4;
COMPANY MAINTENANCE, PRESS 5;
CHECK FAXES, PRESS 9;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO;
TO DISCONNECT, PRESS POUND.
I&M
{MESS306.VOX}
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION MAIN MENU-
TO CONFIGURE MAILBOXES, PRESS 1;
CLASSES OF SERVICE, PRESS 2,
SYSTEM PARAMETERS, PRESS 3;
SYSTEM PROMPTS, PRESS 4;
COMPANY MAINTENANCE, PRESS 5;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO;
DISCONNECT, PRESS POUND.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
81
{MESS310.VOX}
THERE IS NO SUCH VOICE PROMPT.
{MESS311.VOX}
TO CHANGE SYSTEM TIME, PRESS 1;
SYSTEM DATE, PRESS 2;
OPERATION MODE, PRESS 3;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
{MESS312.VOX}
THE OFFICE IS NOW OPEN.
{MESS313.VOX}
THE OFFICE IS NOW CLOSED.
{MESS317.VOX}
ENTER THE TWO DIGIT CLASS OF SERVICE;
TO RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
{MESS320.VOX}
ENTER THE 3 DIGIT PARAMETER NUMBER.
{MESS321.VOX}
TO ACCEPT THIS PARAMETER, PRESS 1;
CHANGE THIS PARAMETER, PRESS 2;
SET THIS PARAMETER TO DEFAULT, PRESS 3;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
?
{MESS322.VOX}
PARAMETER MODIFIED.
{MESS323.VOX}
ENTER THE PARAMETER NUMBER FOLLOWED BY THE NEW VALUE FOR THAT PARAMETER.
PRESS POUND WHEN COMPLETE.
{MESS324.VOX}
ENTER A NEW VALUE FOR THAT PARAMETER,
PRESS POUND WHEN COMPLETE.
{MESS326.VOX}
I&M
ENTER THE TWO DIGIT CLASS OF SERVICE NUMBER TO CHANGE.
TO RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
{MESS329.VOX}
PRESS 1 TO REVIEW THIS CLASS OF SERVICE, PRESS 2 TO CHANGE.
{MESS341.VOX}
ENTER A SIX DIGIT DATE, YEAR THEN MONTH THEN DAY,
PRESS POUND WHEN COMPLETE.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

82
Appendix
{MESS342.VOX}
ENTER A FOUR DIGIT TIME, HOUR THEN MINUTE,
PRESS POUND WHEN COMPLETE
{MESS343.VOX}
YOU HAVE ENTERED AN INCORRECT VALUE, PLEASE TRY AGAIN.
{MESS350.VOX}
FOR SYSTEM PROMPTS, PRESS 1
COMPANY GREETINGS, PRESS 2
SYSTEM SEGMENTS, PRESS 3
{MESS351.VOX}
ENTER THE MESSAGE SEGMENT NUMBER TO BE RECORDED.
{MESS354.VOX}
TO OPEN THE OFFICE, PRESS 1;
CLOSE THE OFFICE, PRESS 2;
SET SYSTEM HOLIDAYS, PRESS 3;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO.
{MESS355.VOX}
FOR SYSTEM PROMPTS, PRESS 1
FOR COMPANY GREETINGS, PRESS 2
{MESS358.VOX}
ENTER THE THREE DIGIT SYSTEM PROMPT TO REVIEW
?
{MESS361.VOX}
TO ACCEPT, PRESS 1;
REVIEW, PRESS 2;
RE-RECORD PROMPT, PRESS 3;
EXIT, PRESS STAR.
{MESS370.VOX}
ENTER THE 3 DIGIT COMPANY GREETING TO CREATE OR REVIEW
{MESS380.VOX}
ENTER THE FIRST MAILBOX.
I&M
{MESS382.VOX}
ENTER THE LAST MAILBOX.
{MESS385.VOX}
TO CREATE THE RANGE OF MAILBOXES, PRESS 1;
DELETE RANGE, PRESS 3.
{MESS387.VOX}
ENTER THE TWO DIGIT CLASS OF SERVICE FOR THESE MAILBOXES.
{MESS395.VOX}
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
83
TO CONFIRM DELETION OF THESE MAILBOXES, PRESS 1;
TO RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
{MESS400.VOX}
ENTER YOUR MAILBOX NUMBER.
{MESS404.VOX}
THAT MAILBOX IS INVALID, PLEASE TRY AGAIN.
{MESS405.VOX}
ENTER YOUR PASSWORD.
{MESS408.VOX}
TO CHANGE CALL BLOCKING, PRESS 1;
CHANGE CALL SCREENING, PRESS 2;
CHANGE PRE-PAGING, PRESS 3;
CHANGE POST-PAGING, PRESS 4;
CHANGE CALL QUEUING, PRESS 5;
CHANGE CALL FORWARDING, PRESS 6;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO.
{MESS410.VOX}
TO CHANGE CALL BLOCKING, PRESS 1;
CHANGE CALL SCREENING, PRESS 2;
CHANGE PRE-PAGING, PRESS 3;
CHANGE POST-PAGING, PRESS 4;
CHANGE CALL QUEUING, PRESS 5;
CHANGE CALL FORWARDING, PRESS 6;
?
CHANGE LOCAL AREA PAGING, PRESS 7,
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO.
{MESS412.VOX}
ENTER THE MAILBOX NUMBER YOU WOULD LIKE YOUR CALLS FORWARDED TO.
{MESS413.VOX}
CALL FORWARDING IS NOW OFF.
{MESS414.VOX}
YOUR CALLS WILL BE FORWARDED TO...
I&M
{MESS415.VOX}
ENTER THE MAILBOX YOU WOULD LIKE YOUR MESSAGES FORWARDED TO.
{MESS416.VOX}
ENTER THE 4 DIGIT DELAY TIME, HOUR THEN MINUTE.
{MESS417.VOX}
CALL SCREENING IS NOW OFF.
{MESS418.VOX}
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

84
Appendix
CALL SCREENING IS NOW ACTIVE.
{MESS419.VOX} "MESSAGES WILL BE FORWARDED TO"
MESSAGES WILL BE FORWARDED TO JOHN DOE
{MESS420.VOX}
TO ERASE MESSAGES UPON FORWARDING, PRESS 1;
TO LEAVE MESSAGES IN YOUR MAILBOX AFTER FORWARDING, PRESS 2.
{MESS421.VOX}
MESSAGE FORWARDING IS NOW OFF.
{MESS422.VOX}
QUEUING IS NOW OFF.
{MESS423.VOX}
QUEUING IS NOW ACTIVE.
{MESS426.VOX}
YOU ARE NOW LOGGED IN.
{MESS427.VOX}
YOU ARE NOW LOGGED OUT.
{MESS450.VOX}
MAILBOX OPTIONS MENU-
TO RECORD GREETINGS, PRESS 1;
CHANGE NOTIFICATION, PRESS 2;
SET CALL TRANSFER OPTIONS, PRESS 3;
?
CHANGE AUTO-FORWARDING, PRESS 4;
DISTRIBUTION LIST MAINTENANCE, PRESS 5;
CHANGE PASSWORD, PRESS 9;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO.
{MESS454.VOX}
TO ACCEPT THIS GREETING, PRESS 1;
REVIEW, PRESS 2;
RE-RECORD, PRESS 3;
ERASE, PRESS 4.
I&M
{MESS458.VOX}
MESSAGES WILL BE PLAYED LAST IN FIRST OUT.
{MESS459.VOX}
MESSAGES WILL BE PLAYED FIRST IN FIRST OUT.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
85
{MESS470.VOX}
TO ENTER A NEW PASSWORD, PRESS 1;
LISTEN TO PASSWORD, PRESS 2;
REMOVE PASSWORD PROTECTION, PRESS 3;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;
{MESS472.VOX}
YOUR MAILBOX IS NO LONGER PASSWORD PROTECTED.
{MESS473.VOX}
ENTER NEW PASSWORD, PRESS POUND WHEN COMPLETE
{MESS475.VOX}
RE-ENTER PASSWORD FOR CONFIRMATION, PRESS POUND WHEN COMPLETE
{MESS476.VOX}
YOUR ENTRIES DO NOT MATCH, PLEASE TRY AGAIN.
{MESS477.VOX}
YOUR NEW PASSWORD WILL BE ACTIVE THE NEXT TIME YOU CALL.
{MESS478.VOX}
AUTOMATIC MESSAGE DATE AND TIME STAMP IS ACTIVE.
{MESS479.VOX}
AUTOMATIC MESSAGE DATE AND TIME STAMP IS TURNED OFF.
{MESS480.VOX}
?
CALL BLOCKING IS ACTIVE.
{MESS481.VOX}
CALL BLOCKING IS TURNED OFF.
{MESS482.VOX}
PRE-PAGING IS OFF.
{MESS483.VOX}
PRE-PAGING IS ACTIVE.
I&M
{MESS484.VOX}
POST-PAGING IS OFF.
{MESS485.VOX}
POST-PAGING IS ACTIVE.
{MESS490.VOX}
TO REPEAT THIS GREETING, PRESS ZERO;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

86
Appendix
{MESS491.VOX}
RECORD MENU-
TO CREATE OR REVIEW NO-ANSWER GREETING, PRESS 1;
BUSY GREETING, PRESS 2;
GONE HOME GREETING, PRESS 3;
NAME, PRESS 4;
OPTIONAL GREETINGS, PRESS 5;
SET YOUR ACTIVE GREETING, PRESS 6;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;
RETURN TO THE AUTOMATED ATTENDANT, PRESS ZERO.
{MESS492.VOX}
ENTER THE 2 DIGIT GREETING TO RECORD
{MESS493.VOX}
ENTER THE 2 DIGIT GREETING TO ACTIVATE. TO RETURN TO DEFAULT GREETINGS PRESS 0
{MESS494.VOX}
SELECT THE LANGUAGE NUMBER TO RECORD YOUR PROMPTS FOR.
{MESS495.VOX}
YOU HAVE REACHED YOUR MESSAGE LIMIT
TO RECEIVE ADDITIONAL MESSAGES, YOU MUST REDUCE YOUR MESSAGE COUNT.
{MESS496.VOX}
DEFAULT GREETINGS ARE NOW ACTIVE
{MESS497.VOX}
?
YOUR ACTIVE GREETING IS NUMBER `FIVE'
{MESS498.VOX}
OPTIONAL GREETINGS ARE NOW OFF.
{MESS500.VOX}
<ONE MINUTE OF MUSIC USED IN THE HOLDING QUEUE.>
SOURCE
{MESS515.VOX}
ENTER THE TWO DIGIT COMPANY NUMBER.
{MESS516.VOX}
I&M
THAT IS NOT A VALID COMPANY NUMBER.
{MESS517.VOX}
TO LISTEN TO EXISTING HOLIDAYS, PRESS 1;
ADD A HOLIDAY, PRESS 2;
DELETE A HOLIDAY, PRESS 3;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;
REPLAY OPTIONS, PRESS ZERO.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
87
{MESS520.VOX}
NO MORE HOLIDAYS.
{MESS522.VOX}
ENTER THE 4 DIGIT HOLIDAY DATE, MONTH THEN DAY.
{MESS524.VOX}
ENTER THE 3 DIGIT HOLIDAY GREETING
{MESS526.VOX}
HOLIDAY ADDED.
{MESS527.VOX}
ENTER THE 4 DIGIT HOLIDAY DATE TO DELETE, MONTH THEN DAY.
{MESS529.VOX}
HOLIDAY DELETED.
{MESS562.VOX}
THIS IS AN AUTOMATED CALL;
TO DISCONNECT, PRESS 1.
{MESS563.VOX}
THE FOLLOWING OFF-SITE MESSAGE WAS NOT DELIVERED.
{MESS620.VOX}
THERE ARE NEW UNRECEIVED FAXES.
?
{MESS621.VOX}
THERE ARE NO UNRECEIVED FAXES.
FAX UPLOAD
{MESS622.VOX}
TO SAVE THIS FAX AS A DOCUMENT, PRESS 1;
ERASE THIS FAX, PRESS 2;
SKIP TO THE NEXT FAX, PRESS POUND;
RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR.
I&M
{MESS624.VOX}
ENTER THE DOCUMENT NUMBER TO SAVE THE FAX AS.
{MESS625.VOX}
DOCUMENT SAVED.
{MESS626.VOX}
ERROR SAVING DOCUMENT; YOU MAY HAVE TO RE-FAX THIS DOCUMENT TO SAVE IT PROPERLY.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

88
Appendix
{MESS627.VOX}
THERE ARE MORE UNRECEIVED FAXES.
{MESS628.VOX}
NO MORE UNRECEIVED FAXES.
{MESS629.VOX}
TO CONFIRM THE DELETION OF THIS FAX, PRESS 9;
CANCEL AND RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS MENU, PRESS STAR;
{MESS630.VOX}
FAX MARKED FOR ERASE.
{MESS631.VOX}
ERROR ERASING FAX.
{MESS638.VOX}
ENTER THE MAILBOX NUMBER OF THE PERSON YOU WISH TO SEND THIS FAX TO.
{MESS640.VOX}
AT THE SOUND OF THE FAX TONE, PRESS START ON YOUR FAX MACHINE
{MESS641.VOX}
I'M SORRY, ALL FAX PORTS ARE IN USE
PLEASE TRY AGAIN LATER
{MESS650.VOX}
?
TO CHANGE THE MAILBOX LANGUAGE, PRESS 3.
{MESS680.VOX}
PLEASE ENTER YOUR AREA CODE AND FAX NUMBER.
{MESS730.VOX}
ENTER YOUR ACCESS CODE.
{MESS740.VOX}
ENTER THE DOCUMENT NUMBER TO BE FAXED.
I&M
{MESS742.VOX}
YOU HAVE ENTERED AN INVALID DOCUMENT NUMBER, PLEASE TRY AGAIN.
{MESS743.VOX}
DOCUMENT HAS BEEN SENT.
{MESS744.VOX}
ENTER THE AREA CODE AND FAX NUMBER OF THE RECEIVING FAX MACHINE.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
89
{MESS745.VOX}
YOUR FAX WILL BE SENT TO...
{MESS746.VOX}
WE WOULD LIKE TO IDENTIFY YOU ON THE COVER PAGE OF YOUR FAX,
PLEASE ENTER YOUR EXTENSION NUMBER NOW
PRESS POUND WHEN COMPLETE
{MESS747.VOX}
`555-1212' ..... IS AN INVALID FAX NUMBER
{MESS755.VOX}
TO SEND TO YOUR DEFAULT FAX MACHINE, PRESS 1;
TO SELECT ANOTHER MACHINE, PRESS 2
{MESS756.VOX}
TO SEND TO YOUR DEFAULT FAX MACHINE, PRESS 1;
SELECT ANOTHER MACHINE, PRESS 2;
SAVE AS A FAX-ON-DEMAND DOCUMENT, PRESS 4.
{MESS757.VOX}
TO SEND TO YOUR DEFAULT FAX MACHINE, PRESS 1;
SELECT ANOTHER MACHINE, PRESS 2;
SEND THIS FAX TO A NETWORK PRINTER, PRESS 3.
{MESS758.VOX}
TO SEND TO YOUR DEFAULT FAX MACHINE, PRESS 1;
SELECT ANOTHER MACHINE, PRESS 2;
?
SEND THIS FAX TO A NETWORK PRINTER, PRESS 3;
SAVE AS A FAX-ON-DEMAND DOCUMENT, PRESS 4.
TUTORIAL
{MESS800.VOX}
WELCOME TO YOUR NEW VOICE MESSAGING SYSTEM. OVER THE NEXT FEW MINUTES WE WILL
INTRODUCE YOU TO SOME OF THE FEATURES OF THE SYSTEM AND HELP YOU INITIALIZE YOUR
MAILBOX.
IF YOU WISH TO EXIT THE TUTORIAL AT ANY POINT, PRESS THE STAR KEY
LOCATED ON THE BOTTOM LEFT HAND CORNER OF YOUR TELEPHONE KEYPAD.
I&M
{MESS801.VOX}
YOUR MAILBOX IS WHERE ALL YOUR MESSAGES WILL BE STORED AND ALSO WHERE YOU CAN
SEND MESSAGES TO OTHERS IN YOUR COMPANY. TO KEEP YOUR MAILBOX SECURE YOU SHOULD
ENTER A PASSWORD. YOUR PASSWORD CAN BE ONE TO 15 DIGITS IN LENGTH, AND CANNOT START
WITH A ZERO. PLEASE ENTER YOUR NEW PASSWORD NOW.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

90
Appendix
{MESS802.VOX}
CALLERS WILL HEAR ONE OF THREE PERSONAL GREETINGS WHEN THEY ARE LEAVING A MESSAGE
FOR YOU. FIRST, THERE IS THE NO-ANSWER GREETING. THIS GREETING IS HEARD WHEN YOU ARE
NOT AT YOUR DESK BUT IN THE OFFICE. TRY TO CHANGE THIS GREETING AS OFTEN AS POSSIBLE,
AND INCLUDE YOUR NAME AND CURRENT DATE IN ALL MESSAGES. AN EXAMPLE OF THIS PROMPT
WOULD BE " HI, THIS IS JANE ON JANUARY 15TH. I'M IN TODAY BUT I CAN'T TAKE YOUR CALL RIGHT
NOW. PLEASE LEAVE A MESSAGE AT THE TONE AND I WILL RETURN YOUR CALL AS SOON AS
POSSIBLE. THANK YOU". YOU WILL NOW BE ASKED TO RECORD YOUR NO-ANSWER GREETING.
{MESS803.VOX}
THE BUSY GREETING WILL LET CALLERS KNOW THAT YOU ARE ON THE PHONE.
AN EXAMPLE WOULD BE, "HI, THIS IS JANE. I'M ON THE PHONE RIGHT NOW AND CAN'T TAKE YOUR
CALL. PLEASE LEAVE A MESSAGE AFTER THE TONE, AND I WILL RETURN YOUR CALL AS SOON AS
POSSIBLE. THANK YOU." YOU WILL NOW BE ASKED TO RECORD YOUR BUSY GREETING.
{MESS804.VOX}
THE GONE HOME GREETING MAY BE ACTIVATED WHEN YOUR WORKDAY IS OVER. THIS PROMPT
WILL PLAY AUTOMATICALLY WHEN YOU LOG OUT OF THE SYSTEM. AN EXAMPLE WOULD BE, "HI,
THIS IS JANE. I HAVE GONE HOME FOR THE DAY. PLEASE LEAVE A MESSAGE AFTER THE TONE, AND
I WILL RETURN YOUR CALL TOMORROW. THANK YOU." YOU WILL NOW BE ASKED TO RECORD
YOUR GONE HOME GREETING.
{MESS805.VOX}
THE NEXT PROMPT TO RECORD IS YOUR NAME. IT CONSISTS OF YOUR FIRST AND LAST NAME. THIS
PROMPT IS PLAYED IN A VARIETY OF PLACES, AND WILL IDENTIFY YOUR MAILBOX TO CALLERS
LEAVING YOU MESSAGES. AN EXAMPLE OF A NAME PROMPT IS " JANE JACKSON". YOU WILL NOW
BE ASKED TO RECORD YOUR NAME PROMPT.
{MESS806.VOX}
?
FINALLY, IN ORDER TO REGISTER YOU IN THE COMPANY DIRECTORY YOU WILL HAVE TO SPELL
THE FIRST THREE LETTERS OF YOUR LAST NAME. CALLERS WHO DO NOT KNOW YOUR EXTENSION
CAN ACCESS YOUR MAILBOX BY SPELLING YOUR LAST NAME IN THE COMPANY DIRECTORY. FOR
EXAMPLE IF YOUR LAST NAME IS "JACKSON" PRESS 522. PLEASE ENTER THE THREE LETTERS OF
YOUR LAST NAME NOW.
{MESS807.VOX}
THIS COMPLETES YOUR MAILBOX TUTORIAL. IF YOU WISH TO MAKE ADDITIONAL CHANGES TO
YOUR PROMPTS, YOU CAN FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN YOUR USER'S GUIDE. IF YOU HAVE ANY
QUESTIONS ABOUT USING YOUR NEW MAILBOX, YOU MAY ASK YOUR SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR.
THANK YOU.
I&M
{MESS808.VOX}
SINCE YOU HAVE DECIDED TO NOT TO CARRY OUT YOUR TUTORIAL, YOU WILL NEED TO FOLLOW
THE INSTRUCTIONS IN YOUR USER'S GUIDE TO CHANGE YOUR PROMPTS AND PASSWORD. IF YOU
HAVE ANY QUESTIONS ABOUT USING YOUR NEW MAILBOX, YOU MAY ASK YOUR SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATOR. THANK YOU.
{MESS820.VOX}
GOOD MORNING! THIS IS YOUR WAKE UP CALL.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
91
{MESS821.VOX}
WELCOME TO YOUR GUEST MESSAGING CENTER. THE SYSTEM WILL NOTIFY YOU WHEN YOU HAVE
ANY NEW MESSAGES BY LIGHTING YOUR MESSAGE WAITING LIGHT. YOU MAY RETRIEVE YOUR
MESSAGES BY DIALING THE MESSAGE CENTER ACCESS NUMBER. AFTER LISTENING TO YOUR
MESSAGES FOLLOW PROMPTED INSTRUCTIONS. IF YOU NEED ANY FURTHER ASSISTANCE PLEASE
CONTACT A GUEST SERVICE AGENT. THANK YOU FOR USING PERFECT GUEST MESSAGING BY
TELECO.
{MESS899.VOX}
PRESS 1 FOR YES, PRESS 2 FOR NO.
{MESS900.VOX}
ALLOW MESSAGE LIGHTS.
{MESS901.VOX}
ALLOW BEEPER MESSAGE DELIVERY.
{MESS902.VOX}
ALLOW PHONE MESSAGE DELIVERY.
{MESS903.VOX}
ALLOW LONG DISTANCE MESSAGE DELIVERY.
{MESS904.VOX}
ALLOW CALL SCREENING.
{MESS905.VOX}
ALLOW CALL FORWARDING.
?
{MESS906.VOX}
ALLOW DO NOT DISTURB.
{MESS907.VOX}
ALLOW BUSY HOLD.
{MESS908.VOX}
ALLOW CALL QUEUING.
{MESS909.VOX}
I&M
ALLOW PRE-TRANSFER PAGING.
{MESS910.VOX}
ALLOW POST-TRANSFER PAGING.
{MESS911.VOX}
ALLOW DISTRIBUTION LISTS.
{MESS912.VOX}
ALLOW DIRECTORY REGISTRATION.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

92
Appendix
{MESS913.VOX}
ALLOW MESSAGE CONFIRMATION.
{MESS914.VOX}
ALLOW MESSAGE RECOVERY.
{MESS915.VOX}
ALLOW LOGIN / LOGOUT.
{MESS916.VOX}
ALLOW ACCESS TO ADMINISTRATOR FUNCTIONS.
{MESS917.VOX}
ENTER MAXIMUM NUMBER OF MESSAGES ALLOWED.
{MESS918.VOX}
ENTER MAXIMUM MESSAGE LENGTH.
{MESS919.VOX}
ENTER MAXIMUM DAYS TO SAVE MESSAGES.
{MESS920.VOX}
ENTER MAXIMUM RINGS FOR CALL PROGRESS.
{MESS921.VOX}
FOR NO TRANSFER SUPERVISION, PRESS 1,
FOR BUSY ONLY SUPERVISION, PRESS 2,
FOR BUSY NO ANSWER SUPERVISION, PRESS 3,
?
FOR MULTILINGUAL SUPERVISION, PRESS 4.
{MESS922.VOX}
ENTER MAILBOX LANGUAGE NUMBER.
{MESS930.VOX}
THERE HAS BEEN A SYSTEM PROBLEM. PLEASE HANG-UP AND TRY YOUR CALL AGAIN LATER.
SEGMENTED SPEECH
I&M
{1.SEG}
ZERO
{2.SEG}
ONE
{3.SEG}
TWO
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
93
{4.SEG}
THREE
{5.SEG}
FOUR
{6.SEG}
FIVE
{7.SEG}
SIX
{8.SEG}
SEVEN
{9.SEG}
EIGHT
{10.SEG}
NINE
{11.SEG}
TEN
{12.SEG}
ELEVEN
{13.SEG}
?
TWELVE
{14.SEG}
THIRTEEN
{15.SEG}
FOURTEEN
{16.SEG}
FIFTEEN
I&M
{17.SEG}
SIXTEEN
{18.SEG}
SEVENTEEN
{19.SEG}
EIGHTEEN
{20.SEG}
NINETEEN
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

94
Appendix
{21.SEG}
TWENTY
{22.SEG}
THIRTY
{23.SEG}
FORTY
{24.SEG}
FIFTY
{25.SEG}
SIXTY
{26.SEG}
SEVENTY
{27.SEG}
EIGHTY
{28.SEG}
NINETY
{29.SEG}
HUNDRED
{30.SEG}
THOUSAND
?
{31.SEG}
MILLION
{32.SEG}
CENTS
{33.SEG}
RECORD SILENCE
{34.SEG}
I&M
AM
{35.SEG}
PM
{36.SEG}
SECONDS
{37.SEG}
MINUTES
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
95
{38.SEG}
HOURS
{39.SEG}
MONTH
{40.SEG}
DAY
{41.SEG}
YEAR
{42.SEG}
JANUARY
{43.SEG}
FEBRUARY
{44.SEG}
MARCH
{45.SEG}
APRIL
{46.SEG}
MAY
{47.SEG}
?
JUNE
{48.SEG}
JULY
{49.SEG}
AUGUST
{50.SEG}
SEPTEMBER
I&M
{51.SEG}
OCTOBER
{52.SEG}
NOVEMBER
{53.SEG}
DECEMBER
{54.SEG}
STAR
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

96
Appendix
{55.SEG}
POUND
{56.SEG}
FLASH HOOK
{57.SEG}
COMMA
{58.SEG}
NUMBER
{59.SEG}
OH
{60.SEG}
MESSAGE
{61.SEG}
LESS THAN
{62.SEG}
EQUALS
{63.SEG}
GREATER THAN
{64.SEG}
?
QUESTION
{65.SEG}
AT
{66.SEG}
A
{67.SEG}
TODAY
I&M
{68.SEG}
YESTERDAY
{69.SEG}
MONDAY
{70.SEG}
TUESDAY
{71.SEG}
WEDNESDAY
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
97
{72.SEG}
THURSDAY
{73.SEG}
FRIDAY
{74.SEG}
SATURDAY
{75.SEG}
SUNDAY
{76.SEG}
K
{77.SEG}
L
{78.SEG}
M
{79.SEG}
N
{80.SEG}
O
{81.SEG}
P
?
{82.SEG}
Q
{83.SEG}
R
{84.SEG}
S
{85.SEG}
I&M
T
{86.SEG}
U
{87.SEG}
V
{88.SEG}
W
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

98
Appendix
{89.SEG}
X
{90.SEG}
Y
{91.SEG}
Z
{92.SEG}
EXTENSION
{93.SEG}
ADDED
{94.SEG}
CHANGED
{95.SEG}
DELETED
{96.SEG}
GREETING
{97.SEG}
MESSAGES
{98.SEG}
?
THROUGH
{99.SEG}
FROM
{100.SEG}
RANGE
{101.SEG}
PARAMETER
I&M
{102.SEG}
TIME
{103.SEG}
DATE
{104.SEG}
YES
{105.SEG}
NO
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
99
{106.SEG}
ENTRY
{107.SEG}
TELEPHONE
{108.SEG}
BOX
{109.SEG}
LIST
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

100
Appendix
J
Glossary
ACCUCALL
A utility developed from Rhetorex that teaches the Rhetorex voice board the different tones that the telephone system
generates.
AMIS (AUDIO MESSAGING INTERCHANGE SPECIFICATION)
An industry standard for networking voice mail systems that controls how voice messaging products from various
manufacturers interface with each other.
ADPCM
(Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation) A method of digitizing an analog signal where the sample value is
relative to the last sample. This format requires less disk space than the linear format; however, it may not be able to
reproduce the original signal well if amplitude fluctuations are too large.
ALTERNATE LANGUAGE
The system is available, at extra charge, with voice prompts in alternate languages -- English, French, German,
Spanish, Italian, Cantonese, Mandarin, Japanese, Arabic, Farsi, Russian, Polish, Hungarian, Greek, Thai, and
Portuguese. The language for each mailbox can be specified individually. Ask your Sales Representative for the most
current list of languages.
ANALOG
A method of telephony transmission in which the information from the source (for example, speech in a human
conversation) is converted into an electrical signal that varies continuously over a range of amplitude values. Also
used to refer to applications that use loop start signaling instead of digital signaling.
ARCHIVE
?
An option in the Desktop Interface application that allows the User to save message indefinitely.
ARGUMENTS
Additional command line information an application may need to do its job. For example, in a Voice Menu, if the
option to prompt the user for an answer is selected (Ask Question), other arguments such as the Prompt Number of the
question and the Mailbox in which to store the answer, are necessary.
ASCII
(American Standard Code for Information Interchange) A computer industry standard for representing letters,
numbers, punctuation, etc.
AUDIOTEX
I&M
See Voice Menu.
AUTO ATTENDANT
A telephony feature where incoming calls are answered by a recorded greeting and instructions to the caller. Callers
can direct their calls by pressing keys on their telephone keypads to make selections from Voice Menus.
BIOS
Basic Input-Output System. The set of permanently stored system service programs needed to manage the PC and
consisting of drivers and other software to control peripheral units.
BITMAP (BMP)
A raster graphic file format.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
101
BITS PER SAMPLE (BPS)
Determines the quality of a digital sample of a voice signal. For example, a 4 bit sample allows 16 unique values
while a 3 bit sample allows only 8.
BOX
See Mailbox.
CADENCE
A repeating cycle or pattern of tones and silence intervals generated by an audio signal.
CALLER
Anyone whose call routes through the Voice Mail system.
CALLER OPTIONS
Options that allow you to select an alternate routing for your call if the extension you are calling is busy or does not
answer.
CALL PROGRESS
The act of listening for the tones the telephone switch generates, analyzing them (Ring, Busy, Fast Busy), and
directing the call according to the response received.
CALL PROGRESSION TONE
An audible tone sent from the telephone system that indicates the progress of a call. Call progression tones include
dial tones, busy tones, and ring tones.
CALL ROUTING OPTIONS
Options that allow callers to select an alternate route for their calls if the extension they are calling is busy or does not
answer.
CENTREX
?
See Telephone System.
CHANNEL
In DOS, a channel is a line plus a VP resource (a logical path used for voice processing).
CLASS OF SERVICE
A list of pre-defined settings. Each mailbox is assigned to a class of service, depending on the features requested.
CLIENT
Workstations (or software on the workstations) that request information from a network server. The Desktop Interface
is client software.
CLIENT/SERVER
I&M
A networking technique where one computer (the server) sends information or provides services to other computers (
the clients) in response to commands sent by the clients.
CLOSED NETWORK
A group of separate sites, requiring communication with each other, who have completed the programming required to
allow them to exchange voice mail messages. All sites in a closed network must use Perfect Guest Messaging
Professional equipment.
CLUSTERED SERVER
One of a group of Voice Mail servers that are connected using Voice Mail Server Clustering, or AMIS. Clustered
servers can exchange users' voice messages, enabling a user to send a voice message to another Voice Mail User in a
remote location.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

102
Appendix
CO (CENTRAL OFFICE)
A telephone company location that provides switching for local telephone subscribers.
CONFIGURATION FILE
A file used by the voice board drivers to obtain initialization information about specific boards in your system.
CONTROL BUTTON
A set of buttons, similar to the controls on a tape recorder, which appear in the Message Control Panel and that allow
you to control recording and playback of messages.
CPE
Customer Premise Equipment
CYCLE
A complete signal sequence consisting of an on period (sound) and an off period (silence).
DATE COLUMN
The Message List column on a Desktop Interface Messages Window showing the date that each message was received.
DEFAULT
A preset value used by the software unless the user enters over-riding values.
DEFAULT VALUE
A preset value that is used by software in the absence of overwriting values entered by the user.
DIAL BY NAME DIRECTORY
A directory of last names and alternate name spellings that callers can access at the Auto Attendant or as an option in
a Voice Menu.
DIALING STRING
The actual number that Voice Mail dials. For example, a dialing string is entered when setting up a notification
?
schedule, or when defining the extension of a mailbox.
DID (DIRECT INWARD DIALING)
The ability for a caller outside a company to dial an internal extension directly without going through an attendant or
entering an extension.
DIGITIZATION RATE
How often a digital sampling is taken of an analog signal. A higher sampling rate produces better quality
reproduction of a signal but also requires more disk space to store. Digitization rate for messages and prompts must
be set up when the Voice Mail system is first installed.
DIAL-BY-NAME DIRECTORY
A list of mailbox owners on a Voice Mail system that are accessed by callers by entering the first three digits of the
I&M
desired User's name. The option is available through any Audiotex/Voice Menu, or as a default at the Company level
if the caller presses asterisk (*).
DISTRIBUTION LIST
A list containing the mailbox numbers of a group of Voice Mail users. Distribution lists allow you to easily send the
same message to a group of people by addressing the message to the group's distribution list.
DOUBLE CYCLE
A complete signal sequence consisting of two ON periods (sound) and two OFF periods (silence). Both ON times are
usually the same amplitude.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
103
DRIVER
Special software that enables application software (like Perfect Guest Messaging Professional) to tell computer
hardware what to do.
DRIVE PATH
The name you use to specify a file's location on a disk. For example, the file pbxview.exe might be described by the
path C:\APPLICATIONS\PBXVIEW.EXE.
DTMF (DUAL TONE MULTI-FREQUENCY)
A tone (a combination of a low and a high frequency tones) generated by a telephone system. Each tone has a special
meaning to telephony equipment. A familiar example is the different tones made by a touch-tone telephone when
certain keys are pressed.
DTMF-ON TIME
The length of the DTMF tone.
E1
The European equivalent of the North American T1 digital transmission line.
FAST FORWARD
A control button in the Message Control Panel that advances the current message by five seconds. Also the button on
the telephone keypad that advances playing a message five seconds.
FAST FORWARD TO END
A control button in the Message Control Panel that advances to the end of the current message.
FIELD
An area on a screen where you enter information required by the application. Some fields must be completed, some
have a default value, and others are optional. See also Default.
?
FIRMWARE
A set of program instructions that is resident (usually in EPROM) on an expansion board.
FORWARD
The act of sending a copy of a received message to another Voice Mail User, possibly with your comments attached.
Forward is an option on the Messages menu and is a button on the toolbar in the Desktop Interface.
FROM COLUMN
The column in the Message List that shows who sent your Voice Mail messages. Messages left by Voice Mail owners
are identified by first and last name when the message is sent from inside the Voice Mail system. Messages left by
callers from outside the system are identified by their Caller ID, if applicable. The User can also edit fields to assign
the call to a particular name.
I&M
GREETING
A recorded message you create that is played for a caller to your mailbox when you are unavailable to take the call.
GROUP
See Feature Group.
HEADING BUTTONS
Buttons at the top of the Message List that control the appearance of the Message List columns. You can change the
position of a column by dragging its heading button to the left or right of adjacent buttons. You can also change the
width of a column by stretching or shrinking its heading button.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

104
Appendix
HEADINGS POP-UP MENU
The Headings pop-up menu appears when you right-click over a heading button. This menu controls which columns
appear in the Message List.
HIGHLIGHTING
The act of selecting text with the mouse or keyboard.
HOOKFLASH
A station to PBX signaling method, normally activated by quickly depressing the handset cradle plunger on a
telephone.
INBAND SIGNALING
A method of integration between Voice Mail and the telephone system. Control signals are sent as DTMF tones on
the same line as the voice signals between Voice Mail and the telephone switch.
INBAND SIGNALING PACKETS
A group of DTMF tones that have a pre-determined meaning the telephony equipment. In Voice Mail applications,
inband signaling packets are generated and interpreted by both the telephone system and the voice mail software.
Because the meaning of tone groups can vary according to the telephone system being used, information specific to the
type of telephone system must be entered at the time of installation. This enables Voice Mail to correctly interpret the
tones it receives from the telephone system, and to generate tones that the telephone system can interpret. This
enables calls to be passed between the telephone and the Voice Mail, and the be processed correctly according to the
meaning of the specific telephone system's inband signaling packet tones.
INSIDE CALLER
A caller who is calling from inside your Voice Mail system.
INTERCONNECT COMPANY
A company that specializes in selling, installing, and maintaining telephone systems for businesses. Your customer's
?
interconnect can be a valuable source of information about the company's telephone system.
INTERDIGIT DELAY TIME
The time a caller can pause between pressing digits on the keypad when entering menu choices or a box number. If
the caller pauses longer than the Interdigit Delay Time, Voice Mail assumes that the caller is finished entering digits.
INTERFACE
The means by which a user communicates with a computer program or device. For example, a keyboard or mouse.
For example, the telephone keypad is a type of interface.
INTERRUPT
Enable a piece of hardware or a software process to momentarily "interrupt" the operation of the Cetral Processing
Unit (CPU) to use the resources of the CPU for its own purpose. When the interrupting task is completed, the CPU
I&M
resumes its regular processing.
IRQ
(Interrupt Request) A signal sent to the central processing unit (CPU) to temporarily suspend normal processing and
transfer control to an interrupt handling routine. Interrupts are generated by conditions such as completion of an I/O
process, detection of hardware failure, power failure, etc.
ISA
(Industry Standard Architecture) A common but older type of PC bus.
JUSTIFICATION
The way text is aligned within the margins on a page or column.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
105
KBPS
Kilobits per second. Kbps is not the same as KBps (kilobytes per second).
LENGTH COLUMN
The Message List column that shows the length of each message in seconds.
LOG IN
The act of identifying yourself to a network. In Voice Mail, you log in by pressing the Auto Login button on the
telephone, which communicates your mailbox number and password to the Voice Mail server. This term also refers to
logging into the Voice Mail system through the main screen. You would click Log On from the File menu and enter
the password.
LOG OUT
The act of denying access to other Users until a password is entered. In Voice Mail, you log out by selecting Log Off
from the File menu.
LOOP CURRENT
The current that flows through the circuit from the telephone system when the line is off hook.
LOOP DROP
The transition from loop current on to loop current off.
LOOP START
A method of notifying the CO of an off-hook condition using current flow, wither within a business or between the
business and outside lines.
MAILBOX
A box that plays an owner's greeting and then records and stores messages from callers. Each box can be customized
with different features for the individual user.
MAILBOX GREETING
?
A recorded message created by a voice mailbox owner played for callers when the box owner is unavailable to take the
call.
MAILBOX NAME
The recorded name associated with a voice mailbox. This name plays in certain situations to identify a mailbox to a
caller.
MAILBOX NUMBER
The unique number assigned to a mailbox that identifies the box the Voice Mail. This identifier allows messages to be
`addressed' to specific boxes. Mailbox numbers and extension numbers are usually (though not always) the same and
are often used interchangeably by voice mail users.
MAILBOX OWNER
I&M
A person who owns a voice mailbox on the Voice Mail software.
MAILBOX PARAMETERS
Values that control certain components of the Voice Mail system. Voice Mail offers many possible parameters and
combinations of parameters, making it possible to configure boxes to meet the needs of different box owners.
MCI
Message Centre Interface. A type of integration between the Voice Mail and the telephone system where packets are
sent to the Voice Mail via a serial link.
MENU
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

106
Appendix
A list of program commands. You select menu items by pressing Alt plus the highlighted letter, or by clicking the
item with the mouse.
MENU BAR
The area at the top of the Voice Mail Main Screen that lists the File, Mailbox, View, Help, etc. menu options.
MESSAGE
A recording made using the telephone and stored in a voice mailbox. Messages are stored as files on the Voice Mail
server.
MESSAGE PLAYBACK ORDER
The order in which recorded messages play back to the mailbox owner. The Voice Mail default is LIFO (Last In, First
Out), which means that the last message recorded will be the first one played. The Message Playback order can be
changed to FIFO (First In, First Out).
MESSAGE TYPE COLUMN
The column in the Message List that contains envelope icons, which indicate whether a message is new or played.
MINIMIZE
The act of reducing a Windows application window to an icon by clicking the minimize button located in the upper
right corner of the window.
MINIMUM RECORDING LENGTH
The shortest message that Voice Mail can recognize and record. Messages shorter than the Minimum Recording
Length are not recorded.
NETWORK
A group of computers connected together to allow communication and sharing of resources. Voice Mail runs on a
network. See more Network Glossary terms in the Network Section of the Installation Manual.
NEW MESSAGE
?
A message saved in an owner's mailbox, that has either not yet been played, or has been played but not saved or
deleted.
NOTIFICATION
A method whereby Voice Mail notifies an owner that a message is waiting. Notification can be by standard or cellular
telephone, by pager, or by e-mail.
OCR
Optical Character Recognition. OCR can "read" a fax, converting its graphic image into usable text.
OEM
(Original Equipment Manufacturer) The marker of equipment marketed by another vendor.
I&M
OFF HOOK
When a telephone handset is lifted from its cradle (or equivalent condition), the telephone line state is said to be "off
hook".
OFF PERIOD
Silence.
ON HOOK
When a telephone handset is returned to its cradle (or equivalent condition), the telephone line state is said to be "on
hook". A line is on hook when the line circuit is open and no current is flowing.
OPEN NETWORK
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
107
An Open Network (or Open Access Network) is a group of two or more sites that use AMIS-compatible voice
messaging equipment, and who exchange voice mail messages with each other. Voice Mail can be used at an Open
Access Site, but other options exist. Compare Closed Network. See also AMIS.
OPEN NETWORK SITE
Identifies a network site as not having a Voice Mail voice processing system.
OUT-OF-BAND SIGNALING
When integration between a Voice Mail server and a telephone system is accomplished using out-of-band signaling,
call progress information is passed between the telephone system and the server using a line separate from the lines
used for voice transmission. This is typically an RS-232 connection, and all signaling information is digital, rather
than using DTMF tones.
OWNER
An individual to whom a mailbox is assigned. Mailbox owners can access their voice mailboxes from inside or outside
the Voice Mail system to use voice messaging features. See also User.
PASSWORD
Allows mailbox owners private access to their mailboxes. The default for every mailbox is 1111. The password
provides security for the mailbox owner's messages. Also allows access to the system administration or the
installation and integration portions of Voice Mail. Passwords can contain any keypad digits, including 0-9, * and #.
PAUSE
The pause character is a comma, and can be entered as part of the dialing number in certain Voice Mail screens. The
system administrator sets the value of the pause character.
PBX
See Telephone System.
PC
In this manual, the term refers to IBM personal computer or compatible machine.
?
PERFECT GUEST MESSAGING PROFESSIONAL
A voice processing system that runs on a Microsoft Windows platform. Voice Mail can also be accessed through your
telephone keypad, without using Voice Mail.
PERIPHERAL
Any equipment, apart from the central processing unit, that provides a system with outside communication or
additional facilities.
PLAY
The command that opens the Message Control Panel where you play your messages. The Play command is executed
from the Messages menu, or by clicking the Play button in the toolbar.
I&M
PHANTOM MAILBOX
A mailbox with no physical extension. Phantom mailboxes must be in a separate Feature Group with no Message
Light Capability with Do Not Disturb always active. Phantom Mailboxes are used to as a link to a Voice Menu, as an
information mailbox, etc.
PORT
The interface point between voice mail and the telephone system. Within Voice Mail, a port is generally equal to a
single telephone line.
POTS
Plain Old Telephone Service.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

108
Appendix
POUND SIGN
One term for the "#" symbol on the telephone keypad. Also known as the hashmark or the octothorp.
PRIVATE
A message marked Private cannot be forwarded, rerouted, or archived by the message recipient.
PROMPT
Recorded instructions delivered by Voice Mail over the telephone to mailbox owners and callers. Prompts may include
information played each time you enter the system or instructions to box owners or callers on how to use the system.
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network.
QUESTION AND ANSWER (Q&A) BOX
A mailbox that is used to record answers to prerecorded questions.
RAM
Random Access Memory is temporary memory in a computer. This memory can be overwritten with new information.
The contents of RAM memory are lost when the electrical power to the PC is switched off.
RDSPTEST
A Rhetorex DOS utility that tests Rhetorex (RDSP) voice board configuration.
RECORD
A command that opens the Message Control Panel where you record your messages. The Record command is
executed from the Messages menu, or by clicking the Record button in the toolbar. Record is also a control button in
the Message Control Panel.
REFRESH
A menu command used to refresh the Message List with the latest information from the Voice Mail server. This
command is usually unnecessary because most events are updated in the Message List immediately.
?
REMOTE PHONE
A telephone located off-site from the Voice Mail installation. For example, if you call to check for messages from your
home or a cellular phone, you are using a remote phone.
REPLY
A message sent in answer to a received message. Voice Mail provides a Reply command , executed from the Messages
Menu through the handset or the Reply button on the toolbar, that automates the addressing of your reply if it was
internal.
REWIND
A control button in the Message Control Panel that resets the message to the beginning.
I&M
REWIND TO START
A control button in the Message Control Panel that resets the message to the beginning.
RINGBACK
The ring a caller hears when the telephone at the other end of the line is ringing.
ROTARY TELEPHONE
A style of telephone set that predates the touch-tone design. A rotary telephone has a round, rotating dial mechanism
rather than a keypad number entry system. Rotary telephones send different signals than touch-tone telephones.
SAMPLING RATE
How often a continuous analog voice signal is sampled or digitized into a binary value. The higher the sampling rate,
the higher the quality of the recording and the greater the disk space required for each second of signal.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
109
SAVE
In Voice Mail, marking a message as played, but not deleted. The Save command is executed from the Messages
menu through the handset, or by clicking the Save button in the toolbar.
SAVED MESSAGE
A message that a mailbox owner saves after playing.
SELECTING
The act of using a mouse to designate something on a computer screen as being ready to receive some function or
action. Selected text is usually outlined in some block of color.
SEQUENTIAL DIRECTORY
A list of mailbox users on a voice mail system that callers can access to locate a particular mailbox number. The list
includes individuals and is accessible from the Auto Attendant or can be offered within a Voice Menu.
SERVER
The computer in charge of running a network. The server on which voice mail runs is called the Voice Mail server. It
is recommended that the Voice Mail server be dedicated exclusively to running voice mail.
SHOWJUMP
A Rhetorex DOS utility that displays the jumper settings for a Rhetorex board at a given I/O port. This utility is
shipped with Voice Mail.
SINGLE-LINE
An analog telephone line. This is the common residential-type phone line. A "regular" touch-tone phone, also known
as a 2500 set, uses a single-line extension. Voice Mail must be connected to the telephone system through single lines.
SLIDE BAR
A slide control in the Message Control Panel that you can drag to control the message position. Dragging the slide
handle to the right advances the message position; dragging the slide handle to the left reverses the message position.
?
SMDI
Simplified Message Desk Interface. A type of integration between the Voice Mail and the telephone system where
packets are sent to the Voice Mail via a serial link.
SPIKE
A temporary signal or noise. If a signal duration is less that the PCPM table's filter spike parameter, then the signal is
not recognized as valid; in other words, the signal is considered a spike.
STOP
A control button in the Message Control Panel that stops message playback.
SUPERVISOR MENU
I&M
See System Administrator's Menu.
SWITCH
See Telephone System.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
The person who is responsible for configuring and maintaining the Voice Mail system.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR'S MENU
Also referred to as Supervisor Menu. A password-menu that allows the system administrator access to all Voice Mail
screens except parameters.
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

110
Appendix
T1
A digital transmission link with 1.544MBps capacity, carrying 24 voice channels. The Voice Mail T1 interface
supports Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) to identify the called number and Automatic Number
Identification (ANI) to identify the calling number also known as Caller ID.
TALK OFF
The false tripping of DTMF receivers caused by human speech mimicking DTMF tones.
TASKBAR
Windows 95/98/NT's primary button bar, which contains the Start button.
TELEPHONE SYSTEM
The collection of hardware and software that allows voice communication within a business and between the business
and the outside world. Sometimes known as switch, Centrex, or PBX.
TEMPLATE MAILBOX
A mailbox that serves as a master from which other (usually multiple) mailboxes are copied. A template mailbox is
useful when several mailbox owners need identical or similar parameters. Setting these parameters in one mailbox
and copying them for the individual owners' boxes eliminates repetitive programming.
TERMINATION TONE
A call progression tone that indicates that a connection has been terminated.
TITLE BAR
The title bar appears at the top of a Window and contains the name of the window or application running in that
window.
TOOLBAR
The row of icon buttons along the top of the Voice Mail Main Screen.
TOUCH-TONE PHONE
?
A type of telephone that uses a push-button keypad to generate different sounds for each number pushed. The sounds
are DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) codes.
TRUNK
A connection between the Central Office and a business' telephone system.
USER
An individual to whom a mailbox is assigned. Mailbox users can access their voice mailboxes from inside or outside
the Voice Mail system to use voice messaging features. See also Owner.
VOICE BOARD
A hardware card that process voice signals. The system requires Rhetorex or Dialogic voice boards to operate.
I&M
VOICE MAIL
A system of computer hardware and special-purpose software that interfaces with a company's phone system to
provide phone message record, store, and forward capability. Voice mail is also referred to as voice messaging.
VOICE MAILBOX
See Mailbox.
VOICE MESSAGING
See Voice Mail.
WAV
A type of sound file format common in Windows sound applications.
Release 3.01
Perfect Guest Messaging

Appendix
111
WINDOW
A boxed area on a computer screen that displays text or graphical images.
WINK
A timed momentary off-hook pulse communications protocol.
?
I&M
Perfect Guest Messaging
Release 3.01

Document Outline

Cover
Introduction
- Introduction to Perfect Guest Messaging
  - Overview
  - Voice Messaging
  - Automated Attendant
  - Voice Menus
  - Fax Services
  - Perfect Guest Messaging Gives You the Power To:
Installation
- CONTENTS
- Installation Checklist
- Before You Begin
- Getting Started
  - Step 1: Complete the Pre-Installation Worksheets
  - Step 2: Unpack and Inspect the System
  - Step 3: Placement of Perfect Guest Messaging
- Assembling the System
  - Step 1: Test the AC Outlet
  - Step 2: Install the Un-interruptable Power Supply
  - Step 3: Install the Sentinel Key
  - Step 4: Connect Telephone Lines
- Enter Dealer and Site Information
  - Enter the Dealer Information
  - Enter the Site Information
- Setting up the Network
  - What is a Network?
  - Guidelines
  - Step 1: Determine the network type
  - Step 2: Set up the Protocols for Your Particular Network
    - Configuring TCP/IP Under Windows 95/98
      - For Networks That Already Use TCP/IPƒ
    - Configuring TCP/IP Under Windows 95/98 when TCP/IP is already installed
    - When TCP/IP Is Not Installed on The Networkƒ
    - Considerations for Windows 95/98
      - Selecting An IP Address
  - Step 3: Install the Transport Management Utility
    - Using SessionQ
    - Session Q Central
    - Connections Info
    - Sessions Info
    - Filters
    - Options
      - Startup Tab
      - Connections Tab
      - VM Service Tab
      - Trace Tab
  - Step 4: Common Tasks for all Network Types and Environments
  - Step 5: Verify the Network Connection
- Logging On/Off the System
  - Logging on to Perfect Guest Messaging:
  - Logging off of Perfect Guest Messaging
- Changing System Passwords
  - To change the passwords:
- Verify System Parameters
  - What is Integration?
  - In Band Signaling (IBS)
  - SimpleŽ IBS
  - Out-of-Band Signaling (OBS)
  - SMDI Integration
  - Verify the System Parameters
  - Auto Attendant Parameters
  - Voice Mail Parameters
  - Fax Parameters
  - Transfer Parameters
  - Disconnect Parameters
  - Inband Parameters
  - Notification Parameters
  - Message Light Parameters
  - Global Parameters
  - Channel Internal Parameters
  - Channel External Parameters
  - Channel Busy Only Parameters
- Configure the System for Perfect Stay
  - 1. Confirm that the correct mailboxes are entered on the Perfect Guest Messaging System
  - 2. Verify the Network Connection
  - 3. Enable Perfect Guest Messaging for Perfect Stay using the System Configuration Utility
  - 4. Verify that the PMS.DAT file is being transferred correctly
  - 5. Test the System
- Program the Telephone System
  - Hardware Requirements
  - Software/Programming Requirements
  - Automated Attendant Extensions
  - Outdial Notification Extension
  - Integration Parameters
  - Bypass Mode
  - Other Modifications
- Install the Desktop Interface
  - Install the Desktop Software
  - Install the Player for Unified Messaging via E-Mail Integration
- Testing Perfect Guest Messaging
- Training
  - System Administrator Training
  - User Training
  - Console Operator Training
- Final Cutover
- Additional Information
  - Startup Options
  - Dialstring Codes
  - Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse
- Teleco Technical Support
  - Before Calling Technical Support
Database Configuration
- CONTENTS
- Introduction To System Administration
- Steps for First-Time System Configuration
- The Main Menu
  - Using the Keyboard Instead of the Mouse
- Logging On/Off and Shutting Down the System
  - Logging on to Perfect Guest Messaging:
  - Logging off of Perfect Guest Messaging
  - Shutting Down Perfect Guest Messaging
- Company
  - To Access:
  - Holidays
    - Adding a Holiday
  - Multi-Lingual
    - Multi-Lingual Considerations
  - Incoming Status Tab
    - Alternate Method of Multiple Company Configuration
  - Business Hours Tab
  - Single Digit Options Tab
    - Special Single Digit Option Values
  - Greetings Tab
- Mailbox Classes of Service
  - To Access:
  - Storage Field Descriptions
  - Notification Field Descriptions
  - Transfer Supervision Field Descriptions
  - Transfer Options Field Descriptions
  - Mailbox Options Field Descriptions
- Mailboxes
  - To Access Mailbox features:
  - Creating Mailboxes
  - Deleting or Resetting Mailboxes
    - Physically Delete a Mailbox/Keep the Personal greetings
    - Keep the Mailbox/Delete the Greetings and Messages
  - Editing Mailboxes
  - Personal Options Tab
  - Transfer Options Tab
  - Message Forwarding Tab
  - Alternate Spelling Tab
  - Other Options Tab
  - LAP Options Tab
  - Notification … Set up Outcalling Options For a User
  - Distribution Lists
    - Creating a Broadcast Distribution List
- System
  - Trace
  - Commands
  - Status
  - Debug
  - Utilities
- View
  - Port Activity
  - Mailbox Status
  - Fax Status
  - Call Routing Tables
    - To access Call Routing Tables:
    - To add a Call Routing Table:
      - Adding a Caller ID Routing Table:
      - Mapping by Area Code or City Exchange
      - Adding a PIN Number Routing Table:
- Voice Menus
  - To Access:
  - 1 - Naming a Voice Menu
  - 2 - Assigning Options on the Voice Menu Entry Form
  - 3 - Building Your Voice Menu
  - 4 - Assigning a Schedule to the Voice Menu
  - 5 - Activating Your Voice Menu
    - Mailbox Level
    - Company Level
  - 6 - Recording Voice Menu Prompts
    - Choosing a Prompt Number:
    - Recording the Prompt:
  - Voice Menu Worksheets
  - Demonstration Voice Menu
- Creating Global Menu Schedules
  - Voice Menu Schedules
  - E-Mail Schedules
  - Call Routing Table Schedules
- Performing System Administration over the Telephone
  - Accessing the System Administrator Menu
  - The System Administrator Menu
  - Create or Delete Mailboxes
  - Configure Class of Service
  - System Parameters
  - Recording System Prompts and Company Greetings
  - Change the Holiday Greeting
Optional Applications
- CONTENTS
- Enabling AMIS Networking
  - 1. Design the Network
  - 2. Enable AMIS Networking With the System Configuration Utility
  - 3. Adding and Defining AMIS Network Sites
  - AMIS Network Sites Worksheet
- Local Area Paging (L.A.P)
  - 1. Complete the Licensing Agreement
  - 2. Install the Paging Transmitter
  - 3. Enable L.A.P. With the System Configuration Utility
  - 4. Configure L.A.P for Each Mailbox
    - Set up User to be Paged for All Incoming Calls
    - Transfer Call Back to the Users Extension
    - Transfer Call to the Users Phantom DN
- Unified Messaging Via E-Mail
  - Generic MAPI Player Versus Outlook Player
  - 1. Ensure that Microsoft Messaging is Installed
  - 2. Create an E-Mail Account for Perfect Guest Messaging
  - Configure Perfect Guest Messaging to Operate in MAPI Mode
  - 4. Configure Client So That It Does Not Save a Copy of Sent Messages
  - 5. Edit Appropriate Mailboxes for Unified Messaging via E-Mail
  - 6. Install the E-Mail Player on Each Users Desktop
- Setting up Fax Services
  - 1. Set Up Fax Services Using the System Configuration Utility
    - a. Run the Setup Program for Fax
    - b. Configure the Fax Board
  - 2. Modify Fax Parameters
  - 3. Reboot the System
  - 4. Verify that the …Fax Argument Has Been Added to the Shortcuts
- Fax On Demand
  - 1. Create the Fax On Demand Voice Menu
  - 2. Add Fax on Demand Documents to the System
    - Faxing documents to Perfect Guest Messaging
    - Copying documents to Perfect Guest Messaging
- Fax Mail
  - 1. Designate a Single-Digit Option for Fax
  - 2. Create a V-Menu for Each Mailbox That Will Use Fax Mail
- Generating Reports
  - Calls Details Summary
  - Calls Per Hour
  - Mailbox Usage
  - Mailbox Information
  - System Parameters
  - Classes of Service
Appendix
- CONTENTS
- Perfect Guest Messaging Configuration
  - Perfect Guest Messaging Program Group
  - Starting Perfect Guest Messaging
  - Directory Structure of Perfect Guest Messaging
- System Configuration Utility
  - Dealer Information
  - Site Information
  - Voice Board Settings
    - Hardware Settings
    - Voice Board Options
    - Reserved Codes
    - Global Tone Settings
    - Confirmation
    - Message Lights
  - PBX Integration
    - Telephone System Integration Wizard
  - SMDI/MCI Settings
    - Editing Port Settings
    - Editing Additional SMDI/MCI Settings
  - Caller ID Settings
  - Fax Settings
  - General Settings
    - Log Options
    - Mailbox Options
    - Daily Hours
    - Message Options
    - System Options
  - MAPI Information
  - REORGANIZATION SETTINGS
  - AMIS Settings
  - Local Area Paging
  - Property Management System (Perfect STAY!)
  - Dialup Properties
- The PERFECT.INI file
- Troubleshooting
  - How to Effectively Troubleshoot Problems
  - System Hardware (Peripherals)
  - Set Up
  - Perfect Guest Messaging Access Problems
  - System Administrator Problems
  - User Problems
  - Caller Problems
  - Messages
  - Perfect Guest Messaging Features
  - Mailboxes
  - Class of Services
  - Notification
  - Reports
- Adding AudioBoards
- Adding Rhetorex Audio Boards
  - Configuring the Rhetorex Audio Board(s)
  - Define the Settings Selected in the System Configuration Utility
  - If Telephone System is Not Defined in Software: Perform Call Analysis
- Adding Dialogic Audio Boards
  - Dialogic Audio Boards
  - Configuring Dialogic Boards
    - Setting the Interrupt Level (JP1)
    - Setting the Base Memory Address (JP5 and JP6)
    - Multiple Audio Board Installation (JP7)
    - Setting the Offset Address (SW1)
  - If Telephone System is Not Defined in Software: Perform Call Analysis
  - PBXpert
    - Load the Audio Drivers with a …G150 Switch:
    - Start PBXpert:
- Installing a FAX Board
  - Installing the GammaLink FAX Board
  - Software Setup
- System Prompts
- Glossary